







































































































“ Many of the mountains had snow-clad 
summits ” 








THE LAND OF 
ICE AND SNOW 


Or, ADVENTURES IN ALASKA 


£y 

Edwin J. Houston, A. M., Ph. D. (Princeton) 

U 

Author of 

*' Five Months on a Derelict,” “ Wrecked on a Coral Island,” 

“ In Captivity in the Pacific,” “At School in the Cannibal Islands,” “A Chip 
of the Old Block," “ The Land of Drought,” “ The Jaws of Death,” 
“The Yellow Magnet,” “Once a Volcano,” “The North 
Pole Series,” “The Young Prospector.” “The Boy 
Electrician,” “The Boy Geologist,” “The 
Wonder Book of Science” 


THE GRIFFITH & ROWLAND PRESS 

PHILADELPHIA 

BOSTON CHICAGO ST. LOUIS 

TORONTO, CAN. 










Copyright 1912 by 
A. J. ROWLAND, Secretary 

Published September, 1912 




©CI.A328074 

j 





PREFACE 


“ The Land of Ice and Snow ” tells of the adven¬ 
tures of Happy and some of his friends in Alaska. An 
effort has been made in this the last volume of The 
Young Mineralogist Series, to give to its readers the 
most reliable information of this remote territory of 
the United States, as found in government reports and 
in the newspapers of Alaska, to both of which sources 
the author acknowledges his indebtedness. He is also 
indebted to various recent works on Alaska, especially 
to the publication of Major-General Greely. 

The author trusts that “ The Land of Ice and Snow,” 
the sixth and last volume of The Mineralogist Series, 
besides affording its readers pleasure in hearing of the 
many adventures and doings of its characters, will not 
fail to accomplish two other things, i. e., to give some 
idea of the mineral deposits and minerals of the great 
Southwest and great Northwest of the United States, 
as well as to impress on its readers the great truth that 
there is great good luck in all things, no matter how 
bad they may seem at first sight, provided only one is 
willing to determine on believing it so. 

E. J. H. 

Philadelphia, May, 1912. 


CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

I. Nearly Stranded in Nome .. n 

II. Again at the Gordon Mine. 25 

III. Why Happy, Blavinski, and Dimitri 

went to Alaska. 38 

IV. Getting Ready for Alaska. 50 

V. The Meeting at Seattle. 64 

VI. The Inside Passage. 75 

VII. The Lands of the Totem-pole. 89 

VIII. The Treadwell Mines. 103 

IX. Down the Lewes River to Dawson on 

the Yukon. 115 

X. Central Alaska. 128 

XI. The Entertainment at a Fairbanks 

Mining-camp. 141 

XII. Further Adventures of Henry Clin¬ 
ton and Nicholas Dimitri. 154 

XIII. Mashinsky. 167 

XIV. The Capture of Mashinsky. 182 

XV. Hunting-camp on the Slopes of Mount 

McKinley. 200 

















CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

XVI. Happy Saves the Life of Nicholas 

Dimitri. 215 

XVII. Happy Finds his Uncle and Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri his Son. 230 

XVIII. Wiiat Followed the Shooting of 

the Grizzlies. 244 

XIX. Other Big Alaskan Game. 257 

XX. How Happy Discovered Rich Cop¬ 
per Prospects. 274 

XXL The Happy Copper Prospects. 288 

XXII. Some Birds of Alaska. 304 

XXIII. A Study of an Alaskan Glacier. 

The Ice-worm. 315 

XXIV. A New Use for a Lasso or Rope. ... 328 

XXV. The New Coal-field. 343 

XXVI. The Copper River & Northwestern 

Railroad . 357 

XXVII. Cordova, the Open Sesame to Cen¬ 
tral Alaska. 367 

XXVIII. The Controller Bay Harbor Myth 378 

XXIX. Conclusion. 388 


Appendix 


399 
















LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 


Page 

“ Many of the mountains had snow-clad sum¬ 
mits ” . Frontispiece 

“ The man objected, but under the persuasive 

gleaming of the revolvers - ” . ip ^ 

“ The lad stuck to the animal ”. . .. . 152 

“ The other animal . . . made for Happy ” . 22 /' 

" Happy sivung the . . . rope around his head ”. 334 

“ There was a grand welcome ... at Gordon ”. 391 







CHARACTERS 


Nicholas Dimitri, son of Professor Dimitri. 

Henry Earle Clinton, uncle of Happy. 

Robert Harold Gordon, Sr., ) 

l Mining engineers. 

Robert Harold Gordon, Jr., ) 

Robert Harold Gordon, 3RD, or Rob, only son of 
Robert Harold Gordon, Jr. 

John Alexander Christian, mining engineer and 
friend of Robert Harold Gordon, Sr. 

Prof. Joseph Jackson Engleman, geologist and 
mining engineer. 

Ralph Earle Clinton, or Happy, a confirmed op¬ 
timist. 

Emil Carl Schloss, fond of chemistry. 

Norman Edward Taggart, from Boston, nephew of 
Professor Engleman. 

James Patrick McNally, office boy for Professor 
Engleman. 

Heinrich Schloss, Emil’s uncle. 

Petrof Blavinski, a Russian nobleman. 

Prof. Nicola Dimitri, a Russian nobleman. 

B. B. Blank, a Philadelphia detective. 


CHARACTERS 


Ivan Petromelinski, a Russian detective. 

Sigismond Mashinsky, Russian thief and murderer. 
Colorado Bill, cowboy guide, fond of Happy. 

Pete, cowboy, an acquaintance of Bill. 
Awake-in-the-Night, Indian guide. 

Sam Ling, Chinese cook. 

Light-of-the-Sun, head shaman of the Pueblos. 
Scipio, colored cook. 

John M. Justice, a Philadelphian, thoroughly con¬ 
versant with Alaska. 

Joe, assistant in Nome restaurant. 

Zeke, licensed hunting-guide. 

Proprietor of restaurant, Nome. Prospectors, miners, 
guides, etc. Mounted Police of the Northwest. 




Map of Alaska 

(From recent United States publications) 
















































































The Land of Ice and Snow 


CHAPTER I 

Nearly Stranded in Nome 

“ Confound your insolence. Do you take me for a 
dead-beat ? ” 

“ Stranger, what I take ye fer is me own busi¬ 
ness, but I’ll say I reckon ye’ll either pay for what 
ye’ve eaten, or I’ll hand ye over ter one of the sheriff’s 
men.” 

“ But I tell you I’ve had my pockets picked in your 
place and have lost my money. Can’t you trust me 
for a few dollars, the cost of the meal ? ” 

“ Nary a trust,” was the reply. “ Here, Joe,” he 
said to his assistant, “ go arsk the sheriff to send me 
one of his men to run this feller in fer tryin’ to do 
this restaurant out of a meal. I reckon ye’ll find the 
sheriff at the hotel up the street.” 

The above conversation occurred in a restaurant in 
Nome, on the Seward Peninsula, Alaska, one day near 
the middle of February, 19—. The man whose arrest 
was threatened for inability to pay for the meal he 
had just eaten was about thirty years of age. He 
had evidently at one time been fairly well-to-do, as 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


could be seen from his clothing, which, like the man 
himself, showed hard wear. 

Like thousands of others, the young man had been 
attracted by the rich gold deposits of Alaska, es¬ 
pecially by the beach sands of Nome. He had come 
from his home in St. Petersburg, Russia, to this part 
of the land, that for at least eight months of the year 
is almost entirely isolated. 

The young man was Nicholas Dimitri, a nobleman 
closely related to the Czar of Russia. Despite his 
appearance, he had put eight hundred dollars in 
United States bank-notes in an inner pocket of his coat. 
When he attempted to pay his bill with some loose 
money he had placed in another pocket, he found that 
both sums had been stolen. 

The man at the restaurant who threatened him with 
arrest was the proprietor. He had a low, receding 
forehead and, as was afterward discovered, was as¬ 
sociated with thieves and card-sharpers. 

The Russian again requested that he be trusted for 
the few dollars, the cost of the meal, as he certainly 
would be able to pay; for, as he said, he knew some 
of the people of the town. The proprietor however 
refused to trust him. 

“ Is this the fellow you want run in?” said the 
sheriff’s aid, who by this time had reached the res¬ 
taurant. 

“ That’s the feller,” was the reply of the proprietor. 

“ With what do you charge him ? ” 

12 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Tryin’ to do this here place out of the price of a 
meal.” 

“What do you say to this charge?” inquired the 
aid of the Russian. “ Is it true ? ” 

“ It is true that I have eaten a meal here that I’ve 
not paid for. It is not true that I am endeavor¬ 
ing to beat the place. My pocket has been picked in 
this place of some eight hundred dollars.” 

“ Have you any other money in Nome ? ” 

“ No; that was all.” 

“ Then I will be obliged to arrest you.” 

There were nearly a dozen people in the restaurant, 
but they seemed to be not at all surprised at what 
was happening, as if such an occurrence was common. 
Drawing a pair of handcuffs from one of his coat 
pockets, the sheriff’s aid said to the Russian: 

“ I must ask you to let me put these on.” 

“ I will not submit to such indignity,” the Russian 
replied angrily. “ Never before have I been arrested; 
I certainly do not intend to be disgraced by hand¬ 
cuffs. I will pass you my word as a gentleman to go 
with you wherever you wish to take me and will make 
no effort to escape.” 

The aid appeared disposed to grant the request of 
the Russian, especially as he spoke of bringing a 
charge against the restaurant for harboring pick¬ 
pockets, but the proprietor objected. While they were 
arguing the matter, a man of about fifty years of age, 
over six feet in height, and magnificently built, who 
had been dining alone at a table in a corner of the 
13 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

room, left the table, and coming to the excited group, 
remarked: 

“ Wall, ye fellers sartinly be kickin’ up a tarnation 
row here. What be it all about? Suppose ye tell 
me, stranger,” turning to the Russian. “ Ef I kin 
help ye, I’ll be glad to do it.” 

“ You are very kind, sir,” said the Russian. “ This 
insolent fellow,” pointing to the proprietor, “ claims 
I’m a dead-beat because, while looking for my pocket- 
book to pay for what I have eaten, I find I have been 
robbed; and,” he added, “ robbed in this very room, 
for I had placed my pocketbook in the inner pocket 
of my coat when I came here. I ask you,” he said, 
turning to the man who had just spoken to him, “ do 
I look like a man who would do such a thing? Come 
now, you are intelligent and know enough of men to 
be able to judge. Tell me, do I look like a cheat or 
dead-beat ? ” 

“ Ye kin bet yer bottom dollar ye don’t,” said the 
man. “ Yer face be the face of an honest man. See 
here,” he said, turning to the proprietor, “ ye must be 
very hard up to take on so about the price of a meal, 
and,” he added, “ ye must be a cheat yerself to sus¬ 
picion others. What be the amount of that ere bill? 
Five dollars,” he said, after glancing at it when it was 
placed in his hand. “ Though not very big, yet it 
be wery steep for a single eat, much greater than most 
places would hev axed. I’ll settle it. Now tell me 
what I owe fer what I hev bought. I’m goin’ to clear 
out of this place quick, ef ye treat yer customers in 
14 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


this way. I expect ye hev stuck me like ye hev this 
gent. Five dollars?” he said. “Wall, the total’s ten 
dollars. Here, take it,” removing a very thin pocket- 
book from his pocket and taking from it two five-dol- 
lar bills. “ Now,” he said to the proprietor, “ I kin 
say that I think ye be a low-down feller, and ef ye 
want any satisfaction fer what I hev said, come out¬ 
side and I’ll give ye a chance.” 

“ I only want what’s cornin’ ter me,” said the pro¬ 
prietor in an angry tone. 

“ I reckon ye don’t mean that,” was the reply, “ fer 
the way I figure it, the biggest licking ye’ve ever had in 
yef life should be cornin’ ter ye fer not knowin’ a gent 
when ye see him.” 

“ My dear sir,” said the Russian, “ I am greatly 
obliged to you for helping me out of my little predica¬ 
ment. This is my name,” he said, handing him a 
card bearing the name “ Nicholas Dimitri, St. Peters¬ 
burg, Russia.” “ But do not get into any fight or row 
with this low fellow. What is your name ? ” 

“ Clinton be my name. Henry Earle Clinton.” 

“From the United States?” 

“ Yes; from Texas.” 

“ Have you been an insider here long? ” 

“ I hev been in Alaska fer more’n five years. And 
you? ” said Clinton to Dimitri. 

“ I also am an insider, but have been here only two 
years. But let’s leave this wretched place.” 

The two now left the restaurant and walked slowly 
down the main street. 


15 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I hope your kind loan of five dollars will not in¬ 
convenience you,” said Dimitri. “ Since I have been 
robbed of all my cash, I shall not be able to pay you 
until I can see someone I know, or obtain some work 
to see me through the winter here.” 

“ Don’t worry yerself about sech a little loan,” re¬ 
plied Clinton. “ Ye seed how thin my pocketbook 
was, but thet wur only a bluff. I hev a roll of about 
eight hundred dollars in an inner pocket. See here,” 
he said, “ I’ll show it to ye jest to make ye feel com¬ 
fortable.” 

Dimitri watched Clinton as he looked for the pocket- 
book containing the roll of money in his pocket. 

“ Great Scott! I hev been robbed like yerself. Come 
on,” he said, turning around sharply. 

“Where are you going?” inquired Dimitri. 

“ Straight back to thet ere place. I remember a 
feller thar who rubbed up agin me when I war fust 
goin’ in. I believe he’s the thief. If he’s thar now I’ll 
make him shell out. 

“ Look here, gents,” said the proprietor when the 
two men entered the room, “ ef ye don’t git out of this 
here place quick I’ll put ye out.” 

“Ye will, will ye?” said Clinton. “Suppose ye 
begin with me. Ef ye do I reckon ye’ll find it the 
hardest piece of work you ever undertook sense yer 
mother weaned ye. I hevn’t any more to say ter 
ye now, though I reckon I’ll hev a heap that’ll be w*ery 
disagreeable to ye later on.” 

16 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“Do you see the man you are looking for?” in¬ 
quired Dimitri in a low tone. 

“ I do fer a fact,” was the reply. “ Thar he be,” 
pointing to a man who suddenly rose from the table 
and walked hurriedly toward the door. 

But Clinton slipped between him and the door, and 
said: 

“ I reckon I hev a few words to say to ye afore ye 
leave this room.” 

“What words hev you got to say?” inquired the 
man in an angry tone. 

“ Well, this is what I’ve got to say. I’ll apologize 
arterwards ef I’m wrong. I believe you’re a thief. 
Turn out yer pockets so I kin see what ye hev in ’em.” 

This demand, made as it was by a man of magnifi¬ 
cent physique and strength, not only worried the man 
to whom it was made, but seemed even more to worry 
the proprietor, who turned pale and, calling to his 
assistant, said: 

“ Joe, go fer that sheriff’s aid agin. I don’t intend 
thet this place shell hev its repertation hurt by sech 
fellers as these here; ” and then he said, “ Now I think 
of it, Joe, ye needn’t go. I’ll go myself,” hurrying 
toward the door. 

“ Not much ye won’t,” said Clinton. “ Ye stay here 
with the other feller, and when I’m through lookin’ at 
his pockets I reckon I’ll examine yourn.” 

There were at least a dozen men in the restaurant. 
Like most of those in mining towns, nearly all were 
square men. The proprietor begged them to help him 
17 


B 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


throw the two fellows out for kicking up a row, but 
Clinton, who knew how to handle such men, said: 

“ Gents, I’m shore ye be squar men. Now both this 
gent,” pointing to Dimitri, “ and myself hev been 
robbed within less than an hour in this here room. I 
hev good reasons fer thinkin’ this feller is a thief, and 
I think the man wot keeps the place be no better. Ef 
they be true men they’ll be all too glad ter prove I’m a 
liar. Don’t ye think it would be fair, gents, if they 
turned their pockets inside out?” 

The man whom Clinton had recognized as the man 
who had brushed against him when he entered the 
room, indignantly protested that he would not submit 
to such a thing as being searched, nor would he turn 
his pockets inside out for anybody, much less for one 
like this fellow, pointing to Clinton. 

Almost instantly revolvers appeared in the hands 
of Clinton and most of the men, with a demand that 
the search be made. 

“ Thar, I telled ye so! ” exclaimed Clinton, as one 
of the men making the search took a roll of bills out 
of the suspected man’s pocket. “ Thet be my roll. 
Now, gents, so I kin prove it, I’ll ask ye,” he said, 
turning to one of the men, “ to examine it and see ef 
it corresponds with what I tell ye. Ye will find six 
one-hundred-dollar bills, two fifty-dollar bills, one hun¬ 
dred dollars in tens, and some small stuff. I hevn’t 
troubled myself to remember how much.” 

“The roll’s yourn,” said the man, handing it to 
Clinton. 

18 



The man objected . . . but under the per¬ 
suasive gleaming of the revolvers-” 

Page 19 








The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I’m sorry to hev troubled ye, gents,” said the 
proprietor. “ Please leave my place and let things 
quiet down.” 

“ I reckon,” said Clinton, “ thet you too will hev to 
turn yer pockets inside out.” 

The man objected strenuously, but under the per¬ 
suasive gleaming of the revolvers pointed at him he 
permitted his pockets to be gone through, when the 
wallet that had been stolen from Dimitri was found 
in a deep, hip pocket under his coat. 

“ That’s the pocketbook that was stolen from me! ” 
exclaimed Dimitri. “ Shall I describe it? ” 

“ I reckon ye had better,” said the man to whom it 
had been handed, “ an’ so make it fair fer both.” 

“ You will find it contains eight one-hundred-dollar 
United States notes. But I can do better than that,” 
he added; “ the numbers run continuously frorn 51,509 
to 51,516. I’m particular about such things.” 

“ The figures be correct and the wad is yourn,” said 
the man. 

“ But one moment,” said Dimitri, “ one or the other 
of these men has two ten-dollar bills stowed away 
somewhere, since they were also stolen from me.” 

A search being made they were found on the pro¬ 
prietor. 

“ Now,” said Clinton, smiling, to the sheriff’s aid 
who had again come to the place. “ I reckon we kin 
hand over these fellers to you.” 

“ Ye sure kin,” was the reply. 

“ We will appear against them in the morning,” said 
19 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Dimitri and Clinton, as the aid slipped handcuffs on 
each of the men. 

“ And so will we,” added two of the men who had 
aided in the recovery of the stolen money. 

Instead of objecting to going with the sheriff’s aid, 
the men were apparently only too glad to get safely 
out of reach of the men who constituted what might 
have been called a vigilance committee; for one of 
them had been heard asking for a rope, while threats 
of stringing up the thieves were heard from several of 
the others. 

“ Gents,” added Clinton, “ the drinks be on me. 
Bring us clean glasses, Joe,” he said to the proprietor’s 
assistant, “ and a bottle thet be sealed. I’d hesitate to 
sample an open bottle in this here place arter wot I hev 
seed.” 

“ Here’s to ye, gents,” said Clinton, after the bottle 
had been opened and each man had filled his glass with 
as much as he wished. 

After a few minutes’ talk, Clinton and Dimitri 
had left the restaurant and Were again walking up the 
main street of Nome. 

“ Unless I am mistaken,” said Dimitri, “ what the 
thief did to you in the saloon would have placed you 
in the same position in which I was placed. You 
would have been without any money.” 

“ I reckon ye be right,” was the reply. “ Ef I hed 
not yanked thet out of the feller’s pocket I would hev 
been without anything to pay fer a bed ternight.” 

“ I am much obliged to you for what you have 
20 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


done,” said the Russian. “ I hope you will let me 
become acquainted with you. I need not tell you 
how extremely dull Nome is in winter; I know very 
few people here.” * 

“ I kin shake hands with ye thar, stranger,” said 
Clinton. “ Thar beant any big crowd of fellers wot 
I know in this town. Moreover, I like yer looks, so 
we’ll be chums, or pards, whichever ye like, from this 
time.” 

“ Agreed,” said Dimitri. “ What shall I call you? ” 

“ They call me Texas Harry,” was the reply. 
ei Ye kin call me Harry fer short ef ye like. And 
what shall I call ye ? ” 

“ Call me Nicholas,” replied the Russian. “ You 
are a prospector, are you not? ” 

“ Yes.” 

“ Have you struck anything? ” inquired the Russian. 

“ Yes; and I’ve struck it rich,” replied the Texan. 

“ Placer or lode? ” 

“ Placer; but tin, not gold.” 

“ Far from here? ” 

“ No; at a point almost as far west as ye can go in 
all Alaska.” 

“Do you mean near Cape Prince of Wales?” in¬ 
quired Dimitri. 

“ Yes. And hev ye struck anything, Nicholas? ” 

“ I have,” was the reply; “ and the curious thing 
is that my prospect is also a tin prospect, not a placer, 
but a lode situated near your placer, a short distance 
farther up the stream to the east.” 

21 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


A more extended description of the finds of each of 
these men showed that, while not quite together, they 
were in practically the same section of country. 

“ Ef we two fellers don’t be nateral-born pards I’d 
like to know the reason,” said Clinton. “ Shall we be 
chums or pards? Tell me which? ” 

“ Well, let’s call it both chums and partners,” said 
Dimitri. “ Of course it is understood,” he continued, 
“ that we will put our claims in partnership at a valua¬ 
tion to be agreed upon. If your claims are more valua¬ 
ble than mine, I am not willing to take any advantage 
of your generosity.” 

“ Let’s go ter some place whar we kin sit down and 
chin,” said Clinton. 

“ Then come to my shack,” said Dimitri. 

“ Suppose ye begin your yarn fust, Nicholas, then 
I’ll spin mine,” said Clinton, when they had reached 
the shack. 

“ All right, Harry,” replied Dimitri, and then began 
as follows: 

“ I was born in Russia and belong to a rich, influ¬ 
ential family. My father is Professor Dimitri, a well- 
known geologist and mining engineer. I have always 
been interested in prospecting and mining, and left 
Russia for this country several years ago, attracted 
by the increasing number of gold-fields that had re¬ 
cently been discovered.” 

“ Hev ye had much luck, Nicholas?” said Clinton. 

“ At first I was fairly successful, but afterward I 
22 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


had such poor luck that I have been ashamed to keep 
my people in Russia acquainted with my movements. 
The tin prospect I was telling you about, however, 
is, I think, so valuable that I believe my luck has 
changed for good.” 

“ And ye be up in the lamin’ wot mining fellers are 
supposed to know? ” 

“ I have received an excellent education as a mi¬ 
ning engineer, both in Europe and America.” 

“ Thet will be lucky,” said Clinton, “ when we begin 
workin’ on our claims.” 

“ Now let me hear a little bit of your life,” said 
Dimitri. 

“ It beant so ornamental as yourn,” was the reply. 
“ I wuz raised on a ranch in Texas, whar I hev a 
brother livin’ now. At least I hope he be living, but 
I hev heerd nothin’ from him fer some years.” 

“ Had your brother any family? ” inquired Dimitri. 

“ When I last seed him he had only one youngster, 
a lad about nine or ten years of age.” 

“ What was his name ? ” 

“ Ralph Earle Clinton.” 

“ A good, healthy chap? ” inquired Dimitri. 

“ Wall, I sartinly reckon he war. My brother’s 
ranch war a cattle ranch, and he hed a sight of cow¬ 
boys thar. The youngster war wery much liked by 
them, and one feller, named Colorado Bill, teached 
him how to ride and shoot to beat the band.” 

“ Have you heard from him lately?” 

“ I hev heerd neither from him nor my brother’s 
23 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


family. Like yerself, I too hev been proud and hevn’t 
written much.” 

The above events occurred between two and three 
years before the events that are to be recorded in the 
remainder of this book. The good-fellowship between 
Clinton and Dimitri continued. By a curious coinci¬ 
dence their claims were not very far from one another, 
and a report made on them showed they were of about 
equal value. What the two did together, as well as 
the curious circumstances under which Clinton and 
Dimitri were again brought into contact with their 
families, will be described in subsequent chapters. 


24 


CHAPTER II 


Again at the Gordon Mine 

The Gordons, and those who went with them to Phila¬ 
delphia, had now been back at the mine for several 
weeks. The farther the work proceeded on the prop¬ 
erty, the greater bonanza it proved to be. Like all 
new and great gold mines, it had attracted numbers 
of men who began prospecting the surrounding coun¬ 
try, in the hope of finding another vein that had been 
cut deep below the surface by the eroding power of 
water. 

It was not surprising, therefore, that the neighbor¬ 
hood of the mine soon became dotted with tents or 
wooden shacks, occupied by prospectors. As soon as 
it was found that there were practically no indications 
of gold, other than those that had already been cov¬ 
ered by claims, the prospectors began to apply for 
regular mining work on the Gordon property. There 
was no difficulty in their obtaining this work, for the 
proprietors needed help and were glad to engage them. 
In this way a town, known as Gordon, had already 
sprung up. 

Although, like that of all mining towns, much of 
Gordon's population was a floating one, its fixed popu¬ 
lation had rapidly increased, and the general store at 
the mine was doing a growing business. Content- 

25 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ment and good humor prevailed generally, but there 
was one man who was especially happy; this was Sam 
Ling, the Chinese cook. Although the increase in 
population had imposed harder work on Sam in pre¬ 
paring food, since many of the visitors to the property 
were guests either of the Gordons or of the other 
mining engineers, Sam was happy, for he dearly liked* 
to hear others talk and to talk himself, especially the 
latter. 

“ Sam Ling velly happy; heap people come to Glor- 
don mine to talkee, talkee.” 

For the sake of those who have not read the 
“ Young Mineralogist Series,” it may be briefly said 
that the books of this series are six in number; i. e., 
“ A Chip of the Old Block,” “ The Land of Drought,” 
“ The Jaws of Death,” “ The Yellow Magnet,” “ Once 
a Volcano,” and the present volume, “ The Land of 
Ice and Snow.” 

These books tell how a number of boys, living in 
Philadelphia, began the study of mineralogy and 
geology with the idea of becoming mining engineers. 
They afterward traveled extensively through the 
Western States. 

The first volume, “ A Chip of the Old Block,” de¬ 
scribes, among other things, the boys’ study of miner¬ 
alogy and their wonderful doings in a cellar labora¬ 
tory in Philadelphia. 

The second volume, “ The Land of Drought,” tells 
of their wanderings through the great Colorado 
Desert, a desert not situated in the State of Colorado, 
26 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


as is often imagined, but in southeastern California. 
The boys had gone to this part of the country in com¬ 
pany with two professional gentlemen, Prof. Joseph 
Jackson Engleman, a mineralogist and geologist, and 
John Alexander Christian, a mining engineer. It 
w'as not only their professional work that had brought 
the engineers into this part of the country. It was 
especially because of rumors, that had reached them, 
of the appearance of two mining engineers, named 
Gordon, who had mysteriously disappeared many 
years before from a place near the northeastern corner 
of Arizona. 

In the remaining volumes an account is given of 
how the search for these two men led the party to 
different portions of the great mining regions of the 
southwestern parts of the United States. 

The boys described in these books were healthy, 
brainy, lively youngsters. There was, therefore, 
much fun to be had in their every-day happenings in 
these almost unsettled districts. But, besides mere fun, 
the books are full of what may be called “ shivers ” 
the reader experiences, while perusing the many hair- 
raising situations of danger in which the characters 
find themselves, wondering how they can possibly be 
delivered from what threatens them, and yet, at the 
same time, fully convinced that, somehow or other, 
the author will save their lives for use in other thrill¬ 
ers. The author, however, has been careful in the 
preparation of the books of this series to hold the 
reader’s interest to the last, by not permitting it to 
27 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


become coo evident just how the rescues are to be 
made possible. 

And now a few words as to the character of the boys 
who accompanied the engineers to these out-of-the- 
way portions of the country. One of them, Robert 
Harold Gordon, 3rd, was the son of Robert Harold 
Gordon, Jr., who in his turn was the son of Robert 
Harold Gordon, Sr., the two men for whom the search 
was being made. 

Robert, or, as he was called for short, Rob, was the 
“ Chip of the Old Block ” of the first volume. Though 
inheriting marked abilities as a mineralogist and geolo¬ 
gist, he remained ignorant of the fact until it had been 
made clear to him by Professor Engleman, a friend of 
Robert’s father. 

Ralph Earle Clinton was Rob's special chum. He 
was by far the most interesting of the boys, and is the 
one to whom reference will most frequently be made 
in this volume. Ralph was markedly what might be 
called a boy optimist. He could find good luck in 
whatever happened. No matter what it might be, he 
was in the habit of thinking about it with the almost 
invariable result of soon discovering wonderful good 
luck therein. Though he would say but little, the fact 
that he had reached these conclusions was manifested 
by a pleasing smile that played over his attractive face. 
This smile was constantly changing as he succeeded in 
tracing in his mind the additional pieces of good luck 
that might be expected to arise from that he had 
28 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


already detected. The boy’s happy face had caused him 
to be known to his friends in camp and elsewhere 
as “ Happy Clinton ”; or, more frequently, as 
“ Happy.” 

Happy was a general favorite not only with the en¬ 
gineers and other gentlemen who had joined the camp 
at different times, but also with the camp followers, 
such as a Texan cowboy, named Colorado Bill; an 
Apache Indian, Awake-in-the-Night; a Pueblo shaman, 
Light-of-the-Sun; and Sam Ling, a Chinese cook. 
The Apache Indian called him “ Smile-on-his-Face ”; 
the Pueblo shaman, “ Pahozona,” a word meaning “ al¬ 
ways happy and the Chinese cook, “ Alle Laugh.” 

Another boy, Emil Carl Schloss, of German extrac¬ 
tion, exceedingly fond of chemistry, was the guiding 
spirit of the cellar laboratory so frequently referred to 
in the first volume. Emil leaves Philadelphia toward 
the end of the first volume and goes to Leadville, Colo., 
where he has an opportunity for putting his knowl¬ 
edge of chemistry into actual use in his uncle's assay 
office. We frequently hear of him afterward in the 
assay laboratory of the Gordon property, a mine 
situated on a great fissure gold-quartz vein, in south¬ 
western Colorado. 

Another chum of Robert was Norman Edwin Tag¬ 
gart, from Boston, a lad of excellent mental but poor 
physical development, until he had reaped the benefits 
of life in the open. 

Interwoven with these stories are accounts of the 
pursuit, final arrest, and punishment of two Russian 

29 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Jews, Sigismond Mashinsky and Stanislaus Metchinis- 
koff, and the recovery of a number of valuable gems: 
i. e., a valuable set of diamonds, stolen from August 
Wilfred Francksen, a diamond-cutter or lapidary, then 
working in Philadelphia; of a facsimile set of dia¬ 
monds stolen from a nobleman named Dimitri, and of 
a large and exceedingly valuable emerald stolen from 
the Czar of Russia. There is also a description of a 
Mormon society known as the “ Danites,” and its suc¬ 
cessive chiefs, Joseph Smith and Benjamin Smith, who 
had taken the Gordons prisoners, and were forcing 
them to work on their mining properties without pay. 

Throughout the story are found the doings of an 
American detective, B. B. Blank, and a Russian detec¬ 
tive, Ivan Petromelinski, in their continued and finally 
successful pursuit of Mashinsky and Metchiniskoff. 

It would be evident to any visitor to Gordon that the 
mine was in a prosperous condition. This was to be 
seen not only in a handsome two-story assay building 
that had replaced a former temporary building, but 
also in a number of stamp-mills, crushers, smelting- 
furnaces, reservoirs, and the many other things gen¬ 
erally employed in connection with a gold-quartz 
property that is being worked. 

Rob and Happy had sensibly spent enough time in 
the laboratory with Emil to enable them to make a 
reliable assay of gold, and to perform other operations 
that would be expected from an assayer. 

30 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


In this connection it may be mentioned that Mr. 
Schloss not only had purchased for himself a large 
interest in the shares of the stock of the Gordon Com¬ 
pany, but had given to his nephew, Emil, a certificate 
made out in his name for fifty shares. Rob and Happy 
were both large stockholders. Although Rob’s hold¬ 
ings were much in excess of Happy’s, yet the latter 
was a sufficiently large holder to justify him in making 
Colorado Bill, the Texas cowboy, to whom he was 
deeply attached, a present of certificates for five hun¬ 
dred shares of stock. Since this stock, if judiciously 
sold, would net the owner five hundred thousand dol¬ 
lars, considerable persuasion was necessary before Bill 
was willing to accept so large a gift. 

A Russian nobleman, Petrof Blavinski, who had 
been sent from Russia by a wealthy syndicate to invest 
a large sum of money in shares of gold and other mi¬ 
ning stocks in America; another mining engineer, Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, and even the Czar of Russia, were large 
stockholders. 

In different books of the “ Young Mineralogist Se¬ 
ries ” an account is given of the abandoned cliff houses 
once inhabited by an ancient race that had apparently 
been driven by powerful enemies to the sides of almost 
inaccessible precipices that formed the walls of the 
deep canons, or gorges, in parts of the great Southwest 
that had been cut during thousands upon thousands of 
years by the rivers in that part of the United States. 

The rapid increase in the population of the Gordon 
3i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


mine made it difficult for our boys—Rob, Happy, and 
Emil—to obtain the privacy they desired. At the 
suggestion of Happy, they had built for themselves a 
modern cliff house, situated near the top of a steep 
precipice near the Gordon Vein. It was of the ancient 
type of cliff house, in that it had been formed by the 
removal of a comparatively soft bed of shale, or hard¬ 
ened clay, deposited between two parallel beds of 
harder sandstone. Many of the strata in the portion 
of the country where the old cliff houses have been 
found consist of alternate parallel beds of sandstone 
and shale. When exposed to the long-continued ac¬ 
tion of the air and moisture on the surfaces of the cliffs 
of the canon, the shales had worn away more rapidly 
than the sandstones, thus leaving a series of more or 
less shallow excavations or caves, the ceilings and 
pavements of which consisted of the harder beds of 
sandstone. 

When forced by their enemies to find places of 
refuge, the people who became the ancient cliff 
dwellers, seeing how easy it would be to increase the 
depth of the caves by the excavation of the shale for 
their houses, had done so, employing the precipice in 
front of the excavation for dumping the removed 
materials. 

Moreover, the ease with which the shale was re¬ 
moved led, in many cases, to the excavation of hori¬ 
zontal galleries. These often extended for consider¬ 
able distances, either along the face of the cliff or 
precipice, or to some place where an entrance might 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


be found in the tilted sandstones that outcropped at 
the surface. 

Acquainted as they were with the peculiarities of 
cliff houses, when Happy suggested the building of 
such a house for themselves, after the old pattern but 
with modern materials, his companions were ready 
to join him. A modern cliff house was therefore built, 
the access to which was known only to the boys. 
Among other modern features of this house were 
glazed windows, regularly boarded floors, and furni¬ 
ture of a type that could readily be taken apart and 
afterward put together, this being necessary in order 
to permit it to be carried through the fissure into the 
house. 

Another modern feature of the boys’ cliff house was 
the placing of flower-beds on the piece of flat ground 
or lawn in front of the house. They had also swung 
hammocks over a part of this space. 

Furthermore, they had run into the house pipes con¬ 
nected with the water supply of the mine, so that a 
dark photographic room they had installed was sup¬ 
plied with running water. 

The boys had arranged bedrooms for themselves in 
the house, and a single larger room for meeting pur¬ 
poses. 

As mentioned in the fifth volume, a scientific meet¬ 
ing, or a conversazione, had been held in this room to 
which all the gentlemen at the mine had been invited, 
with the proviso, however, that they would not object 
to being blindfolded when led into the assembly-room, 
c 33 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Knowing that they could trust the boys, their guests 
made no objection to this condition as soon as they 
were assured there was no joke in contemplation. 

It was not, however, so easy to convince Scipio, the 
colored cook, that he would be entirely safe while 
conveying the raw materials out of which he was to 
prepare a banquet that was to follow the meeting. 

It was in the modern cliff house that, at Happy’s 
suggestion, a society known as “ The Young Opti¬ 
mists ” had been organized, of which Happy was 
elected president. 

When discussing the name to be given the society, 
Rob and Emil wished the name to be “ The Pahozon- 
ists,” after Light-of-the-Sun’s name for Happy. This 
Happy did not wish done. Although he was able to 
persuade his chums to adopt the name of the “ Society 
of the Young Optimists,” yet Rob and Emil so persisted 
in calling the modern cliff house “ Pahozona’s house,” 
s' and the members “ Pahozonists,” that this name came 
gradually to be generally employed. 

In the old cliff houses it is not unusual to find besides 
a row of houses separated from one another by verti¬ 
cal walls extending along the same pavement or bed 
of sand rock, another row below them, separated by 
the bed of sandstone that formed the floor of the 
upper houses and the roof or ceiling of the lower ones. 

Happy had suggested the building of a house im¬ 
mediately below the main cliff house that was reached 
only by a secret passage cut through the shale. This 
additional house, or room, was to be regarded as a 
34 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


sort of “ holy of holies/’ in which only the charter 
members were to have entrance, and where “ heart-to- 
heart talks ” might be indulged in, though, as Happy 
remarked when the words were first used by Rob, he 
did not know just what that meant, nor do we. 

That little society of three boys had great times in 
the Pahozona House. In the meetings held there they 
discussed optimism in particular and nearly everything 
else in general. 

It was especially in Happy that the peculiarities of 
the optimist were most strongly marked. Indeed, it 
might be said that until Rob and Emil had been 
brought repeatedly in contact with their chum, they 
had exhibited almost none of the peculiarities of op¬ 
timists. But the repeated proofs Happy had given 
them that things which had happened to him so far 
from being misfortunes were wonderful pieces of good 
luck, made them willing to acknowledge that there was 
far more in optimism than they had hitherto believed. 

“ I shall be delighted to join such a society, Happy,” 
said Rob, when its formation was under discussion. 
“ I very much wish to understand just how it is that 
you are able to find so much good luck in a thing that 
would be regarded by most people as being the worst 
kind of luck.” 

“ And so will I, Happy,” said Emil. 

It is not our intention here to attempt any formal 
statement of the peculiar tenets of the young optimists; 
or, as Emil and Rob would have it, of the Pahozonists. 
35 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

It might be well, however, to quote briefly a few 1 of 
Happy’s sayings: 

Pat yourself on the back as much as you wish, but 
never pity yourself, nor invite yourself to a good cry. 
What at first sight may seem bad luck, is most probably 
the best kind of good fortune.” 

The idea of patting oneself on the back was at first 
unsparingly ridiculed by Happy’s fellow members. 
When, for example, Happy had once accidentally 
stubbed his foot against a rock, his chums remarked 
laughingly: 

“ Don’t get mad, Happy. Pat yourself on the back. 
That’s not bad luck. It don’t hurt. It may be won¬ 
derful good luck if you only can discover it.” 

“ As usual it is good luck,” was the reply of the lad, 
who stooped to pick up the stone against which he had 
stumbled, throwing it outside the path, and picked up a 
small nugget of gold that had been dropped there by 
some of the men and worth, perhaps, two or three 
dollars. 

“ That is dumb luck,” said Rob to Happy. 

“ Granted, Rob,” replied Happy, “ but even if there 
had been no immediate return would it not be good 
luck in that I have learned not to lose my temper at 
such a little thing as stubbing my toe ? ” 

Neither of his companions said anything; they only 
smiled. Indeed, they could not deny the correctness of 
their chum’s conclusions. 

36 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Another common saying of Happy was, when some¬ 
thing that seemed especially unfortunate and gloomy 
had occurred: 

“ Sing; don’t gnash your teeth! Look for the sil¬ 
ver lining of the dark cloud you are now permitting to 
bring so much gloom into your life. Don’t stay in the 
dark; climb to the light! ” 

It may be mentioned that, subject to blindfolding, 
the different members of the camp were frequently per¬ 
mitted to meet in the assembly-room of the modern 
cliff house. Indeed, it soon became customary to do 
this when anything requiring strict privacy was neces¬ 
sary, for the crowded condition of the camp made it 
difficult for the resident Board of Directors of the 
company to discuss any important business matters 
without their leaking out. But, besides the directors, 
the other camp followers were sometimes invited to 
the room. Colorado Bill was a frequent visitor, and 
even Light-of-the-Sun, Sam Ling, and Awake-in-the- 
Night were taken into this secret room that the In¬ 
dians insisted on regarding as the estufa or the holy 
room, for both of these men regarded Happy as a great 
shaman or magician. But into the holy of holies they 
were never admitted. 


37 


CHAPTER III 


Why Happy, Blavinski, and Dimitri went to 
Alaska 

The Gordon mine was now so busy a center that 
letters and telegrams were numerous. For the conve¬ 
nience of the miners, business people, and visitors, the 
Gordons had prevailed on the postal authorities to es¬ 
tablish at the mine a post-office named Gordon, for the 
place might now be regarded as a mining town. This 
office was located at the general store owned and 
operated by a brother of Bill. 

As will be remembered at the end of the fifth 
volume, “ Once a Volcano,” a letter had been received 
from Salt Lake City from the American and Russian 
detectives, Blank and Petromelinski, announcing that 
they had again traced Mashinsky, the Russian fugitive, 
to a part of British Columbia, and were coming to 
Gordon to obtain additional information from one of 
the miners. But a later letter had just been received 
from them, stating that information received from the 
Mounted Police of the Northwest had enabled them to 
trace Mashinsky to the mining town of Dawson in 
Yukon Territory, in the Dominion of Canada, near 
the eastern boundary of Alaska. They had therefore 
concluded not to come to the Gordon camp as stated 
in their previous letter, but to leave for Seattle in the 

38 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


State of Washington. They stated that they would be 
there in about three weeks, and hoped the lad, Ralph 
Earle Clinton, more generally known as Happy, would 
go with them to aid in capturing the murderer. They 
also urged that, if possible, Blavinski, Professor Dimi¬ 
tri, Bill, and Awake-in-the-Night would join them. 
They offered good pay for the services of Happy, Bill, 
and Awake-in-the-Night, and hoped the Gordons would 
be willing, temporarily, to release these people. 

This letter was addressed to Professor Engleman, 
who, after reading it to Mr. Christian, said: 

“ Let’s ask the parties named to meet us here.” 

At about the time the above letter was received, 
Happy had been talking with his chums, Rob and Emil, 
as to the pleasant life they were leading at Gordon. 

“Is not this a jolly place, Rob?” inquired Happy. 
“We are making lots of money, we are learning about 
mining engineering, and are having a splendid time.” 

“ That’s so, Hap,” said Rob. 

“ I so much agree with you, Happy,” said Emil, 
laughing, “ that I am sure it would take much per¬ 
suasion to get you to leave the Gordon Vein now.” 

“ I don’t believe,” replied Happy, “ that anything 
could persuade me to leave the place now. But,” he 
said, “ let’s go to the assay office. I understand the gen¬ 
tlemen have received a letter they wish to read to us.” 

“ And yet. Happy,” said Rob, “ I am sure you would 
be ready to leave at once if any one could prove it to 
be your duty to do so.” 


39 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“Thank you, Rob,” replied Happy. “You do me 
proud. I most certainly would.” 

As soon as those interested had assembled, Pro¬ 
fessor Engleman read the letter of Blank and Petrome- 
linski. 

This request to Happy to leave the Gordon Vein, 
following as it did the positive statement he had just 
made that he could not conceive of anything that could 
persuade him to leave it, caused Rob and Emil to look 
smilingly at him, although neither said anything. 

“ What do you say, Happy,” inquired Professor 
Engleman, “ about the request of the detectives that 
you meet them at Seattle at the time mentioned? ” 

“ Do you mean supposing you are willing that I do 
this, Professor Engleman ? ” inquired Happy. 

“Yes,” was the reply; “supposing, for the sake of 
argument, that I would not object to your going. 
What would your answer be ? ” 

“ I do not believe,” replied Happy, “ that I would 
care to leave the Gordon mine at this time. I have 
such large interests here that I don’t think it would be 
right for me to go away and leave others to do my 
work. While I should be pleased to help the detec¬ 
tives, I can see no reason why I should go so far out 
of my way to do so. Do you not agree with me? ” 

“ Your conclusion is very sensible, and is what I 
expected it would be,” replied Engleman. “ Even if 
I personally saw no objections to your going so far 
from home, yet, since you have been practically placed 
in my care by your parents, I should not be willing to 
40 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

let you go until you obtained their consent. But,” he 
added, “ since you have determined not to go, there is 
no reason for any further discussion of the question. 

“ What is your answer to this letter, Blavinski ? ” 
inquired Professor Engleman. 

“ Before I say anything,” remarked Blavinski, “ let 
me give Happy this letter,” handing Happy a letter 
postmarked the town in Texas where Happy’s people 
had gone to examine a large tract of land for a ranch 
they were about purchasing. 

“ It is from my people,” said Happy, smiling. 
“ Excuse me and I will read it.” 

Happy’s friends were in the habit of watching his 
face so as to get some idea of his thoughts, for it was 
an expressive face that could often be read by those 
who knew him. There was evidently something in 
the letter that caused no little uncertainty, although 
even in this case the customary smile soon appeared. 

“Is it good or bad news, Happy?” inquired Rob, 
“ though I would not learn much should you tell me 
the news was good,” he added. “ What you call good 
news is apt to be of a doubtful character.” 

“ If you can do so, my lad,” said Professor Engle¬ 
man, “ tell us at least some of the news. I can see 
that it contains news that requires a decision on your 
part, and that you do not quite know what decision 
you had better reach.” 

“ There is nothing in the letter, sir,” replied Happy, 
“ that I am not ready to talk about, since all in this 
room are my friends.” 


4i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Tell us all you choose, my lad,” said Mr. Chris¬ 
tian, “ and we all shall be glad to give you our advice, 
though I rather imagine you have already made up 
your mind as to what you will do. Am I correct ? ” 

“ You are, sir,” was the reply. 

“ Either read us the letter or tell it to us in your 
own words,” said the elder Gordon. 

“ You will understand it better if I tell it in my own 
words,” replied Happy. “ You must know, sir, that 
five or six years ago my father’s only brother, Harry 
Earle Clinton, about forty-five years old, left the ranch 
in Texas, where my father was then living, and went 
to Alaska, to try to get what he called his share in the 
gold deposits that had been discovered in that country. 
For a time he kept father posted as to his movements, 
but for the last four years nothing has been heard of 
him. Recently, however, he has been seen in Dawson 
in the Yukon district in Canada. 

“ Now, sir,” continued Happy, “ you will under¬ 
stand my surprise when I tell you that my father has 
written, asking me to try to find companions to accom¬ 
pany me in a trip to Alaska to look for Uncle Harry.” 

“ I think I can see by your face that you have 
reached a conclusion. Am I correct? ” inquired Engle- 
man. 

“ Yes, sir; since my father wishes me to go, and you 
do not see any objection to my going, I shall go.” 

Happy’s decision, spoken as it was in his ordinary 
voice, as if at least now the decision was not troubling 
him greatly, surprised his companions. 

42 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I'll go with ye, Hap,” said Bill, “ ef the gents here 
be willin’. Why, Hap,” continued Bill, “ I knowed yer 
Uncle Harry well when you an’ me war on that ranch 
in Texas whar we hed sech great times.” 

“ I will now answer your question, Engleman,” said 
Blavinski, “ as to the conclusion I have reached re¬ 
specting the letter from Blank and Petromelinski. I 
rather imagined Happy would find something in the 
letter I was bringing him that would make him change 
his mind as to being unwilling to meet the detectives at 
Seattle. Like Professor Dimitri, I also have received 
important letters from Russia. But for these letters I 
should have declined leaving Gordon. As it is, I have 
determined to do so.” 

“ That’s splendid news, sir,” said Happy. “ I am 
very fortunate in having your company.” 

“ That’s exactly how I felt about it, my lad, when 
I heard you say you were going. But,” he continued, 
“ I will let Professor Dimitri tell you what he has 
learned as soon as I have told you briefly why I would 
not have gone but for these letters, and why I have 
changed my mind since receiving them. I should 
never have been willing to leave the Gordon mine to go 
to Alaska because, as you all know, I have not only 
large personal interest in it, but also represent the in¬ 
terests of many Russian stockholders, including the 
Czar of Russia. 

“ Now,” he continued, “ I will tell you why I 
changed my mind. One of the letters I have just re¬ 
ceived contains a request from the czar himself that 
43 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


I should accompany Professor Dimitri to Alaska, if 
he concludes to go; I have no longer any choice in the 
matter, since my sovereign asks me to go. Now, 
Nicola,” he said to Professor Dimitri, “ explain the 
matter more at length to the gentlemen.” 

“ The letter Blavinski refers to is from my imme¬ 
diate family,” said Dimitri. “ You must know,” he 
added, “ that my eldest son, Nicholas, has been in 
Alaska for a number of years. No word has been 
received from him by any of us during the last two 
years, so that we are, naturally, anxious as to his 
safety. Only recently word has reached us, indirectly, 
that Nicholas has been seen in different parts of 
Alaska, such as in the Klondike regions, in portions 
near the mouth of the great river, the Yukon, especially 
in Nome, and elsewhere. Since I am here, my peo¬ 
ple wish that I shall go either alone or in company 
with others to make a search for my son. 

“ Wait a moment,” he added, “ here is a smaller let¬ 
ter enclosed in the same envelope I have overlooked. It 
is a special request from his majesty, the Czar of Rus¬ 
sia, that I ask Blavinski to go with me, and also, if 
possible, to have the lad Ralph Earle Clinton, generally 
known as Happy, to form one of the party.” 

“ I have the good fortune to be assured of the com¬ 
pany of Dimitri and Happy,” said Blavinski; “ and,” 
turning to the Gordons as the principal stockholders of 
the company, “ if you do not object, I would like to 
have the company of Bill, as well as of Awake-in-the- 
Night, provided he cares to go.” 

44 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ As well as the services of Scipio as cook/’ added 
Dimitri. 

“ There will be no difficulty in arranging* tempo¬ 
rarily to release these men,” said the Gordons. 

“ I imagine,” said Professor Engleman, “ that going 
to Alaska would please you even if you were not look¬ 
ing for your son.” 

“ Independently of the possibility of finding my son 
Nicholas,” replied Dimitri, “ I am glad to go to Alaska 
because of the opportunities I shall have for studying 
its vast ice-fields or glaciers, as well as its mineral de¬ 
posits. I take for granted that if we go by way of 
Seattle we will take the inside route by steamboat 
through the channels of water that lie between the 
mainland and the islands of the different peninsulas 
in that part of the country. This will also give me an 
opportunity for studying the exceedingly interesting 
type of coast inlets known as fiords, or places where 
the ocean is of exceedingly great depth, and pene¬ 
trates for many miles into the heart of the mountains.” 

While this conversation was going on both Rob 
and Emil were silent. When the decision was reached, 
Rob, turning to Happy, remarked: 

“ So, Happy, you do not believe that anything could 
persuade you to leave this place now. How is that? ” 

“ Of course, Rob,” replied his chum, “ there is a 
difference between what I want to do and what I ought 
to do. I should like to remain here; but since I ought 
to go and help find Uncle Harry, I shall certainly do 
so. Will you go with me ? ” 

45 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ You will have to ask father and grandfather that 
question,” was the reply. 

“Would you like to go, Robert?” inquired his 
father. “ If so, you have my permission.” 

“ And how about you, grandfather ? ” inquired the 
lad. 

It was evident that the grandfather, who had every 
day become more and more attached to his grandson, 
was not at all pleased with the idea of letting him go 
so far. Unwilling, however, to refuse his permission, 
he said: 

“ I shall not oppose your going, Robert.” 

“ Then what do you say, Rob ? ” inquired Happy. 

It did not take Rob long to determine. 

“ I do not think that I can go with you, Happy,” 
was the reply. “ As much as I should like to, for I 
know we should have jolly times on such a trip, and I 
should like to see Alaska; but, as you know, I have 
been separated from father and grandfather for so 
many years that I do not think it would be right for 
me to leave them alone. My answer is, therefore, that 
I cannot go with you.” 

Neither Rob’s father nor his grandfather said any¬ 
thing, but it was evident that the decision greatly 
pleased them. 

“ I think your conclusion is very sensible, Robert,” 
remarked Professor Engleman. 

“ Considering all the circumstances, I think it is 
remarkably sensible,” added Mr. Christian. “ Some of 
these days,” he continued, “ you and I, Robert, and 
46 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


possibly your father and grandfather, may take this 
trip to Alaska, the so-called land of ice and snow, al¬ 
though you will find, as all who have visited the coun¬ 
try have found, that it is only during a part of the 
year and only in parts of the interior, especially on the 
mountain ranges and highlands generally, that very 
severe winter temperatures are found.” 

It may be mentioned here that Pete, a cowboy who 
had been taken prisoner with Rob’s father and after¬ 
ward liberated by Happy and Bill, was given the op¬ 
portunity of joining the party. He felt, however, that 
he should remain with the Gordons, since he would 
now have to look after many things that Bill had 
attended to. 

While they were discussing the form of telegram to 
send to Blank and Petromelinski, Bill, who had left 
the room apparently to obtain some information, now 
entered and said: 

“ Gents, I hev heerd something from one of the 
prospectors and miners wot be a workin’ here thet I 
reckon will interest ye. The feller I be tellin’ ye about 
says he knowed this H. E. Clinton wot be Hap’s uncle, 
and thet he seed him only about half a year ago near 
the most western part of land in Alaska, at various 
places on the river, near the Klondike, as well as in 
Dawson.” 

“ That’s splendid news, Bill! ” cried Happy. “ You 
knew my Uncle Harry. I suppose you questioned this 
man so as to satisfy yourself that it was truly Uncle 
Harry?” 


47 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“Ye kin bet yer bottom dollar I did, Hap,” replied 
Bill. “ I did know Texas Harry, as he called his- 
self, and I hev no doubt thet he war the feller the 
prospector and miner said he’d seed. When a feller 
like yer Uncle Harry,” continued Bill, “ stands six 
feet five inches with his shoes off, and hez his muscles 
in sech condition thet he would sartinly be a danger¬ 
ous man to tackle, thar kain’t be no doubt but thet 
he war the man. But, gents,” he said, turning to 
Blavinski and Dimitri, “ what is more to the pint, 
this miner telled me thet the man Clinton was alius 
seen in company with a Russian, said to be a nobleman, 
thet the two men appeared to be close friends.” 

Blavinski and Dimitri at once eagerly said to Bill: 

“ Take us to see that man, Bill.” 

“ I reckoned, gents,” said Bill, grinning, “ that this 
would be the identical thing wot both of ye would ax 
me. I hev, therefore, brung the man with me; he is 
down-stairs a-waitin’. Shall I step down and ask him 
to come up? ” 

“ If you please,” replied Blavinski and Dimitri. 

After a long conversation with the man, neither 
Blavinski nor Dimitri had the slightest doubt that the 
companion of the H. E. Clinton, or the Uncle Harry 
Happy was ready to go to Alaska to endeavor to trace, 
was Professor Dimitri’s son that Blavinski and Dimitri 
were desirous of locating. 

“ The only thing I see,” said Blavinski, “ is as to 
whether or no the search for H. E. Clinton and young 
4 S 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Dimitri will lead us to the same parts of Alaska as the 
search for the Russian rascal, Mashinsky. We must 
be careful, therefore, in agreeing to aid Blank and 
Petromelinski in their search, to have it distinctly 
understood that we can only aid them when it is pos¬ 
sible to do so without interfering with locating the 
men we wish to find. That, in other words, the two 
things must not interfere with each other. If this be 
agreed to, we will be glad to do all we can to aid them. 
Do you not think that is fair, Dimitri ?” he inquired 
of his companion. “ It’s a perfectly fair proposition, 
is it not? ” 

“ It certainly is/’ was the reply. “ I do not believe 
you will find that either of the detectives will object 
to this condition.” 

“ There only remains then on our part,” said En- 
gleman, “ to do all we can to get you ready so that 
you can reach Seattle in the time mentioned by the 
detectives. If there are any things you would like to 
take with you on this expedition let me know. If we 
cannot get them at our camp we shall send elsewhere 
for them.” 

“ Very well,” said Blavinski. “ In the meanwhile 
we will send this telegram to the detectives. 

“Messrs. Blank and Petromelinski, Salt Lake City, Utah: 

“Blavinski, Dimitri, Happy, Bill, Awake-in-the-Night, and 
Scipio will meet you at Seattle at the time named ready to go 
to Alaska. Will aid you subject to certain conditions that we 
will explain when we meet. 

“( Signed) Blavinski/' 

d 49 


CHAPTER IV 


Getting Ready for Alaska 

Before leaving the room at the assay office after the 
decision had been reached to meet Blank and Petrome- 
linski at Seattle, Rob, turning to Happy, remarked: 

44 I suppose you will be busy now getting your fur 
clothes and heavy underwear for Alaska?” 

44 I do not believe,” said Happy, “ that during sum¬ 
mer, when we shall be in Alaska, there will be much 
difference in the kind of clothes that will be needed 
from what we are wearing now. Am I not right, 
Mr. Christian?” he inquired. 

“ Quite right, my lad,” was the reply. “ It is only 
in the interior, and during a part of the year, that 
Alaska can properly be called 4 The Land of Ice and 
Snow.’ Along the southern Pacific coast it is fairly 
warm throughout the year.” 

44 1 thought, Mr. Christian,” said Rob, 44 that be¬ 
cause of its latitude, the climate of Alaska must be 
very severe, since even the parts of the country that 
extend farthest to the south are in the same latitude 
as Newfoundland and Labrador, while most of the 
country extends as far north as Greenland, Davis 
Strait, and Baffin Bay.” 

44 The difference in climate,” replied Mr. Christian, 
44 is due to the waters of the warm Japan current that 
50 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


bring to most of the western coasts of North America 
a much warmer climate than is found at the same 
latitudes on the eastern coasts. But I hear Scipio’s 
bugle-call to dinner,” he added, seeing Rob was about 
to ask a question. “If you care to hear more about 
this, meet me here half an hour after dinner and I will 
tell you something about Alaska, and will bring with 
me a map of the country and some folders, or descrip¬ 
tive circulars, that were mailed me only last week. 
You see, Gordon,” he said laughing, addressing the 
younger of the two engineers, “ those interested in 
transportation facilities to Alaska are sending invita¬ 
tions to the prospectors and miners in Gordon to go 
to that country to get their share of the good things 
in the way of mining prospects she still has for people 
who are willing to take risks.” 

“ That is a way transportation companies have,” 
said Professor Engleman. “ But we should not ob¬ 
ject,” he added, “ it is good business on their part.” 

“If you do not care, Mr. Christian,” said Happy, 
“ I should like Bill to come and hear what you have 
to say about Alaska.” 

“ Glad to have you come, Bill,” said Mr. Christian. 
“ Won’t you come too, gentlemen,” he added, address¬ 
ing himself to Blavinski and Dimitri. 

“ Certainly,” they replied. 

“I’d like you to come too, Joe,” said CIristian to 
Professor Engleman. “ Not that I will have much that 
is new for you, since I know that as a mining engineer 
you have also been in different parts of Alaska.” 

5i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ I also shall be pleased to come, John,” said Engle- 
man. 

“ I’m awfully sorry, Happy,” said Emil, as he and 
Rob walked together to the dining-room, “ that you 
intend leaving us so soon. We were having such 
jolly times on the Gordon mine, and especially at our 
society. It seems a pity to break it all up. How very 
quickly changes come,” he added. 

“ Especially,” remarked Rob, “ when quick fellows 
like Happy have to do with their making. Hap,” he 
continued, “ I know you didn’t want to go to Alaska. 
Tell me now, honor bright, is it not a disappointment 
to be obliged to leave Gordon; or,” he added, as if 
correcting himself, “ to permit yourself to think you 
are obliged to leave Gordon? You certainly cannot 
find any good luck in this miserable expedition, can 
you ? ” 

“ Why, Rob,” replied Happy, “ I certainly have no 
difficulty in finding very good luck in this thing. Just 
think of it,” he said, “ if I can do anything to help 
find Uncle Harry and get him back to the new ranch 
in Texas, now that father is so much more comforta¬ 
ble in money matters than he was; if I can aid Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri in finding his son; and if I can do some 
little toward helping Mr. Blank and Mr. Petromelinski 
in capturing Mashinsky, I am sure going to x\laska 
will be a wonderful piece of good luck. Don’t you 
agree with me?” 

“ Oh, confound your good luck, Hap,” said Rob in 
52 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


a laughing tone. “ I’ll give up trying to get angry 
with you, you are such a good-natured fellow, and care 
so much more for others than for yourself.” 

With the exception of Awake-in-the-Night and 
Scipio, all who were going to Alaska met as appointed 
in the room in the second story of the assay office. 

“ Before saying anything about the clothing that 
should be worn in Alaska,” said Mr. Christian, “ I 
think it would be well to give you some idea of this 
great country. Now that Alaska has been visited by 
thousands of prospectors; now that railroads have not 
only been surveyed, but have actually been laid, and 
large mining operations have been successfully carried 
on, the country is fairly well known and is so different 
from the country we learned about forty or fifty years 
ago in the school geographies, that one wouldn’t recog¬ 
nize it when described as it actually exists. 

“ Even during the past comparatively few years,” 
he added, “ to reach the gold-fields and other points of 
interest in Alaska required the expenditure of such 
an immense amount of physical energy that many 
perished miserably in their efforts to reach portions 
of the interior during the winter. 

“ Contrast this,” he continued, “ with the transpor¬ 
tation facilities that exist to-day. There is steamship 
communication between Seattle and Skagway. From 
the latter place, by the White Pass and Yukon Rail¬ 
road, one can reach the summit of the famous White 
Pass in an hour and a half. This is about three thou- 
53 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


sand feet above sea level. In 1898 the difficulties of 
the route were so great that even the strongest men 
required several days to make the trip. Now one con¬ 
tinues in the cars to Caribou, the outlet of Lake Ben¬ 
nett. Then the rest of the trip is made by a com¬ 
fortable river-boat down a branch of the Yukon for 
four hundred and fifty miles to Dawson, the famous 
gold-fields, and on down the Yukon River to its mouth 
near Nome.” 

“ Capital, John,” said Professor Engleman. “ Now 
let us hear you describe the map of Alaska I see you 
have brought with you. I feel sure you will treat the 
subject in such a manner as will greatly aid us in re¬ 
membering the different parts of the country.” 

“ I will do my best, Joe,” said Mr. Christian, 
“ though I may be obliged to ask you to help me out. 
As you see,” he said, “ I have a copy of that excellent 
book by Greely, called ‘ A Handbook of Alaska.’ I11 
the first place, while I’m sure all of you know that 
Alaska is a great country, you have probably failed to 
appreciate the extent of its greatness so far as mere 
distance and size are concerned. According to Gan¬ 
nett, the main territory of Alaska alone, leaving out 
that portion which is best known to tourists as a strip 
of coast and outlying island chains, extending for one 
thousand miles northwest to Mount St. Elias, has an 
area of five hundred and ninety thousand eight hun¬ 
dred and eighty-four square miles, or about one-third 
greater than the Atlantic States from Maine to 
54 


Map showing the relative size of Alaska and the United States. (Brooks, '* Geography.”) 


The Land of Ice and Snow 



\ 


55 


Ml 













































The Land of Ice and Snow 


Florida. Its northernmost land, Point Barrow, lies 
three hundred miles north of the Arctic circle, a point 
so far north that during the winter the sun is never 
seen for forty days. 

“ Here,” added Mr. Christian, taking a small map 
from between the leaves of one of the folders, “ is an 
excellent outline map taken from a paper on ‘ The 
Geography and Geology of Alaska,’ by Alfred H. 
Brooks, and published by the United States Geological 
Survey. As you will see,” he continued, as they came 
around him to examine the map, “ here the territory of 
Alaska is laid down on an ordinary map of the United 
States, with its outlying island chains. Alaska 
stretches entirely across the United States from the 
Atlantic coast of South Carolina to the Pacific coast 
of California, while the main territory covers the 
States as shown. (For map, see p. 55.) 

“ As regards the character of its surface,” con¬ 
tinued Mr. Christian, “ the southern two-fifths is 
formed of rugged, precipitous mountains that, al¬ 
though sometimes partially covered with glaciers and 
snow-fields, are in many regions densely wooded with 
valuable forests of spruce, fir, cedar, etc. 

“ I think it will be best,” he continued, “ to adopt 
Major-General Greely’s divisions of Alaska. Briefly, 
these are as follows: 

“ 1. Sitkan Alaska, or the Alaska of the tourist, em¬ 
bracing the mainland and neighboring islands from 
Ketchikan to Skagway. This is a section,” he added, 
“ you will have an opportunity of personally seeing 
56 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

if you take, as I assume you will, the inside passage 
to Alaska from Seattle. 

“ 2. Southwestern Alaska, extending from Mount 
St. Elias west to the Alaskan Peninsula and including 
the outlying islands. Like the first district, this is a 
fiord region; that is, a region whose coasts are char¬ 
acterized by deep inlets extending far into the land. 

“ 3. The Aleutian Islands and the Pribilof Islands, 
the Aleutians being a long, bow-shaped chain of 
seventy treeless islands, not counting islets, that reach 
for one thousand miles from the Alaskan Peninsula to 
the coast of Kamchatka in Asia. 

“ 4. The watersheds of the Yukon and the Kusko- 
quim rivers. The watershed of the first river in¬ 
cludes nearly one-half of Alaska, the great river flow¬ 
ing through a bow-shaped channel, generally toward 
the west, for a distance of fifteen hundred miles from 
the Canadian boundary. 

“ 5. The Seward Peninsula, the most western por¬ 
tion of Alaska that owes its peninsular shape to Kotes- 
bue Sound on the north, and Norton Sound on the 
south. This is sometimes known as the ‘ Nome Re¬ 
gion 9 from its well-known gold-fields. This peninsula 
is one of the parts of Alaska that was best known in the 
old school geographies as the part of the North Ameri¬ 
can continent that lies nearest Asia, being separated 
from it only by Bering Strait. 

“ 6. The Arctic watersheds, or those portions of 
Alaska that drain into the Arctic Ocean.” 

“ An examination of any good map of Alaska,” said 

57 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Christian, “ will show that the great Yukon River 
receives the drainage of the opposite slopes of what 
may be regarded as two generally parallel mountain 
systems, extending east and west, that form the north¬ 
ern and southern boundaries of its river basin.” 

“ I would suggest, John,” said Engleman, “ that be¬ 
fore going any further, you give Happy and the other 
boys an opportunity of going over this map by them¬ 
selves.” 

Knowing that some little time would be required to 
fix the general geography of Alaska, as briefly de¬ 
scribed by Christian, in the minds of the boys, nothing 
more was said about the country for more than a quar¬ 
ter of an hour, a fact the author would ask his young 
readers to bear in mind. In other words, instead of 
skipping this part of the book, as is frequently done, it 
should not only be carefully read, but even again ex¬ 
amined in connection with the map of Alaska, so as 
to permit it to be impressed thoroughly on the mind. 
Such work not only greatly adds to the interest of the 
rest of this book, but will also result in the gain of 
most valuable information. 

“ And now, Rob,” said Mr. Christian, “ we will 
take up the question you asked Happy before dinner¬ 
time, as to the kind of clothing that should be pro¬ 
vided for travel through Alaska. As you can see from 
these folders and general circulars of the Alaska 
steamboat and railroad companies, the character of 

58 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the clothing required for a summer trip, as I have 
already informed you, does not differ greatly from that 
you are now wearing. 

“ In this circular,” he said, “ entitled ‘ To the 
Alaskan Gold-fields, by the Northern Navigation Com¬ 
pany’s Lines from San Francisco,’ will be found the 
following advice as regards clothing: 

“ ‘ From early May until late October, clothing worn 
during the same months on the Pacific slope is suffi¬ 
cient for comfort, and the summer traveler carrying 
an assortment of heavy garments assumes a needless 
burden. In winter, the addition of a fur-lined over¬ 
coat—not too heavy, some warm underwear, woolen 
mittens, fur-lined cap, and felt shoes, insures an ample 
wardrobe unless the crisp, clear weather invites to the 
more strenuous delights of the trail behind a dog- 
team. Then a slightly different, but more elaborate 
outfit is necessary. Old trailers advise especial care 
of the hands and feet, and are apt to undertake very 
long journeys without giving much attention to other 
garments.’ ” 

“ There’s not much trouble there,” said Blavinski. 

“ Here is another note of advice as regards the char¬ 
acter of the clothing,” said Christian. “ It is from a 
circular entitled ‘ The Yellowstone Park and Alaska,’ 
issued by the Raymond & Whitcomb Company, a great 
tourist company. As limited to the Alaskan trip, this 
advice is as follows : 


59 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ ‘ For the Alaska voyage one should dress as 
warmly as for an Atlantic Ocean voyage, but no 
warmer, since that would mean woolens and wraps. 
Strong and serviceable clothing and stout shoes are 
prime necessities for Alaska.’ ” 

“ And there’s no difficulty there, John,” remarked 
Engleman, laughing. “ I will read you only one addi¬ 
tional note concerning what to wear, as given by the 
Pacific Coast Steamship Navigation Company in a 
circular entitled ‘ Alaska via the Totem-pole Route.’ 
It is as follows: 

“ ‘ The warm waters of the Japan current, touching 
the coast line of southeastern Alaska, provide a sur¬ 
prise to visitors who expect winter weather. The cli¬ 
mate is usually as warm and genial as Maytime in 
New England, and proper provision against summer 
showers is all-sufficient. It is well to have warm 
underclothing, a serviceable traveling suit, thick boots, 
and rubber overshoes for use in clambering over 
glacial ice, for when possible, an opportunity is af¬ 
forded those who desire to climb Muir Glacier; also 
steamer rugs, overcoats of medium weight, traveling 
caps, and gloves. Umbrellas may be taken, but are 
not essential; a raincoat is preferable.’ ” 

“We shall certainly not take umbrellas, eh, Bla- 
vinski ? ” cried Dimitri, laughing. 

“ No,” was the reply. 

“ My experience,” said the elder Gordon, “ tells me 
that umbrellas are not properly ranked among the 
things a mining engineer carries.” 

60 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

It is not our intention to explain in full the peculiari¬ 
ties of the climate of Alaska. It is sufficient to state 
that, generally speaking, along those coasts of the Pa¬ 
cific that are most exposed to the Japan current, the 
summer climate, and indeed, the climate throughout 
the year, is far warmer than at corresponding latitudes 
on the eastern coast. For example, during the coldest 
month of the year, Sitka, formerly the capital of Alas¬ 
ka, has a mean temperature of 3i.4°F., about the same 
as the coldest month in St. Louis, Mo. The mean 
temperature of San Francisco, Cal., and Port Angeles, 
Wash., is 58° for August, while that both of Sitka and 
Juneau for July was 57 0 . 

“ Have you any advice as to the best way of enter¬ 
ing the interior of Alaska, Christian?” inquired 
Dimitri. 

“ I do not think you can do better than to take the 
inside route of the Pacific Coast Steamship Company, 
from Seattle to Skagway; the White Pass and Yukon 
Railroad to Lake Bennett and White Horse, the termi¬ 
nus of the railroad; and a river steamer to Dawson. 
There are,” continued Christian, “ three other ways of 
entering the interior of Alaska; i. e., by the Copper 
River Railroad, by the Kuskoquim River, and by the 
Yukon.” 

“ Does the word Alaska signify anything special, 
Professor Engleman ? ” inquired Rob. 

“ I believe,” was the reply, “ it means a great coun¬ 
try, although this is denied by some.” 

“ If it means a great country,” said Christian, “ it 
61 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


is certainly well named, since Alaska is great in size, 
great in resources, and from what I have read, won¬ 
derfully great in its natural scenery.” 

There was much to be done and many letters to be 
written before leaving for Seattle, so that their time 
was well taken up. During this time Happy received 
visits from Light-of-the-Sun and Awake-in-the-Night. 
Light-of-the-Sun brought a message to Happy from 
his people, the Pueblos, together with a magnificent 
turquoise in the form of an amulet that they requested 
the lad to wear suspended from a chain properly hid 
inside his coat. 

“ Our shamans,” he said, “ have been assured by 
our gods, The Trues, that they are your friends. 
Light-of-the-Sun is sorry to hear that you leave this 
beautiful part of the country to go to the lands of the 
far north, but he will pray his gods to watch over you 
and bring you safely back.” 

It was at this meeting that, after explaining to 
Light-of-the-Sun the reasons they had for going to 
Alaska, and telling him of the invitation from Blank 
and Petromelinski to Awake-in-the-Night to join 
them, Happy asked the Indian whether he would go. 

“ Awake-in-the-Night heap glad to go,” was the 
reply. “ Likes to see new countries. Likes also to go 
with Smile-on-his-Face to keep his enemies from hurt¬ 
ing him, for twice, Smile-on-his-Face has saved the 
life of Awake-in-the-Night.” 

Emil and Rob looked with sorrow on Happy’s ap¬ 
proaching separation from them. They had arranged 
62 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


to spend the last night of Happy’s sojourn at the 
Gordon camp in the modern cliff house and hold a 
meeting of the Society of the Young Optimists, at¬ 
tended by three only. Just what was done at this meet¬ 
ing it is not necessary to state, except that what Rob 
called a “ heart-to-heart ” talk was held in the lower 
house. 


63 


CHAPTER V 


The Meeting at Seattle 

It must not be supposed that the telegram already re¬ 
ferred to from Blank and Petromelinski was the only 
word received from these gentlemen before our party 
reached Seattle. Both detectives were great believers 
in the advantages of telegrams, and were not apt to 
attempt the saving of a few cents by making their 
messages so uncertain and ambiguous as to resemble 
a Delphic Oracle. On the contrary, they sent nu¬ 
merous telegrams not only from Salt Lake City, but 
also from points along the railroad between that place 
and Seattle, either containing or asking for additional 
information. 

When the party from the Gordon mine reached the 
depot at Seattle, Blank and Petromelinski, who had 
been in that city for two days, were there to meet 
them. 

<f We are very glad to see you’re all here,” said 
Petromelinski. “We feared something might happen 
at the last to keep some of you from coming.” 

“ No,” said Blavinski, “ we have all turned up. I 
know from your telegrams that we go by the inside 
^passage. What I do not know is when we leave. If 
it can be arranged, we should like two or three days 
64 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

here to make some necessary purchases, since both 
Christian and Engleman tell us that this place pos¬ 
sesses advantages for the purchase of things needed in 
Alaska.” 

“ We have secured passage in the steamship Spo¬ 
kane that leaves here three days from now. You will, 
therefore, have plenty of time to make any purchases 
you may desire.” 

Both detectives were especially pleased to see Happy. 

“ I am very glad you are going with us, my lad,” 
said Blank. “ We hope this time to take that fellow 
Mashinsky, and send him to St. Petersburg where he 
will be punished not only for the theft of the diamonds 
and the emerald, but also for murder.” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night hope you catch that black¬ 
haired rascal,” said the Indian, who had heard the 
above conversation. 

It may be said that when the detectives privately 
asked the cause of the dislike of the Indian for Ma¬ 
shinsky, no one could inform them. 

“ Gentlemen,” said Petromelinski to Blavinski and 
Dimitri, “ there was something in your telegram we 
found hard to understand, but since you did not refer 
to it in your subsequent telegrams, we made no refer¬ 
ence to it.” 

“ To what do you refer? ” inquired Blavinski. 

“ To the statement that you would help us in our 
pursuit of Mashinsky under certain conditions. Blank 
and I have talked this matter over on several occasions 
e 65 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


without being able, until quite recently, to imagine 
what these conditions might be. We are so glad, how¬ 
ever, to have your help, under any reasonable condi¬ 
tions, that we determined to say nothing until we met.” 

“ You will not find the conditions unreasonable or 
such as will be difficult for you to accept,” replied Bla- 
vinski. 

“ Let’s hear them, please,” said Petromelinski. 

“ You must know,” said Blavinski, “ that had it not 
been for something that occurred shortly after your 
first telegram was received, requesting us to meet you 
at Seattle, none of us, unless it may have been Dimitri, 
would have seen his way clear to leaving the Gordon 
mine.” 

“ Does the matter you mention,” inquired Petrome¬ 
linski, “ refer to Happy, or to one or both of you 
gentlemen ? ” 

“ It refers to all three,” replied Blavinski. “ As re¬ 
gards Happy, I would say that he received a letter 
from his father in Texas, requesting him to find suit¬ 
able companions to accompany him on a visit to Alaska 
to locate, if possible, his uncle, an H. E. Clinton, who 
left Texas for Alaska several years ago. Clinton is 
known to have reached Alaska, since his family re¬ 
ceived letters from him several years after, but noth¬ 
ing has been heard from him during the last few 
years. It seems that Clinton, or as Happy calls him, 
‘ Uncle Harry,’ was a great favorite with our lad. Al¬ 
though Happy had concluded that it would not be 
advisable to join you in Alaska in looking for 
66 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Mashinsky, yet he did not hesitate to agree to aid in 
the search requested by his father. ” 

“ And now as regards the reasons you gentlemen 
have been willing to meet us here? Suppose you 
begin, Blavinski,” said Petromelinski, “ and then 
Professor Dimitri can tell us his reasons.” 

“ I will leave Dimitri to tell you the greater part of 
the story,” said Blavinski, “ since he is the more in¬ 
terested. I will only say that I have received a letter 
from Russia asking me to give Dimitri all the help I 
can in a search that he is undertaking. This search 
is of such importance that the Czar of Russia has es¬ 
pecially requested me to go with Dimitri and also made 
a request that the lad Happy accompany us if possible.” 

“That sounds interesting, Blank, doesn’t it?” said 
Petromelinski, with a look at his companion as if they 
too could tell things, but did not care to just then. 

“ I am going to Alaska,” said Dimitri, “ to look for 
my eldest son, who left St. Petersburg for that coun¬ 
try several years ago. Like myself, my son is a 
mining engineer. He is known to be in Alaska, al¬ 
though the family have heard nothing from him during 
the past two or three years. It is in an endeavor to find 
him that Blavinski and Happy have accompanied me. 
Now the conditions-” 

“ My dear sir,” interrupted Petromelinski, “ you 
need say nothing more. I understand the conditions, 
and I’m sure Mr. Blank does.” 

His companion simply nodded his head to indicate 
that he did. 


67 



The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ The conditions you would impose,” said Petrome- 
linski, “ are natural. You will agree to help us in 
our search for Mashinsky, only to the extent that you 
are not thereby prevented from following any clues 
that may arise concerning Clinton and Dimitri. Blank 
and I agree to help you in this search under a similar 
condition. If this is anything like as satisfactory to 
you as it is to us you may consider the bargain 
closed.” 

“ It is perfectly satisfactory,” said Blavinski, as did 
also Dimitri and Happy. 

“ I see only one difficulty,” exclaimed Petromelinski. 
“ You will be following two different men, while Blank 
and I will be following a single man. It might easily 
happen that you locate your two men in entirely dif¬ 
ferent parts of the country, while we trace Mashinsky 
to some other part. However,” he added, “ this is 
a difficulty we will endeavor to meet when it arises, if 
it ever does.” 

“ But no such difficulty is apt to arise,” said Happy, 
smiling. “ We have already learned enough of our 
men to be satisfied they have met one another and are 
traveling together.” 

“ That’s splendid,” said Petromelinski. “ That’ll 
help us very much, will it not, Blank? ” 

“ Of course it is splendid,” said Blank. “ It more 
than cuts our work in two. It is much easier to track 
two men when they are traveling together than to track 
a single man. If one leaves no tracks, the other will 
be almost sure to do so. But don’t interrupt the lad. 

68 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Let him tell us all he has learned about these people 
you are endeavoring to trace.” 

Happy now entered into a full account of what 
Bill had learned from the prospector and miner at 
Gordon concerning the man. As soon as the detec¬ 
tives had heard all Happy had to tell them, they turned 
to Colorado Bill and said: 

“ Suppose you tell us what you have learned from 
the miner at Gordon.” 

“ I reckon,” said Bill, “ thet what Hap hez telled ye 
is purty much all thet I know about the feller. How- 
sumever,” he added, “ I kin tell ye this: I happen to 
have known Texas Harry, as this man wuz called, on 
the Texas ranch whar Happy and I lived many years 
ago, and I be sartin the feller wot the man saw war 
Texas Harry.” 

“ Is there any peculiarity about the man that enables 
you to be so sure that he was the one referred to by 
the prospector and miner at Gordon ? ” inquired 
Petromelinski. 

“ I reckon,” said Bill, grinning, “ thet when a feller 
stands six feet five inches with his shoes off, and has 
muscles in all parts of his body thet would make it 
onsafe fer a feller to cross ’im, it would not be so 
wery hard fer a feller to tell jest about what he looked 
like.” 

“ I suppose, sir,” said Petromelinski to Dimitri, 
“ you also have satisfied yourself that the description of 
the other man, seen by the Gordon miner, agrees with 
what you recognize as your son.” 

69 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ I have not the slightest doubt,” was the reply, 
“ that it is my son who was seen with the man Clinton.” 

“ This is a splendid case, Blank,” said Petrome- 
linski. “ Shall I tell what we already know about it? ” 

“ Tell them, of course,” replied Blank. “ There is 
no longer any reason for holding this matter up your 
sleeve.” 

Drawing from his pocket a telegram from the high¬ 
est authority of the police department in Russia, 
Petromelinski read as follows: 

“ 4 You are directed by the Czar of Russia to afford 
his honored subjects, Professor Dimitri and Petrof 
Blavinski, all possible aid in locating Nicholas Dimitri, 
who has been recently seen in Alaska. There are no 
reasons you should not at the same time endeavor to 
arrest the criminal Mashinsky.’ ” 

“ That simplifies matters very much,” said Blavinski, 
“ since we can now call on you gentlemen for help in 
locating our parties.” 

Blank, who had seen enough of the telegram Pe¬ 
tromelinski had been reading to know that it con¬ 
tained additional matter, said in a provoked tone: 

“ Why are you holding the rest back, Ivan? If you 
don’t want me to hear it, I’ll go inside so you can read 
it all to the gentlemen.” 

“ Don’t get huffed, Blank. It’s nothing to make 
you mad. On the contrary, you will filid it a feather 
in your cap. I’ll read it to you,” and he then read as 
follows: 

If you can persuade the detective, B. B. Blank, 
7 ° 


((( 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of Philadelphia, to undertake with you this case at the 
czar’s expense, I should like him to do so.’ ” Turn¬ 
ing to Blank he said with a smile: “ I was only holding 
this back to make you feel good. There will be no 
trouble in persuading you to undertake this case with 
me, will there ? ” 

“ Trouble in persuading me!” replied Blank. “I 
should think not. I am not only too much honored 
by being asked to aid so able a man as you, but I am 
especially honored in being requested to do so by a 
man so high in authority as the Czar of Russia.” 

There was much to look at in Seattle, a large city on 
the eastern shore of Puget Sound, in the State of 
W ashington. 

The city forms a center for the business interests of 
the surrounding country, and is especially the starting- 
point from the United States for the Alaskan gold¬ 
fields. 

Seattle was ravaged by a great fire in 1890, but has 
since arisen from its ashes more beautiful than ever. 
According to N. H. Darton, of the United States 
Geological Survey, the growth of its population is 
greater than that of any other large city of the world. 
In 1880 the population was only three thousand five 
hundred and thirty-three, while at the beginning of 
1911 it had grown, according to a fair estimate, to 
at least two hundred and sixty thousand. It owes 
much of its growth to the gold discoveries of Alaska 
as well as to the vast lumber interests of the State 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

of Washington, and to the comparatively recent dis¬ 
coveries of rich mines in the Cascade Ranges and in 
the eastern counties of the State of Washington. 
Seattle is one of the healthiest of the large cities of the 
world. Its death-rate ranks among the lowest. 

“If you and Bill have nothing else to do, and can 
give us an hour this morning,” said Blavinski and 
Dimitri to Happy after breakfast on the second morn¬ 
ing of their stay in Seattle, “ we should like to show 
you something.” 

While they were accompanying the gentlemen, Bla¬ 
vinski said to Happy: 

“ Knowing the wonderful skill you have with both 
the pistol and the rifle, Professor Dimitri and myself 
wish to make you a present of a thirty-forty repeater 
magazine rifle, carrying a heavy three-nosed ball with 
tremendous shocking power. In parts of Alaska you 
may meet very large game, such as the grizzly bear, 
the moose, or the caribou. Now for such game the 
comparatively small bore of your rifle might make the 
ball too small or too light to insure effective work. 
How is that, Bill ? ” he said, appealing to Happy’s 
companion. 

“ I reckon, sir,” said Bill, “ thet ye be correct. A 
grizzly b’ar be a wery rough and onery beast. While 
I’m not deny in’ thet ef a ball war passed through his 
heart or atween his eyes, it might kill ’im, and am 
also not denyin’ that Hap here could plug a ball 
72 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


through his heart or right atween his eyes, better’n 
most fellers, yet sense this ball be so small it might not 
kill the animal to onct; it might give him a chance to 
git ugly work in ef one happened to be near. Sense, 
tharfore, these gents be ready to give ye sech a rifle, 
Hap, I’d adwise ye to take it with thanks.” 

From the great variety of goods carried in stock at 
this store, there was an ample opportunity to examine 
many different kinds of rifles. 

“ Ye be a bigger chap now, Hap,” said Bill to his 
companion, “ than when ye fust bought yer rifle in 
Philadelphy. Now, while ye must be keerful not to 
pick out too heavy a gun, yet it should be a gun wot 
hez these two pints about it. It must carry a powerful 
cartridge and must not weigh too much.” 

Under Bill’s guidance the gentlemen selected an 
excellent Winchester rifle of five cartridges of thirty 
caliber. The gentlemen also purchased similar rifles 
for themselves, and made Bill a present of one. Since 
Bill was now a rich man, at least he would have been 
had he been willing to sell his Gordon stock, he objected 
to receiving a present, but Blavinski good-naturedly set 
aside this objection by the remark: 

“ You need not hesitate, Bill,” he said. “ When we 
are placing this weapon in your hands it is quite as 
much for our own safety as for your pleasure. In 
certain portions of Alaska, it may readily happen that 
our lives may depend on the fact that you and Happy 
have weapons that are capable of doing certain and 
quick work.” 


73 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Bill and Happy made some other purchases while 
in the city. Among other things were lines both for 
deep-water fishing in the fiords along the coast, and 
for shallower river fishing. 

“ I think I’ll buy this rope, Bill,” said Happy, hand¬ 
ing him what is sometimes erroneously called a lasso, 
the well-known rope employed on the Western ranches 
for roping cattle. 

“ It is a beaut, Hap. It be much longer than most 
of the ropes we used on the ranch, and yet it don’t 
weigh so much.” 

This was true, for owing to the extra quality of the 
rope, it possessed a strength far in excess of ordinary 
rope, although of much smaller diameter. 

In addition to the rope, Happy bought a pair of 
powerful field-glasses, remarkably light, and there¬ 
fore readily carried, since the tubes and metal parts 
were all made of the very light metal, aluminium. 


74 


CHAPTER VI 


The Inside Passage 

After registering at the hotel, they visited the Spo¬ 
kane steamship on which their berths had been taken. 
This was one of the latest additions to the Pacific 
Coast Steamship Company’s vessels for service between 
Seattle and Alaska by the inside passage. It was a 
steel-built steamer that, for safety, was provided with 
double water-tight bottoms and bulkheads. There 
were three decks—the saloon deck, the upper deck, and 
the hurricane-deck, the latter being the lighter deck at 
the top of the boat. As they were approaching the 
steamship. Happy remarked to Blavinski: 

“ I hope our cabins are on the hurricane-deck. There 
would be no difficulty in getting plenty of air to breathe 
on that deck.” 

“ I hope so too,” replied Blavinski. “ I am fond of 
an abundance of fresh air.” 

The detectives evidently had similar ideas, for they 
had chosen all the staterooms on the hurricane-deck. 
These rooms were well ventilated even when the doors 
were shut. They were heated by steam and lighted by 
electricity. Some of them were provided with brass 
bedsteads in place of the ordinary berths, and some 
even had bathrooms attached. They really were luxu¬ 
riously fitted up. 


75 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

The staterooms selected for them could be almost 
converted into out-of-door rooms, thus permitting a 
fairly good view on their side of the vessel. There was 
a large observation-room located aft of the hurricane- 
deck. This was provided with plate-glass windows 
and reclining chairs, and was intended for all first- 
class passengers who might wish to view comfortably, 
from either side, the continually moving panorama. 

The part of the boat, however, that was most fre¬ 
quently used for this purpose by Happy and his com¬ 
panions was a flooring above the observation-room, 
where the passengers could walk about and see things 
in all directions. 

If the furnishings and arrangements of the Spokane 
aroused the enthusiasm of Blavinski and his com¬ 
panions, who were accustomed to the best Pullman-car 
accommodations while traveling on the railroads, it is 
not surprising that they made Bill and Awake-in-the- 
Night almost speechless. 

“ This be a swell boat, Hap,” said Bill. “ I don’t 
mind tellin’ ye,” he added, “ thet I hev never seed sech 
a boat afore. I hev heerd some of the fellers in camp 
a speakin’ of the boats wot they hev traveled in. They 
telled me thet they were acterally better than a hotel 
on wheels. Now ez ye know, Bill hez seen in them 
Pullman cars we used a cornin’ here some wery pretty 
things; they too be real hotels, but they was only one- 
story hotels. This here thing hez three stories on top 
of one another. It sartinly be swell.” 

76 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Come, Bill, and let us lo®k at the cabin they have 
given us,” said Happy. 

“ I sartinly will, Hap/’ was the reply. “ Be ye goin’ 
to let Bill room with ye ? ” 

“ I surely am, Bill,” said Happy. “ Here it is,” he 
continued, leading Bill to a cabin on the hurricane- 
deck. “ We shall occupy this cabin, and Mr. Blavinski 
and Professor Dimitri the one next to it.” 

“ But, Hap,” said Bill, “ I hope ye won’t let them 
fellers spend too much money in gettin’ a place fer 
Bill to sleep in. A much less swell place will be good 
enough fer him.” 

“ But, Bill,” replied Happy, “ I want the pleasure 
of your company as a roommate, so please say noth¬ 
ing more about it.” 

Awake-in-the-Night and Scipio had of course been 
given less pretentious and expensive quarters. When 
Happy was taking them through the boat to show them 
its wonders, Awake-in-the-Night made efforts to con¬ 
ceal his astonishment, but was unable to do so. 

“ White people heap great. They put their houses 
on big boats, and take them with them when they go 
from one place to another.” 

But the beauties of the boat apparently failed to 
produce the astonishment in Scipio that Happy had 
expected. 

“ This hyah boat is much like de big boats on de 
Mississippi Ribbah, Marse Hap. Scipio done seen dem 
afoh when he went trabbling with Marse Jawge. 
77 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

But,” he added, “ I’se free to acknowledge that this 
hyah boat be different from de Mississippi boats. I 
hez been lookin’ fob de wheels on de sides, but kain’t 
find ’em.” 

“ No, Scipio,” replied Happy, “ these boats are 
moved by screws that turn around under the water at 
the stern of the boat. But come,” continued Happy, 
“ you must acknowledge you have never seen any boat 
on the Mississippi River equal to this magnificent 
steamship, have you?” 

“ Now, Marse Hap,” was the reply, “ I ain’t tellin’ 
dat to ebery one, but Scipio be free to declar to you dat 
dis hyah boat beats de Mississippi boats all holler. It 
be biggah and moh comfortable. How far do we go 
in dis boat? ” 

“ About one thousand miles,” was the reply. 

“ Dat sartinly be a long trabbel, Marse Hap,” re¬ 
plied Scipio. 

There was one part of the steamship that especially 
aroused Scipio’s admiration. This was the sumptu¬ 
ously equipped dining-room, provided with all the fur¬ 
nishings that extended experience could suggest. 

There were reasons for providing a sumptuous and 
beautiful dining-room. Although the route of the 
vessel lay for thousands of miles in the waters of the 
Pacific Ocean, yet through nearly the entire voyage 
the waters were shut off from the ocean by chains of 
mountainous islands lying generally parallel to the 
coast. Seasickness was, therefore, practically un- 

78 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


known. It was not surprising then that during break¬ 
fast, luncheon, and dinner, as well as during a late 
luncheon, the dining-room was the most popular por¬ 
tion of the boat, for the bracing air whetted the appe¬ 
tites of both young and old. 

Scipio’s approval of the arrangements for cooking 
and eating was especially pronounced when he was 
shown the steamship’s cold-storage room, where were 
kept fish, flesh, and food of. all kinds, not only from the 
cold, clear, Alaskan waters, but from practically all 
parts of the world. 

“ Marse Hap,” he inquired, “ does ye think it’ll be 
possible to introduce Scipio to the head cook what runs 
dis place? Scipio would like to ax him questions and 
offer to swap some of the things what he knows about 
cookin’ with what this feller may know.” 

“ I don’t know about that, Scipio,” replied Happy 
with a smile. “ I do not believe the cook, or as they 
call him, the chef, would care to trade recipes. In a 
place like this the chef is a great man. However,” he 
added, “ I’ll see after we get started.” 

But without waiting to be introduced, Scipio worked 
his way into the kitchen and struck up an acquaintance 
with some of the lower cooks. Indeed, he even gained 
the approbation of the chef himself when something 
he had prepared, one of his choicest dishes, was sent 
to the chef to be tasted before being sent to the table 
and highly approved. 

“ I declar, Marse Hap,” he said with a grin, u dat 
man, he foh suah knows good food when he tastes it.” 
79 


“ Do you fear being troubled with seasickness, my 
lad? ” inquired Professor Dimitri of Happy when the 
boat had left Seattle and was heading northward on its 
long voyage toward Skagway. 

“ I do not know, sir,” was the reply. “ I have never 
been on the ocean before. I do not think, however, I 
will be much troubled, as I can generally manage to 
get rid of all I put in my stomach.” 

“ He is only jollying you, Happy,” said Blavinski. 
“ The waters here are never very rough, being shut 
off almost completely from the rest of the ocean. It is 
only while passing the openings between the islands and 
the open waters outside that it is at all rough, and 
then it is seldom rough enough to make even delicate 
people seasick. Now, as I know, you are far from 
being delicate. I do not expect you will be troubled as 
Professor Dimitri suggests.” 

The view that could be had from the hurricane-deck, 
and especially from the open flooring above it, was 
grand in the extreme. As the vessel steamed through 
the calm, clear waters of the channels, gulfs, bays, and 
straits between the mainland and the island chains that 
stretched along the mainland, there was to be seen a 
succession of beautiful bays and narrow inlets extend¬ 
ing far into the land. To add to the beauty of this 
wonderful panorama, the mountains, both on the main¬ 
land and on the islands, were covered with dense 
forests, where in addition to the large trees could be 
seen near the shores a dense and tangled undergrowth 
80 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

that would almost make one imagine that the boat was 
moving, not through such latitudes as those of south¬ 
eastern Alaska, but rather through the semitropical 
regions of some place like Florida. 

The glories of the panorama were greatly increased 
by the fact that many of the mountains had snow-clad 
summits, and presented marked contrasts when bathed 
in full sunlight, and when suddenly shut off by the 
passage of clouds. 

The following description of this district is taken 
from McLain’s excellent work entitled “ Alaska and 
the Klondike ”: 

“ The channels are deep, the waters green and dark 
and wonderfully phosphorescent at night, but quiet as 
an inland lake, and one may give himself over to full 
enjoyment of the ever-changing and ever-charming 
panorama of sea and mountain, of crags and peaks 
and softly wooded slopes, of vegetation at the water’s 
edge, dense and tropical in its luxuriance, suddenly cut 
off for a space where a rigid stream of ice and snow, 
heading up among the mountaintops, fills the passes 
between and comes down almost to the water’s edge— 
such contrasts does Nature delight in that she plants 
her fairest flowers at the feet of her dead glaciers. 
Sometimes the water-passes widen to several miles, and 
again they contract to a few hundred feet of narrow 
gorge where the deep-green waters of the sea boil and 
foam, and dash along the near-by rocky shores as the 
tide rushes in or out.” 

F 81 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

It is not surprising that McLain or others, who have 
often taken this fairylike voyage, see in the region a 
close resemblance to that on the western coast of 
Norway. Their prediction that before long the route 
will form a favorite holiday cruise for yachts and 
launches would seem to be more than probable since, 
besides wonders in natural scenery, the route offers an 
abundance of such strange and curious things as the 
Indians of Alaska with their totem-poles on the land, 
and porpoises and whales in the waters. 

Without attempting to follow the voyage in detail, 
it is sufficient to say that the Spokane continued 
through the Strait of Georgia and through various 
narrow channels formed by the numerous islands. 
Among these were the wonderful series of fiords, with 
their high mountain borders and channels of almost 
untold depths at their feet, as well as the famous Sey¬ 
mour Narrows, a contracted channel through which 
the tide rushes with such velocity that the steamer finds 
it advisable to time its voyages so as to pass through 
during favoring tides. 

But there are drawbacks in the enjoyment of this 
beautiful region. During certain seasons of the year 
the charming scenery is apt, for shorter or longer 
periods of time, to be shut off from view by fogs 
brought by the moist air. These fogs are so dense 
that they cut off not only the natural beauties so pleas¬ 
ant to the tourist, but also the shape and direction of 
the land so important to the pilot. Since, generally 
speaking, the channels are quite narrow, the fogs are 
82 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

not only annoying, but are not unattended by serious 
dangers. 

Fogs, however, do not always stop travel, as the fol¬ 
lowing incident shows: 

One day when a dense fog suddenly cut off the view 
the boat kept steaming on ahead with only a slight 
decrease in its speed. 

“ Be they afraid of hitting another boat coming the 
other way, Hap?” inquired Bill when he heard the 
steamer’s fog-horn almost constantly sounding. 

“ Not exactly another boat, Bill,” replied Happy. 
“ I guess they are rather afraid the high shores will 
suddenly fly out and hit us.” 

“ Stop your fooling, Hap,” replied Bill, grinning. 
“ I reckon these rocks be stuck too tight into the land 
to fly off and hit the boat.” 

“ True, Bill,” replied Happy, “ but the boat might 
strike them.” 

“ Bill sees now what ye mean, Hap,” replied Bill. 
“ But sense the shore can’t holler out to tell the pilot 
whar they be, what’s the good in using them fog¬ 
horns? Kin ye tell me that, Hap? ” 

“ I am not so sure, Bill, that the rocks cannot talk,” 
replied Happy. “ Listen,” he said, pretending he could 
hear what the fog-horns were saying. “ Can’t you 
hear the horn saying to the high banks of the coast: 
‘ Hello there! Where are you ? Call out loud, I don’t 
want to run against you! Something might get hurt! ’ 

“ Listen now, Bill,” he added, “ can’t you hear them 
answer: 

83 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“‘Here we are! Right out here. Turn quickly! 
You are steering straight toward us!’ ” 

At first Bill thought that Happy was jollying him, 
but he soon caught on, and said: 

“ Ez I have often said, Hap, ye be a cute one. Bill 
understands ye now. When ye say the high banks 
speak to the boat, ye mean their echoes talk to it. The 
screeches of the fog-horn, by their echoes, tell the 
pilot whar the shores be,, though he can’t see them. Be 
I right? ” 

“ Quite right, Bill,” replied Happy. 

“ That’s a splendid explanation, my lad,” said one of 
the passengers who happened to hear what Happy had 
said to Bill. “ It’s so clear that anyone can under¬ 
stand it.” 

All enjoyed the voyage, but probably none so much 
as Happy. The large field-glasses he had purchased in 
Seattle were in constant use as the steamship was 
passing some especially attractive point. Blavinski and 
Dimitri, who were with the lad much of the time, ex¬ 
perienced no little enjoyment in watching his express¬ 
ive face as he reveled in the rapidly passing beauties 
of land and water. 

“ Would it trouble you too much, Professor Dimi¬ 
tri,” inquired Happy, “ if now and then I ask questions 
about what I am seeing? There is so much I cannot 
understand.” 

“ Do not hesitate, Happy. Ask all you wish. If I 
can explain your difficulties I shall be happy to do so. 

84 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


If I don’t understand them myself, I shall have no 
hesitation in telling you so. So fire away. I find it a 
great advantage to talk with a bright chap like you 
about natural phenomena. What is troubling you most 
just now ? ” 

“ The larger arms of the sea, through which we are 
passing, that lie between the mainland and the island 
chains extending along the shore, and especially,” he 
added, “ the narrower inlets that I believe you call 
fiords, and their high mountain borders. They seem 
alike to me,” he continued. “ They look as if, some¬ 
how or other that I don’t understand, the entire region 
here had once been covered with higher mountains 
that had gradually sunk into the ocean, so that what 
we can see now are only the points that have remained 
uncovered by the waters.” 

“ That is a splendid generalization, my lad,” replied 
Dimitri. “ I know from my readings that the entire 
region of southeastern Alaska is a fiord region, and 
that the deep channels or fiords include both the larger 
and the smaller openings. I shall only be able now 
to tell you generally how it is that these cuttings have 
been produced. At some other time I shall take up 
the matter more thoroughly with you, 

“ You are correct,” he continued, “ in believing that 
a long time ago this entire region was covered with 
high mountain ranges separated by narrow valleys, and 
that the islands along the coast were once the summits 
of continuous mountain ranges and were produced by 
a gradual sinking of this part of the land. 

85 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ You must not, however,” he continued, “ imagine 
that a sinking alone is capable of producing fiords. 
Like all fiord regions, this region had a previous 
gradual elevation accompanied by an increase in cold 
and snowfall. During its elevation, glaciers or ice 
masses collected in the mountain valleys and gradually 
cut in them deep gorges.” 

“ That was something like the canons the Colorado 
and other rivers in parts of the United States cut in 
their channels,” exclaimed Happy; “for I was told 
that the deep canons cut by the water required the 
gradual lifting of the land. Am I right ? ” 

“ Quite right, Happy,” was the reply. “ When this 
cutting of channels by the ice had been completed, a 
gradual sinking began, and the ocean, penetrating deep 
into the valleys, turned them into fiords, while the 
summits of the mountains remained as the islands we 
see along these coasts.” 

“ Do you know, professor,” inquired Happy, “ how 
far some of these smaller fiords reach into the coast 
mountains ? ” 

“ I believe,” replied the professor, “ th^t some of 
the narrower fiords reach a hundred miles or more 
into the heart of the mountains. I suppose you know,” 
he continued, “ that there are many fiord regions in 
different parts of the world, such, for example, as those 
of the coasts of Maine, Labrador, Newfoundland, 
Greenland, Norway, southern South America, Tas¬ 
mania, and South Australia.” 

“Then, professor,” said Happy, “I suppose that 
86 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


some of the ice masses we can still see coming from 
the land down into the water are the remains of these 
glaciers that have not yet been dissolved by the waters 
of the ocean. ” 

44 They are the remnants of the great ice-sheet 
that, during the time of the gradual elevation of the 
lands, covered the northern regions of the earth and 
caused the deep cutting of the glacial valleys,” was 
the reply. 

In accordance with his custom, Happy was silent 
for some time after what Professor Dimitri had told 
him, with the usual succession of smiles chasing one 
another over his face. Dimitri was enjoying these 
smiles without saying anything, until something oc¬ 
curred to Happy in connection with what the profes¬ 
sor had told him that was so odd that a silent smile 
was not sufficiently expressive, so the lad broke into a 
rippling laugh. 

“ Tell me what it is, Happy,” exclaimed Dimitri, 
44 so I may laugh with you.” 

44 I am laughing at something I heard the captain of 
the steamer say to one of the passengers the other day 
when we were steaming away in the fog. The captain 
had explained how the sound of the fog-horn flings 
back its echoes from the high shore lands and warns 
the pilot of their position. The passenger thought he 
had caught the captain in a mistake. 4 But, sir/ he 
remarked, 4 the rocks in the smaller portion of the 
channel being covered by the water cannot throw back 
the sounds. How can you tell their position? ’ 

87 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ ‘ The waters of the channel and fiord,’ replied the 
captain, ‘ are very deep. There is no danger of stri¬ 
king a rocky bottom. Indeed,’ he added, 4 1 wish I 
could turn the channels and lay them out flat. We 
should then have plenty of room and still deep enough 
water for the boat.’ ” 

“No wonder the remembrance of what you heard 
made you laugh,” replied Dimitri. 

It will be remembered that under Happy’s instruc¬ 
tions Bill had gradually learned to read. One day dur¬ 
ing the voyage Happy found him laboriously reading 
the circulars of the Pacific Steamship Company. 

“ Hap,” he said, “ I be tryin’ to find ef tliar be 
cheaper places on the boat fer sleepin’ in. Shorely,” he 
said, “ miners and prospectors what be goin’ ter Alaska 
couldn’t pay secli steep prices ez be charged fer the 
room we sleep in. They’d soon be busted and hev 
nothing to live on when they reached the diggins.” 

“Right, Bill,” said Happy, smiling; “there are 
other and much cheaper boats for reaching the places 
to which we are going in this boat. While the accom¬ 
modations are much cheaper, they are nevertheless very 
comfortable, and even in this boat there are accom¬ 
modations far cheaper than those we are using.” 


88 


CHAPTER VII 


The Lands of the Totem-pole 

The Spokane, being designed for tourist travel, had so 
arranged the times of reaching and leaving the princi¬ 
pal towns and cities at which it touched, as to afford its 
passengers a reasonably abundant opportunity for 
sightseeing. In this way it was possible for our party 
to visit not only these places, but also various sawmills, 
canneries, fisheries, glaciers, and other points of in¬ 
terest. In the same way they had an opportunity for 
gaining some idea of the native Indian tribes, ex¬ 
amining the totem-poles erected in front of the houses; 
for gaining some idea of the habits of the natives; and 
for making excursions to some of the fishing-banks. 

There were not many opportunities for the use of 
rifles while on the steamer. On one or two occasions, 
however, Happy created no little excitement. As the 
steamer was approaching one of its stopping-places, 
he shot a large bird whose body was afterward picked 
up and brought to him by a man in a small boat. 

As the lad was about aiming his rifle at the bird, one 
of the passengers began to jolly him. 

“ Sonny,” he cried, “ that’s a rifle you have; not a 
shotgun. You cannot expect to hit a bird at that dis¬ 
tance with a single ball.” 

Bill, who had heard the remark, replied with a grin: 

89 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ I kin onderstand, sir,” he said, “ that ye might 
naterally feel thet way, and I’m not disputin’ thet wot 
ye hev said would be true fer most people, but ez fer 
this youngster, I would adwise ye to wait to see him 
miss afore ye talk ez ye hev been talkin’.” 

The bird fell on the firing of the rifle. When, on 
being picked up, it was found that the ball had passed. 
through its head, the ridicule changed to admiration, 
and Happy was frequently requested to try his skill 
on various larger animals that could be seen from the 
deck of the steamship. 

We shall not attempt to describe, except very gener¬ 
ally, the different towns and villages that were touched 
during the passage. Briefly, however, the Indian town 
at Metlakahtla, established many years ago by William 
Duncan, a lay missionary, might be mentioned. This 
place showed wonderful signs of prosperity in its ex¬ 
cellent schoolhouse, church, and hospital, as well as in 
a large salmon cannery and sawmill. It will greatly 
interest a large and rapidly increasing class, who be¬ 
lieve in vocational training, to know that besides the 
power of the Christian religion, Duncan attributes 
his great success at this place to the fact that with the 
teaching of Christianity, he combined instruction in 
such industries as would enable the people to avail 
themselves most readily of the wonderful natural re¬ 
sources of their country. The progress was all the 
more astonishing, since the people were very low in 
the social scale, even when Duncan began working 
with them, having been credited with cannibalism. 

90 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Another town was Juneau, the capital of Alaska. It 
is possible that some of my readers, who have not fol¬ 
lowed its history during the past few decades, may 
believe that Sitka, and not Juneau, is the capital of 
Alaska. Sitka was formerly the capital. This was 
when it was advantageously situated as regards Rus¬ 
sia. When the country afterward came into the pos¬ 
session of the United States, the greater advantages 
possessed by Juneau caused it soon to replace Sitka in 
commercial importance and eventually to become the 
capital. 

Juneau is situated on a small strip of land at the 
foot of a deep ravine, backed by almost precipitous 
mountain slopes. It forms a beautiful sight when ap¬ 
proached from the water. 


> 


On a journey of the character they were taking on 
the Spokane it would be difficult to say which were the 
most attractive features, since different people were 
necessarily interested from different points of view. 
There was probably, however, one thing that possessed 
a strange interest for all, and this was those curiously 
carved poles, or trees, called “ totem-poles,” that were 
to be seen in front of the houses in some of the Indian 
villages. These poles consisted, for the greater part, 
of trees growing in place and covered with grotesque 
and hideous carvings. 

“ What be them things, Hap ? ” said Bill, during an 
occasion when the stop of the Spokane had been long 
enough to enable the tourists to visit a large Indian 
9i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

settlement and witness that strange entertainment 
known as a “ potlatch.” “ Be they idols ? ” 

“ I am not certain, Bill,” was the reply. “ I have 
been trying to understand them from brief descriptions 
I have read while on the steamship. They are called 
‘ totem-poles/ but just what totem-poles are I am un¬ 
certain, and have not been able to find any one who 
can tell me. As far as I can see, however,” he added, 
“ they might be called the family trees of the Indians, 
who appear to be proud of their ancestors, and take 
this plan of letting it be known to all from whom they 
can claim their origin.” 

“ Ye be right, Hap,” remarked Bill, “ when ye say 
these people be proud of the people they cum from. 
As ye know, I hev hed much to do with the Indians 
further south. They too be wery proud of the people 
they cum from. A many a time I hev heerd some of 
these men chinnin’ around the camp-fire about their 
fathers and the fathers what came before their 
fathers.” 

“ Yes, Bill,” said Happy, “ the Indians are gener¬ 
ally very proud of their ancestors.” 

“ These fellers hev sartinly spent a lot of time 
carvin’ them trees and makin’ them inter totem-poles.” 

“ And yet,” said Happy, more to himself than to 
Bill, “ nothing like the time many civilized people 
spend in tracing their family trees back to William the 
Conqueror, or to some other celebrated and remote 
ancestor.” 

William Duncan, referred to above as the founder 
92 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of Metlakahtla, disagrees with the generally accepted 
idea that the totem-pole is the distinctive mark of the 
tribe. He asserts, on the contrary, that it is the mark 
of the clan. Those interested in such matters will find 
additional information in the appendix, as condensed 
from Duncan in one of the circulars of the Pacific 
Coast Steamship Company, as well as directly from 
the pen of Duncan himself in the publication, “ The 
Metlakahtla.” (See Appendix.) 

Professor Dimitri, as Happy afterward found, had 
given some little attention to the totem-poles. 

“ I do not pretend, except very generally, to under¬ 
stand this exceedingly broad subject. Pm sure you will 
be interested,” he said to Happy, “ to know that 
‘ totemism,’ a general name given to totems, or natural 
objects, exists among many of the uncivilized tribes in 
different parts of the world. It is common to practi¬ 
cally all the North American Indians, and exists to a 
considerable extent in Australia.” 

“ What is a totem ? ” inquired Happy. 

“ I believe,” was the reply, “ a totem is a natural 
object, such as a plant or animal, that has been adopted 
by a tribe, and sometimes by a family, or even a single 
person, as a symbol for something he regards with 
superstitious reverence. For example, a man is never 
permitted to kill his totem if an animal, or to eat it if a 
plant. He keeps it before him in his mind, not only by 
carving it on the pole in front of his dwelling, where 
all who pass may know the clan to which he belongs, 
but at times may even tattoo its picture on his body. 

93 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ But I understand,” he continued, 44 that totemism 
goes farther than this. It is strictly forbidden that any 
member of a clan marry within his own clan, and yet 
at the same time he is obliged to marry only a member 
of some kindred clan.” 

It may be mentioned that long afterward. Professor 
Dimitri gave Happy the following definition of totem¬ 
ism as taken from the “ Catholic Encyclopedia ”: 

“ 4 Totemism—a primitive social system in which the 
members of a clan reckoned kinship through their 
mothers, and worshiped an animal or plant which they 
regard as their ancestor, and the image of which they 
tattooed on their persons.’ ” 

“ Then,” said Happy, 44 if we examine the totem- 
poles we can see the animals to which these people or 
clans belong. It would appear that here they consider 
themselves to have descended from a bird, a fish, or a 
bear.” 

44 So it would seem,” remarked Professor Dimitri. 

Awake-in-the-Night appeared to have a shadowy 
knowledge of totems, and when asked whether he 
thought they were gods, said he was not certain, but 
believed they were intended to let every one know from 
whom they claimed their descent 

Scipio was greatly frightened by so great a number 
of horrible-looking objects. Like many Africans, he 
believed in ghosts and spirits, especially in devils 
capable of doing great harm to any one they disliked. 

94 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


To him every totem-pole was what he called a “ fetish,” 
a kind of talisman or magical object, capable of being 
employed by the one who owned it to bring trouble on 
his enemies. 

“ I declar, Marse Hap,” he said, “ Scipio be scared 
a’most to death. He be glad he’s wid you. He knows 
what terrible bad things a mighty little fetish can do, 
but dese heah fetishes, so big and so many, scare him. 
Do you think, Marse Hap,” he inquired anxiously, 
“ dat de debbils in ’em will hurt poor Scipio as long 
as he is with you ? ” 

“ As long as you are with me, Scipio, they will not 
hurt you,” he said. “ I have magic that will scare 
them away.” 

“ Den Scipio mighty glad and don’t care,” was the 
reply. 

From the way the tourists were talking among them¬ 
selves, it was evident that the crowning matter of in¬ 
terest they expected to see was the “ potlatch,” before 
referred to. This is a ceremony that is not at all un¬ 
common in southeastern Alaska. 

Potlatch is a Chinook word for “ gift.” During the 
ceremony the greatest prodigality is exhibited in things 
that are given away. 

Like, perhaps, most ceremonies that have been 
handed down from father to son through many genera¬ 
tions, the object of the potlatch has become somewhat 
different from what it formerly was. Originally, the 
ceremony was intended wholly for the benefit of the 
95 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


dead. The people believed Tie only wev things cculd 
be sent to Tie dead ^i: by destroying Toem. Feasibly, 
because when anything is given away freely, that :s. 
wher nothing is directly receive! in exchange for :r it 
is as good as destroyed to is former owner, a charge 
was gra dually adopted of making presents : f tat Tur ps 
:: cue's friends instead of actually destroying Treat 
It mas the potlatch that made it possible fir a man to 
gain a reputation for great wealth by the liberality with 
which he offered hospitality these who attended the 
cereat*:ay. la this w£y he might cone to he well 
thought of among his people. By giving away more 
than his neighbors, he might increase his chances fir 
being Tenet chief. "The to a certaiu extent the later 
idea of hospitality art generosity came tt replate the 
original idea of thus disposing of one's goods so as to 
sent Tithing ant food to one’s teat friends, yet the 
first idea was never completely lost sigh: oh 

At the potlatch a special effort was mate to oroviie 
ah the foot the geests code eau the food consisting 
generally of pilot bread, apples, coffee, ant candy. 
Vfhen each had eater as math as he cr she could, the 
bawl each goes: was expected tt bring was ailed v.frh 
food to be taker home. During the meal the geests 
talked, told stories, or delivered addresses referring to 
the greatness of their ancestors 

The most important part of the pi Tatar the part 
that probably especially attracts its visitors, is what 
comes when the feast is over, art this consists of gifts 
of rods of muslin flannel, art blankets. 













The Land of Ice and Snow 


The following description of a portion of the exer¬ 
cises of a potlatch is taken from a circular published by 
the Pacific Coast Steamship Company, entitled “ The 
Alaska Indian Mythology; their Legends and Tradi¬ 
tions”: 

“ Following the feast comes the distribution of all 
sorts of gifts—rolls of cotton, muslin, flannel, and 
quantities of blankets. These blankets, representing 
much of the tangible wealth of the host, in times past 
have been distributed with lavish recklessness. At 
many potlatches those which were not carried away 
were piled high upon the blazing fire and burned. 
Others were torn into strips, wrapped about the bodies 
of the dancers and otherwise destroyed. 

A few years ago it was not unusual to see gar¬ 
ments made from the different pieces of doth, of 
various colors and qualities, which were received at the 
potlatch, reminding one of Joseph’s * coat of many 
colors.' When the big drum, or * geough/ vigorously 
beats out its monotonous tones, the Indians come forth 
from their homes to the dance-house, with hideously 
painted faces and gorgeous attire. The faces of the 
dancers are painted in black and red streaks. Their 
headgear is a marked feature of their grotesque attire. 
It is often trimmed with ermine skins, pending from 
the band, nearly covering the head and face and flying 
in every direction when in motion, with a girdle of 
sea-lion's whiskers about the top. On one occasion the 
hollow in the crown of the headgear was filled with 
swan’s-down and feathers, which were showered about 
97 


G 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the room on the guests, while dancing, as blessings. 
Each one dresses as gorgeously as he can afford, in 
robes, furs, blankets, including any article of showy 
dress. 

“ The peculiar costumes, fierce gestures, and mo¬ 
notonous singing of the Indians form a scene of bar¬ 
baric splendor. Each holds in his hand a rattle which 
he continuously shakes to ward off the evil spirits. 
The dancing continues until it seems as if they must 
drop from exhaustion. They keep time to the drum 
with violent jerks, gestures, and motions of the body, 
these peculiar attitudes being struck in concert, similar 
to a class in calisthenics, although there may be fifty 
or more persons dancing at the same time. The whole 
assembly joins in the chanting. 

“ Louder and more exciting the chanting becomes; 
swifter the motion of the dancers; and faster the oil is 
poured upon the burning heap of logs. With frenzied 
yells and whoops, they leap into the air and then sud¬ 
denly crouch on the floor. Their movements become 
more convulsive until they become hoarse and ex¬ 
hausted, then suddenly stop and face the host, who 
makes a speech. The singing ceases and all eyes are 
directed toward the speaker as the traditions and his¬ 
tory of the tribe are rehearsed. The beating of the 
drum and pounding on the floor, with the noise of the 
dancing, are deafening. During these entertainments 
all neighboring tribes are invited. They come in large 
canoes, fifty or sixty feet long, and after the potlatch is 
over, they load the craft to the guards with the treas- 
98 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

ures that their superstitious feasting has brought to 
them.” 

Happy and Bill were especially interested in these 
exercises. The dances were not unlike the dances they 
had seen among various Indian tribes. Happy es¬ 
pecially recognized points of resemblance in what he 
had seen in the dances Light-of-the-Sun had shown him 
among the Pueblos during the time of his captivity 
among those people. 

At the close of the ceremony, although the utmost 
prodigality had been exhibited in the distribution of 
blankets and other articles of value, there was much 
that could not be carried away. 

“ Do ye think the feller what guv the potlatch will 
keep this ere stuff fer the next one, Hap ? ” inquired 
Bill. 

“ I don’t know, Bill. Suppose we watch.” 

When this material was deliberately destroyed by 
fire, Bill remarked: “ It seems to me, Hap, that it is a 
durned shame to waste the stuff in that way. It must 
hev made the feller who guv this show a lot of work to 
git this stuff together.” 

“ But, Bill,” replied Happy, “ unless the stuff is 
either given away or destroyed they believe it can be of 
no use to the dead. This,” he continued, “ is just what 
the Pueblos did in the burial-ground when they were 
sending different articles to the dead. Unless the ar¬ 
ticles were destroyed they believed the dead would 
never get them.” 


99 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I reckon ye’re correct, Hap,” replied Bill. “ Ef I 
war ye I would ask Light-of-the-Sun about it when ye 
next see him. Bein’ a shaman as is up in sech things, 
he probably kin tell ye much about ’em.” 

Happy did this on his return, and obtained much 
information from the chief shaman. It was evident, 
however, that many of the things they saw had never 
been heard of by him. 

It must not be supposed that because nothing has 
been said about fishing in the fiord or channels along 
the shore-lands that fishing was too poor to be at¬ 
tractive. On the contrary, it was excellent, even in 
the waters near the shores, where cod, grayling, sal¬ 
mon, and other fish were generally found. 

The following incident, noted by our party, will 
suffice to show the ease of fishing in some parts of the 
“ inside passage.” 

One day when the Spokane was approaching one 
of the stopping-places, the captain, addressing Dimitri, 
said, “ Professor Dimitri, would you like a halibut for 
dinner to-day? ” 

“ Very much, thank you, captain,” was the reply. 
“ Can you catch halibut in the neighborhood? ” 

“ As near as the far side of the vessel when we have 
anchored to the wharf,” was the reply. “ If you are 
fond of such things, stop and see the fish caught. I 
am sure you will find it worth your while.” 

Calling one of the hands, the captain said, “ Here, 
Sam, catch me a good-sized halibut for dinner.” 

“ Aye, aye, sir,” replied Sam, saluting. 

TOO 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Baiting the three hooks on a line with pieces of salt 
pork, Sam threw the line overboard from the far side 
of the vessel as soon as the steamer was secure to the 
wharf, where the water was from fifteen to twenty 
fathoms in depth. 

Almost immediately a pull on the line showed a bite. 
On pulling it two good-sized codfish were seen. 

“ I don’t want ye,” said Sam, taking them from the 
hooks and throwing them both into the water. “ I 
don’t want ye; captain said, ‘ Get me a good-sized 
halibut.’ ” 

A second cast resulted immediately in the catch of 
three cod. Sam, now foolishly losing his temper, ex¬ 
claimed, “ Keep off my line, consarn ye; captain said 
he wanted a halibut, not such things as ye be.” 

“ Don’t lose your temper, Sam,” said the captain, 
who had remained with Dimitri and others who 
watched to see a halibut landed. “ Put heavier leads 
on your line, so it can reach the bottom before the cod 
can take your bait.” 

When this was done, a halibut weighing about three 
hundred pounds was landed on deck. Taken as it was 
from the pure cold waters of the channel, when served 
at dinner only a few hours afterward its delicious 
flavor made it very unlike the cold-storage halibut that 
are so common in many of our Eastern markets. 

Excellent systems of telegraphy and telephony have 
recently been established, connecting different parts of 
Alaska. Blank and Petromelinski, as believers in tele¬ 
grams as aids in tracing people, freely employed them. 

IOI 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

They had already been greatly aided by the Mounted 
Police of the Northwest, whom they had requested to 
send telegrams at their expense to the different towns 
and places at which the steamship stopped. 

While the Spokane was coming into Juneau, one of 
the telegrams was received by the detectives stating 
that a man corresponding to Mashinsky had been seen 
in the great Treadwell mining-camp. In the same 
telegram the statement was made that the two men 
Happy, Blavinski, and Dimitri were seeking, had in¬ 
tended leaving for Dawson. Information on the latter 
point was uncertain. They might still be at the Tread¬ 
well. 

Since they were now not far from Skagway, where 
they would take the White Pass Railroad for Dawson, 
it was agreed to leave the steamer at this point and 
make a more careful search of these districts. 

“ I’m glad, Hap,” said Bill, “ to git on land agin. 
While that ere boat be a wery pleasant place, yet Bill 
likes to tote hisself around by his legs or be toted by a 
horse and not in a boat.” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night heap glad to be off boat. He 
tired doing nothing but eat, sleep, and look.” 

“ Now, Marse Hap,” said Scipio, “ dis darky will 
show you what a meal good enough foh a pusson like 
yourself should be.” 


102 


CHAPTER VIII 


The Treadwell Mines 

While approaching Juneau they could see that, for the 
greater part, the mountain descended almost precipi¬ 
tously to the ocean, so that they wondered where any 
space had been found for the houses and streets. 

“ It almost looks,” said Happy, examining the city 
with his field-glasses as the steamer drew near, “ as if 
the houses were somehow or other stuck on the sides 
of the mountains.” 

When they finally landed they found, as they began 
walking through the city, that the streets, though far 
from level, extended for the greater part in straight 
lines, intersecting one another at right angles. There 
were no naturally level places more than a hundred 
feet square in area, so that places for the foundations of 
large buildings had to be leveled. Indeed, some of the 
buildings were located on hills, so that climbing was 
necessary to insure access to them from practically all 
directions. 

Juneau has fine hotels and excellent restaurants, 
electric lights and good water supply; also telephone 
and telegraph connections with other places. Situated 
as it is in the vicinity of exceedingly rich mining camps, 
it is naturally the center of supplies for the miners and 
prospectors. 

103 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


But it was not for sightseeing that the little party 
had come so far. There were men to be traced, and 
this was a matter that none of them, especially Blank 
and Petromelinski, had lost sight of even for a mo¬ 
ment. The information received by telegraph from the 
Mounted Police of the Northwest made them anxious 
to get to work. It was natural, therefore, that the sub¬ 
ject of conversation during their first meal in the hotel 
was how they could best arrange their work. 

“ The first thing to do, Blank,” said Petromelinski, 
“ is to get as quickly as possible to the Treadwell 
mines.” 

“ Do you know how to reach them? ” inquired Bla- 
vinski. 

“ There is practically only one kind of road between 
Juneau and places outside of it, and that is by water. 
I understand that Douglass Island, on which the mines 
are situated, is readily reached by a boat from one of 
the wharves in Juneau that crosses a channel about 
five miles wide.” 

“ Are there many mines in the neighborhood of 
Juneau?” inquired Blavinski of Dimitri. 

“ There are at least five great mines on Douglass 
Island, and generally speaking, there are gold-bearing 
areas extending along the mainland and including, 
besides Douglass Island, many other outlying islands.” 

“ These are certainly wonderful mines! ” exclaimed 
Dimitri when they had reached the largest of the 
Treadwell properties and saw the great “ glory hole,” 
104 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


a deep, open pit extending below them to the depth of 
seventeen hundred feet or thereabout. “ I under¬ 
stand,” he added, “ that with perhaps a single excep¬ 
tion these are the greatest mines of this kind in the 
world. There are certainly more quartz stamps here 
than in any other mine I have ever visited.” 

Even while they were approaching the mills, the 
din was so great that it was quite impossible readily to 
hear one another talking. 

“ If it is the quartz-mills that are kicking up this 
awful racket, Nicola,” remarked Blavinski to Dimitri, 
“ I can readily believe that the number here is very 
great.” 

Any of my readers who have visited a large quartz 
stamp-mill in operation can readily understand the 
constant terrific roar and noise in a mill like that of the 
Treadwell, where, breakdowns of individual mills ex¬ 
cepted, something in the neighborhood of one thou¬ 
sand separate stamps are kept in constant action day 
and night throughout the entire year, except on the 
Fourth of July and Christmas. 

Since the weight of the stamp employed in the aver¬ 
age quartz stamp-mill varies from seven hundred and 
fifty to twelve hundred and fifty pounds, and each 
makes some sixty drops per minute, one can readily 
form some idea of the noise produced by the great 
number of stamps that were in operation at the time of 
their visit to the Treadwell mines. 

Care is taken to time the successive blows of the dif¬ 
ferent stamps so that not all deliver their blows at 

105 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the same time. A curious alternation of blows, fol¬ 
lowing one another in regular rotation, is therefore at 
once recognized by a visitor. 

Without going into a full description of the Tread¬ 
well mines, it may be said here that they saw enough 
to recognize the following peculiarities of this great 
property: The enormous deposits of gold quartz, con¬ 
sisting mainly of free-milling quartz; the low-grade 
character of the ores, which, on an average, contain 
but a little over two to five dollars’ worth of gold per 
ton; the great depth the excavations had reached, 
Treadwell mines now reaching down to about seven¬ 
teen hundred feet. 

Despite the low value per ton of the ores mined, yet 
the large scale on which the operations are' carried on, 
an almost unlimited water-power, and the economical 
methods of mining employed, reduce the average cost 
of mining and milling to only about $1.30 per ton, 
so that lower values of ores can be more profitably 
mined here than elsewhere. 

Blavinski and his companions carefully watched the 
miners as they were leaving or going to their work, at 
the change of shifts. 

“ I don’t believe we shall be able to do much here,” 
said Dimitri. “ They employ so many men.” 

“ But, my dear sir,” replied Petromelinski, “ the ex¬ 
cellent system they have will make it possible for us to 
have an opportunity to see every man employed here.” 

But when this was done they found that none of 
106 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

the men was, at least at that time, working for the 
company. 

“ I wonder, Nicola,” inquired Blavinski, “ whether 
your son, if obliged to earn his living by working as a 
miner, would do so under his own name.” 

“ I have no doubt whatever about that,” replied 
Dimitri. “ Nicholas is a proud fellow and would never 
let it be known that he was obliged to work for his 
daily bread in this way.” 

“ And what do you say about your uncle ? ” inquired 
Blavinski of Happy. 

“ I think the chances are that Uncle Harry also 
would work under another name,” was the reply. 

“ You can now see how fortunate we have been on 
the Gordon mine to have the canon so cut through the 
vein as to give us the property ready for work below 
the tenth level, Bill,” said Happy, when he learned that 
the workings at the Treadwell mines had gone down 
as far as seventeen hundred feet. 

“ I kin understand thet, Hap,” was the reply, “ and I 
reckon myself fortunate, owin’ ter yer kindness, in bein’ 
so big a stockholder in so lucky a mine as the Gordon 
mine be.” 

Although unsuccessful in directly tracing any of the 
men for whom they were searching, either in the great 
Treadwell mines or in others in the vicinity, yet there 
was no doubt that a man whose general description 
agreed with that of Mashinsky had been working there 
many months ago. For some reason they did not 
107 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


understand, however, he had disappeared, and had 
gone, so a miner claimed, in the direction of Dawson. 

Something happened, however, that gave our party 
for the first time a definite clue to the men they were 
endeavoring to trace. This occurred when they were 
about leaving one of the mining-camps on Douglass 
Island. 

“ Hello, Bill,” said one of the miners approaching 
Colorado Bill. “ What be ye doin’ up here ? Be ye 
lookin’ fer a job. There’s plenty of work ter be had by 
a man like ye.” 

“ Be I lookin’ fer a job?” said Bill in reply; “ not 
ef I knows it. The job I now has suits me so well thet 
I don’t reckon I’ll change it, but I be obliged to ye all 
the same and am mighty glad ter see ye here. Shake 
hands with this lad,” continued Bill. “ Ef I remember 
right, he knowed ye a long time ago on a sartin Texas 
ranch. This chap war with me on thet ranch.” 

“ Glad to know ye, sonny,” said the man, grasping 
him vigorously by the hand. 

“ And I too am glad,” said Happy, “ to see any one 
from the old ranch. If you were once there you prob¬ 
ably remember a man by the name of Texas Harry.” 

“ I remember Harry fer sure,” said the man. “ Did 
ye know him, sonny? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply; “ he’s my uncle.” 

“ I’ve seed thet man lately, sonny,” said the man. 
“ He war here about a month ago.” 

“ Do you remember whether he was alone ? ” in¬ 
quired Happy. 

108 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ He war with a younger man,” was the reply. “ I 
believe the man war a Russian. The two appeared to 
be pards.” 

“ Tell your friend what we are doing here, Bill,” 
said Happy. 

“ Sartinly, Hap,” replied Bill, and explained what 
they were doing. Then continuing he said to the man, 
“ War these fellers down on their luck, or did they 
appear comfortable like ? ” 

“ I thought they war well off,” was the reply. “ I 
don’t know exactly what they war doin’ here, but they 
wanted to know the kind of stamp-mills we use, how 
we worked ’em, how this mine is operated, so I reckon 
they hev struck a rich fissure-vein somewhar.” 

“ Who did the most questioning about this work, 
the one you believe was a Russian or the one you recog¬ 
nized as Texas Harry? ” inquired Dimitri. 

“ The Russian did a-most of the chinning,” was the 
reply. “ He appeared to be ez well up on sech things 
ez any of our regular mining engineers.” 

At Dimitri’s request, he gave them such a descrip¬ 
tion of the man’s appearance that he said to Blavinski: 

“ I have no doubt, Blavinski, that this is Nicholas.” 

“ Now you mention it,” said the man, “ that be just 
what Texas Harry called him.” 

“ Did he ever add another name to it ? ” inquired 
Dimitri. 

“ Yes,” was the reply; “ I remember several times he 
added Dimitri to his name.” 

Blank and Petromelinski, who had been present 
109 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


during this conversation, became very enthusiastic 
when it was sure that the two men referred to were 
the men for whom they had been searching. 

“ What do you think of this for good luck, Blank? ” 
exclaimed Petromelinski. 

“ It’s the best kind of luck,” was the reply. 

A long conversation followed, during which the in¬ 
formation was obtained that these two men, when last 
seen at the Treadwell mine, had been speaking about 
going to Dawson. 

There is probably no lode mine in southeastern 
Alaska that has produced a greater amount of gold 
than the Treadwell. It may be of interest to my read¬ 
ers to know that originally this property was regarded 
as of so little value that in 1881, when but little more 
than a prospect hole, it was forced on John Treadwell, 
a San Francisco builder, to satisfy a loan of one hun¬ 
dred and fifty dollars. 

When it was learned that the three men for whom 
they were searching had been traced toward Dawson, 
all were anxious to leave for that place. It is true that 
Dimitri and Blavinski had hoped to find time to ex¬ 
amine some of the large glaciers in the neighborhood, 
but this was now put aside for a more important work 
they had in hand. 

“ Then it is agreed that we’ll go to Dawson as soon 
as we can,” said the detectives. 

“ How can we get there ? ” inquired Blavinski. 
no 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ But,” he added, “ I need hardly ask that since, of 
course, it will be by water.” 

“ Yes,” replied Petromelinski, who had posted him¬ 
self as thoroughly as he could on the different transpor¬ 
tation routes; “ we shall take a boat from Juneau to 
Skagway.” 

Since Skagway is the ocean terminus of the White 
Pass & Yukon Railroad, almost all the steamers, 
whether large or small, stop both at Juneau and Skag¬ 
way. They therefore had no trouble in getting a boat 
and soon reached this city. 

All had been charmed by the beauty of the route be¬ 
tween Seattle and Juneau, but greater beauties were 
still to be seen, for now their route was in a compara¬ 
tively narrow channel, known as the Lynn Canal, or 
Channel, bordered on both sides by mountains that 
varied in height from three to five thousand feet. The 
mountains had numerous great glaciers and banks of 
snow, from the edges of which the water poured off in 
cascades and falls. What made the view more beauti¬ 
ful was the green carpet of foliage that bordered the 
edges of the ice. Fully a dozen glaciers with nearly as 
many cascades could be seen at the same time. 

“ When the water-power in some of the larger cas¬ 
cades is used to drive electric generators, the cost of 
gold mining will be greatly decreased in the district,” 
said Dimitri to Blavinski. 

Skagway takes its name from an Indian word mean¬ 
ing “ The Home of the North Wind,” from the strong 
iii 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

winds that are common there at certain seasons of the 
year. 

During the excitement in Alaska due to the dis¬ 
coveries of gold in the Klondike and neighborhood, 
Skagway was the point from which the prospectors left 
for the new district. A part of their route was up the 
summit of the mountain to a notch called the White 
Pass, where they could cross over and go down the 
opposite slope to Dawson. But it was very different 
then from what it is now. For Skagway is now the 
point of departure of the White Pass & Yukon Rail¬ 
road, a railroad that was constructed only after the 
overcoming of very great engineering difficulties and 
the consequent expenditure of vast sums of money. 
This railroad extends from Skagway to White 
Horse, which is the head of navigation on the Yukon 
River. 

There were beautiful views to be seen from different 
parts of this railroad. 

On reaching White Horse they took a steamboat 
down the Lewes River for Dawson on the Yukon. 
While not possessing the luxury of the Spokane, yet 
the boat was very comfortable; quite equal to any on 
the Mississippi River. 

While on the cars of the White Pass & Yukon Rail¬ 
road, they became acquainted with a pleasant traveling 
companion, who remained in their company for a long 
time afterward. This was Mr. John M. Justice, of 
Philadelphia, who had frequently visited this section 
112 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of country and was capable of giving them some inter¬ 
esting reminiscences. 

“ There is a great difference now,” remarked Mr. 
Justice, “in the effort required for reaching White 
Horse from Skagway through the White Pass from 
what it was before the construction of this railroad. 
Instead of going as we now can in a few hours in a 
comfortable train to the top of the divide, it then re¬ 
quired days of most difficult walking. Or, as it is 
called in Alaska,” he added, laughing, “ packing, a 
journey during which many died from exposure and 
want of food.” 

Mr. Justice was very fond of boys, and soon became 
well acquainted with Happy. 

“ I suppose you can tell me,” he said, “ the difference 
between an insider and an outsider? ” 

“ Yes,” said Happy; “ I have heard of that, and am 
now an insider myself.” 

“ Are you a tenderfoot? ” he said. 

“ Yes, I am a 4 chee-cha-ko,” ” replied Happy, laugh¬ 
ing. “ If I remain in Alaska long enough I may be 
raised to the dignity of a ‘ sourdough.’ ” 

“ You are certainly not slow,” replied Mr. Justice, 
smiling. “ I thought as much when I first saw you.” 

Since both Rob and Emil had asked Happy, when he 
could readily do so, to send them boxes of minerals 
from Alaska, he took the opportunity of collecting 
specimens of some of the commoner minerals of the 
Treadwell and other mines in the neighborhood. 
ii3 


H 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


These included among those of the non-metallic type: 
the gangue minerals, feldspar, calcite, and quartz; and 
among the metallic minerals: iron pyrites, molybdenite, 
chalcopyrite, magnetite, galena, sphalerite, and pyr- 
rhotite. 


114 


CHAPTER IX 


Down the Lewes River to Dawson on the Yukon 

“ Do you remember, Nicola,” inquired Blavinski of 
Dimitri, while on the boat from White Horse to Daw¬ 
son, “ the area of the main territory of Alaska as men¬ 
tioned by Mr. Christian before we left the Gordon 
mine? ” 

“ It is five hundred and ninety thousand eight hun¬ 
dred and eighty-four square miles,” was the reply. 

“ That’s the trouble,” said Blavinski, in a disap¬ 
pointed tone. “ I knew it was something very large.” 

“ What’s worrying you now, Petrof?” inquired 
Dimitri. 

“ I’d like to know what chance we have in an enor¬ 
mous country like this of ever finding a man like 
Mashinsky who is bright enough to hide his tracks as 
much as possible. To me it seems almost hopeless. 
What do you think about it? ” he inquired, turning to 
the detectives. “ Am I not right ? ” 

“ It seems a difficult task,” replied Petromelinski, 
“ but it is by no means hopeless. Now that we know 
Mashinsky is here, and have recently traced him to the 
Treadwell mines, I am almost willing to stake my pro¬ 
fessional reputation in saying that I think we will get 
him. What do you say to that, Blank ? ” 

“ What do I say about catching Mashinsky ? I not 
ii5 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


only think that we ought to get him, but I believe we 
will get him.” 

“ I'm glad to hear you talk that way, gentlemen,” 
said Blavinski; “ but are you not permitting your de¬ 
sire to take the man to deceive you into a belief that 
you will take him? Please explain to me,” he said to 
Blank, “ why you believe you can take him.” 

“ You tell him, Ivan,” said Blank to Petromelinski. 
“ I’ll add anything you may leave out.” 

“ Well, it’s this way,” said Petromelinski. “ It is 
true that Alaska is large, and that there is plenty of 
room in its five hundred and ninety thousand eight 
hundred and eighty-four square miles, in which Ma- 
shinsky, knowing that he is being followed, could hide. 
It might seem because this country is almost unsettled 
that it will be difficult to follow anyone. But I think 
you can see, on a little thought, that it is not possible 
for one readily to make his way across the country 
along any route. A man must follow tracks or paths 
where he can meet with others and so obtain food. 
Now, in this country these routes are comparatively 
few, so that when we have located our man, as we have 
now done, knowing the two places between which he 
is traveling, it ought not to be difficult to find him. Do 
I make myself plain?” he inquired. 

“ Thoroughly so,” was the reply. “ It’s fairly simple 
when you come to look at it in that way.” 

“ Especially,” added Blank, “ when it is remembered 
that Mashinsky, as far as we know, is a poor man, so 
that while traveling he must stop frequently at places 
116 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


where he may obtain work for the money he requires 
for his food and traveling expenses.” 

“ You may add to that, Blank,” said Petromelinski, 
“ that since Mashinsky is not an educated man, the 
only work he is capable of doing is rough manual 
labor, such as he would find at mines, sawmills, 
fisheries, canneries, or similar places. Of course,” he 
added, “ I am not considering his skill as a diamond- 
cutter, for such a thing would be practically worthless 
in Alaska.” 

“ Do you not think, sir,” said Happy, “ that this 
need Mashinsky has for money will help us in another 
way? The man is far from honest. His necessity 
for work, together with his unwillingness to remain 
at one place for any length of time, knowing that the 
great Petromelinski and Blank are after him, will lead 
him to change his place often, and this, of course, will 
necessitate the spending of money. I have been won¬ 
dering,” he added, “ whether it were not probable 
that Mashinsky would again steal, or do some other 
dishonest work among some of his fellow laborers, 
and thus aid us by setting other people after him.” 

“ I think it very likely,” said Blavinski. “ What is 
your opinion, gentlemen,” he said, turning to the 
detectives. 

“ The youngster is correct,” said Petromelinski. 
“ It is probable that what caused him suddenly to leave 
the Treadwell mines was something crooked he had 
done among the miners. What do you say to that, 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I think that certain,” was the reply. “ It is diffi¬ 
cult for a man like Mashinsky to understand thor¬ 
oughly the kind of men that form the majority of 
miners in a camp like Treadwell. From what I have 
read, Dawson is by no means a lawless place. Owing 
to its excellent police, the Mounted Police of the North¬ 
west, those who are dishonest are obliged to live de¬ 
cently, at least so far as appearances go.” 

“ What would happen,” inquired Blavinski, “ if 
Mashinsky defrauded some of these men? Would it 
be the men themselves or the Mounted Police who 
would mete out the punishment?” 

“ If Mashinsky defrauded the miners I pity him. 
The chances are that before the Mounted Police ar¬ 
rived to take charge of the case there would be very 
little left of the man if the miners discovered the 
fraud.” 

At this moment Mr. Justice joined the group, but 
seeing they were conversing, probably about something 
private, was moving on when Blavinski said: 

“ Do not go. We are talking about a matter con¬ 
cerning which you can probably give us information.” 

“What is it?” inquired Mr. Justice. 

“ Whether we can rely on being treated fairly by the 
storekeepers and others in Dawson.” 

“ I can give you some positive information concern¬ 
ing what I have seen in Dawson,” replied Mr. Justice, 
“ during the time when gold-dust was more frequently 
employed as a circulating medium than coined money 
or printed notes are at present. 

ii 8 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I am referring,” he continued, “ to a man who 
made a purchase in a Dawson store. When he came 
to pay, he pulled a leather bag out of his pocket, con¬ 
taining a lot of gold-dust, and handed it to the store¬ 
keeper. He had been engaged in conversation with me 
at the time, and went on talking, but did not seem anx¬ 
ious to know what was being done with his gold-dust. 
After a while the storekeeper handed the leather bag 
back to him, together with the articles he had pur¬ 
chased. It was evident that the clerk had helped 
himself; that is, had weighed out an amount of gold- 
dust sufficient to settle the bill and had left the rest in 
the bag. 

“ As the man,” he continued, “ replaced the bag in 
his pocket without weighing it, and went with me out 
the door, I inquired whether he was safe in relying so 
much on the honesty of the storekeeper, and whether 
this was a usual thing in Dawson. 

“ ‘ The storekeeper knows full well/ said the pur¬ 
chaser, ‘ that he could not afford to cheat me. We 
probably trust one another here far more than you do 
in the United States. We were obliged to do so in the 
early days,’ he continued, 4 and woe to the man who 
betrayed any trust or acted dishonestly. You may lay 
it down as a rule that in a mining-camp there is scarcely 
anything that is so utterly unpardonable as a deal that 
is not square/ ” 

Fearing his new acquaintances might wish to talk 
privately together, Mr. Justice excused himself and 
went to another part of the boat. 

119 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“We have only been talking about one of the parties 
we are following/’ said Petromelinski. “ You must 
not forget that there are two others that we hope to 
locate.” 

“ That’s true,” replied Blavinski; “ and what do you 
think our chances are for finding the other men, gen¬ 
tlemen? ” 

“ Finding them is an entirely different thing,” re¬ 
plied Petromelinski. “ I think we are practically cer¬ 
tain of finding them. What do you say to that, 
Blank?” 

“ I believe we shall certainly find them,” was the 
reply. “ It is very different finding men who are not 
trying to run away from you, but are simply attending 
to their business in a businesslike way. We know they 
have been in this part of Alaska. It has been rumored 
they have succeeded in finding good prospects some¬ 
where in the Nome district, more likely a placer de¬ 
posit. We also have reason to think they have re¬ 
cently located a prospect, or prospects, of a lode prop¬ 
erty where they would have occasion to crush the 
quartz in stamp-mills. At least, I understood that to 
be the reason for which Bill’s friend thought the two 
men had visited the Treadwell mines.” 

“ Do you not think, sir,” inquired Happy, “ that the 
men would take out claims for the free-milling gold 
quartz prospect shortly after they had located them? 
There can be no doubt about that, can there ? ” 

“ Why, of course they would take out claims,” 
replied Dimitri. “ What’s the matter with you, 
120 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

my lad? That’s not the kind of questions you gener¬ 
ally ask.” 

Whether it was or not, Happy appeared to believe 
that he had thought of something in connection with 
the finding of his Uncle Harry and Dimitri’s son 
which he regarded as a wonderful piece of luck, for 
the succession of smiles his friends had learned to 
recognize came over his expressive face. 

Without replying to Professor Dimitri’s remark, 
Happy continued, saying: “ And I imagine that if the 
gold-quartz claims are at all valuable, they have been 
regularly entered long ago.” 

“ Most certainly,” was the reply of Blavinski. 

“ Look here, my lad,” said Dimitri, “ tell us what 
you have up your sleeve. I know by your face you have 
thought of something that pleases you. Now, what 
good luck can you possibly connect with the fact that 
the men we are following have discovered properties 
that are probably well protected by claims ? ” 

“ I need not ask you whether these claims would be 
made out in the names of the men themselves,” replied 
Happy, still without replying to Dimitri’s question. 
“ I don't think there is much doubt about that, is 
there? ” 

“ Certainly not. Why should you have any doubt 
about it? ” inquired Dimitri. 

“ When you told us, professor,” said Happy, “ that 
your son would not be apt to enter himself as a work¬ 
man in the name of Nicholas Dimitri, and I also be¬ 
lieved my Uncle Harry would not enter his name as 
121 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Henry E. Clinton, I therefore thought their claims 
had not been entered under their real names. But 
when, as the man told Bill, these two men seemed to 
have been successful and have taken out claims on the 
gold-lode prospects, they would certainly enter them in 
their own names.” 

“ And then what ? ” inquired Blavinski excitedly. 

“ Why, then,” replied Happy, “ by sending word to 
the office or place, wherever it may be, where the claims 
are filed, of course we could at once discover their lo¬ 
cation and thus communicate with the men.” 

There was great excitement among the little group 
when the lad had thus explained the situation as it 
seemed to him. It was one of those things that appear 
to be self-evident when once thought out and yet had 
required no little time to be thought out. 

“ My lad,” said Petromelinski in an excited manner, 
“ that is a magnificent clue you have given us. What 
do you say to it, Blank? ” he inquired. “ Were we not 
right in doing all we could to persuade the youngster 
to go with us and help us ? ” 

“ Of course we, as well as Mr. Blavinski and Mr. 
Dimitri, were right in having the lad go with us. If 
claims have already been taken out on the prospects in 
the Nome district, where would they most probably 
have been entered? ” 

“ That I do not know,” replied Dimitri. “ Possibly 
in Nome itself, or it may be,” he added, “ in Juneau, 
the capital of the Territory.” 

“ I hardly think it probable,” said Blavinski, “ that 
122 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the government would require prospectors to travel 
so far as Juneau in order to enter claims on prospects 
that have been taken up in some remote part of the 
country; such, for example, as Nome, or for prospects 
that are nearer the shores of the Arctic Ocean.” 

“ It is more probable,” replied Dimitri, “ that claims 
can be filed in some office located in the nearest large 
town of the place.” 

“ It may be, however,” said Blavinski, “ that the 
government has copies somewhere of all the claims that 
have been entered in the Territory even including the 
time when it was part of the domains of Russia.” 

“ I do not know how that may be,” replied Petrome- 
linski, “ but I shall send telegrams to Nome, Juneau, 
and other large towns so as to find just where such 
claims would be entered if they have already been 
made.” 

“ Gentlemen,” said Dimitri, “ when you were pursu¬ 
ing Mashinsky in the neighborhood of the Colorado 
River, I remember that you felt justified in offering 
a reward of two thousand dollars for the taking of the 
man if alive, and one thousand dollars if dead. Does 
this reward hold good in Alaska ? ” 

“What do you say to that, Blank?” inquired Pe- 
tromelinski. “ Do you think we ought to make it 
good here? ” 

“ No; I do not,” was the reply. 

Blavinski and Dimitri were surprised, especially 
when, as they could see, the reply evidently pleased 
Petromelinski. 


123 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ How is this, gentlemen ? ” inquired Blavinski in 
surprise, of the two detectives. “ You certainly 
wish to capture the man as much as you ever did, do 
you not ? ” 

u We do,” was the reply. “You tell him, Blank, 
how we figure it out; I think I know why you gave me 
the answer you did.” 

“ It’s this way,” said Blank. “ When we offered 
that reward we were not so sure of taking the man. 
Now, however, as we have explained, we feel fairly 
sure of taking him, but we want to take him alive 
either to Russia or to the United States to be punished 
for his crimes. We have concluded, therefore, to offer 
a reward of two thousand dollars only in the event 
of the man being taken alive.” 

“ I don’t care how you put it,” said Blavinski, “ just 
so the reward is offered and the people of Alaska know 
how to get it.” 

It may be said that this was afterward made known 
at every place in the smaller camps they passed through 
by means of printed circulars, and that they also sent 
by telegraph an announcement to be posted in any 
prominent place in the larger towns. 

Without waiting for information concerning the 
places where claims would have been entered if made, 
the detectives sent inquiry by telegrams to the land 
offices in some of the larger cities with a request that 
replies be forwarded them by telegraph, and that not 
only the charges for sending the telegrams be collected, 
but also any reasonable charges for the clerical serv- 
124 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

ices that might be necessary for obtaining such infor- 
mation. 

Bill was especially proud of Happy’s suggestion for 
tracing Clinton and Dimitri by means of mining claims 
if entered by them. 

“ It makes Bill proud, Hap, to be the friend of so 
bright a lad.” 

“ Oh, that was nothing, Bill,” replied Happy, “ when 
one came to think over the matter.” 

“ But thet’s jest the thing, Hap,” replied Bill. “ It 
was something that all on ’em might hev thought over, 
only it happens that ye be the only feller wot did so.” 

In due time they reached Dawson, the capital of the 
Yukon Territory, in the center of the Klondike and 
neighboring mining districts. 

They had been fortunate in catching one of the 
White Pass and Yukon boats, a comfortably equipped 
steamship. 

The voyage, four hundred and fifty miles down the 
river, to Dawson, was through magnificent country. 
A portion of the route was through Lake Lebarge, past 
giant towers and bastionlike projections of red rock, 
with here and there strongly contrasting green foliage. 
From the lake the boat threaded its way through 
Thirty Mile River, which is probably the most crooked 
stream in the world. 

The summer, even in this high northern region, is 
warm and fruitful, and as the boat made frequent 
stops for fuel, the passengers availed themselves of the 

125 


* 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


opportunity for strolling along the river-banks and 
gathering roses, yellow poppies, and violets, also white 
strawberries, salmon berries, and blueberries. 

There were several rapids to be shot; the Five-finger 
Rapids being sufficiently dangerous to create some 
anxiety. Lieutenant Schwatka describes these in 1883 
as follows: 

“ These rapids are very picturesque as they rush 
between the fantastically formed trap rocks and high 
towers, two of which are united by a slender natural 
bridge of stone that spans a whirlpool, making the 
whole look like an old ruined stone bridge with but 
one arch that had withstood the general demolition. 
We essayed the extreme right-hand (eastern) passage 
although it was quite narrow and its boiling current 
was covered with waves running two and three feet 
high, but being the straightest was the best for our 
long craft (a raft forty-two feet long). Thousands of 
gulls had made the top of these isolated towers their 
breeding-places, for nothing but winged life could ever 
reach them, and here, safe from all intrusion, they 
reared their young. As we shot by on the raft, they 
rose in clouds and almost drowned the noise of the 
roaring waters with their shrill cries. This extreme 
right-hand channel, through which we shot, could, I 
believe, be ascended by a light-draft river steamer pro¬ 
vided with a steam windlass. A sharp bend in the 
river-bank just before it is entered will give a short 
and second hold for a cable rope.” 

T26 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Although Dawson is situated in a district so far to 
the north that during at least a part of the year the 
midnight sun can be seen, yet it was not a mining- 
camp, but a modern city with excellent hotels, churches, 
libraries, hospitals, banks, etc., with electric lights and 
water supply. Although it was early July, the days 
were very long. Among other attractions of the town 
were a baseball park and several theaters. 

“ If you were an office boy, Happy,” said Professor 
Dimitri in a jollying tone, “ you would be able to go to 
the baseball game without reporting your grandmother 
as seriously ill or dead, for here the game does not 
begin until eight o’clock at night. And if you wanted 
to go to the theater afterward, you would have plenty 
of time; for, as a rule, the theaters do not begin until 
about ten o’clock.” 


127 


CHAPTER X 


Central Alaska 

As is well known, Dawson owes its wonderfully rapid 
growth, from a small mining-camp to a large city, to 
the wonderful discoveries of gold made in the Klon¬ 
dike district, a region of about eight hundred square 
miles in the basins of the Klondike, the Indian, and 
the McQuestion rivers, tributaries of the Yukon. 

“ Shortly before the stampede in 1897, when a great 
rush was made for the Klondike district,” said Mr. 
Justice, “ Dawson was what might be called a poor 
man’s camp—that is, it was a place where it was pos¬ 
sible for the poorest man to get his share of the hidden 
wealth. But this is no longer true. The rich placers 
have been worked out, and while they are now being 
operated by large companies, yet such operations re¬ 
quire the expenditure of considerable sums of money.” 

“ Have you examined the hotel registers,” inquired 
Happy of the detectives, “ to see whether Messrs. Clin¬ 
ton and Dimitri by chance registered here? ” 

“ We’ve attended to that, my lad,” was the reply, 
“ and there is nothing in it.” 

“ Then,” said Happy with a smile, “ come with me, 
and I’ll show you something that I’m sure will interest 
you.” 


128 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Have you found anything? ” exclaimed Mr. Blank 
eagerly. 

“ Come and see,” was the reply. “ It’s only around 
the corner.” 

It appears that Happy had already searched the 
register at the hotel at which they were stopping, think¬ 
ing that possibly his uncle and companion, who, it was 
believed had been in Dawson, might have stopped 
there; or, if not there, then at some other hotel, and 
had quietly made the rounds of the city, examining 
with care the registers of all its hotels. 

“ Here,” said Happy, leading the detectives into a 
hotel, “ you will find that both men have registered.” 

“ This is splendid, my lad,” replied Petromelinski, 
who at once, aided by Blank, began cross-questioning 
the hotel clerk. 

“ We have come all the way from Colorado to find 
these people. We are their friends, and know that 
they have passed this way. We will be greatly obliged 
if you will give us information as to their general ap¬ 
pearance and the direction they took from this place.” 

As soon as the clerk had satisfied himself that they 
had good reasons for their inquiries, he said: 

“ I remember hearing them discuss whether they 
would make any stay in Fairbanks, for which place 
they started, or whether they should go on directly to 
another place. As far as I could judge, they appeared 
to have struck rich gold quartz somewhere farther 
south. They did not, however, mention where the 
place was.” 


i 


129 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

They posted reward papers in the hotel and other 
prominent places at Dawson where they would prob¬ 
ably be seen. 

“ I see you have news for us, Ivan,” said Blank, at 
a somewhat later hour the same day. “ Does this news 
relate to Mashinsky ? ” 

“ Yes; I have had a long conversation with some of 
our friends, the Mounted Police of the Northwest, 
who, as you know, have already given us much aid and 
have great authority in this city. The maintenance of 
order here, and in the neighboring camps, has been left 
in their hands. I am sure you have already had oppor¬ 
tunity for seeing that for a large city like Dawson, 
whose inhabitants have been taken almost entirely from 
prospectors, miners, and other characters, from almost 
all parts of the world, its law and order are capable of 
putting to shame that of most of the large cities in the 
parts of the country from which we come.” 

“ But tell me what you heard about Mashinsky, Ivan. 
I don’t care so much about the Mounted Police, since 
by the way I figure it they will not be much use to us 
as soon as we cross the boundary into the territory of 
the United States.” 

“ While they may not be of so much use as now,” 
was the reply, “ yet they can still keep us posted about 
anything they hear in Dawson or in other parts of their 
territory. 

“ But,” he continued, “ answering your question 
about Mashinsky, the man is evidently very hard up. 

130 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


I hear that he has again been detected stealing in a 
mining-camp, and has fled for his life in a small boat 
down the Yukon.” 

“ I hope they don’t catch him,” replied Blank, “ for 
if they do we shall not be able to hand him alive to the 
United States or Russian authorities.” 

As they crossed the boundary-line between the Do¬ 
minion of Canada and the United States, near Eagle, 
while on their way from Dawson to Fairbanks, Bla- 
vinski remarked, “ We are now in central Alaska.” 

Fairbanks is by far the greatest gold-mining camp in 
Alaska. Its gold placers produce more gold than those 
of any other part of the Territory. 

The Fairbanks mining district is situated in the 
valley of the Tanana, one of the tributaries of the 
Yukon. I am sure it will interest my readers to know 
something about the life of the prospector who first 
discovered gold deposits in this part of Alaska. Some 
gold had been found here by a prospector named Pedro 
Felix, a man of considerable ability, who made the dis¬ 
covery that gave to the district its great repute. Felix 
had been looking for gold for four summers among 
the hills and along the creeks of the Forty Mile Creek 
and Circle City district and neighborhood. 

It was some time in July, 1902, that Pedro found 
what he had been long looking for. Knowing that he 
was carefully watched by others, who planned, as is 
often the case, to take advantage of his industry and 

131 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ability, so as to make a rush for any place in which 
he should begin to stake out claims, Felix carefully 
avoided observation by going to work both before and 
after daylight, cutting his way through the frozen 
ground without fires, since he knew the smoke would 
betray his position, and carrying the excavated matter 
up a ladder in a sack. In this way he succeeded in 
locating the claims that afterward made him exceed¬ 
ingly rich. 

When the detectives had satisfied themselves as to 
the reliability of the information that Mashinsky had 
fled down the Yukon in a small boat, they determined 
to follow him. 

“ Gentlemen, I suggest that we leave Fairbanks,” 
said Blank; “ supply ourselves with proper tents and 
equipment, obtain a guide, and follow this fellow 
down the Yukon in a boat.” 

This was done, but without success, at least so far as 
the capture of the fleeing Russian was concerned. 

There was plenty to see in the small boat when ma¬ 
king its way down this great river. The river, to a 
great extent, was solitary. In many places the stream 
is tortuous and rapid. During the summer its banks 
are covered with luxuriant vegetation, and its meadows 
are rendered beautiful by various highly colored 
flowers. 

In one place their boat had been caught on a sand-bar 
when they had gone too near the shore. While Awake- 
in-the-Night, Scipio, and others were endeavoring to 
x 3 2 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


push it off the bar, Happy jumped ashore, taking with 
him his heavy magazine rifle. 

“ Whar be ye goin’, Hap? ” asked Bill. 

“ I thought while you were here I’d go and see if I 
could get something in the way of fresh meat,” was the 
reply. “ Will you come along, Bill? ” 

“ Sure,” said Bill. 

“ How long can we be away from the boat without 
delaying you? ” inquired Happy of the gentlemen. 

“ Don’t stay any longer than half an hour,” replied 
the detectives. 

“ Then,” said Happy to Bill, “ we might as well 
leave our heavy rifles and take a gold-pan, and see if 
we can strike “ pay-dirt ” here. By the way, Scipio,” 
he added as they were leaving, “ as I am not going for 
fresh meat, if you get time throw your fishing-line in 
here. You ought to be able to catch a red salmon or 
two.” 

The samples of gravel or sand that Happy and Bill 
found showed fair gold values on panning, but they 
were not out prospecting, except in a general way, and 
did not consider it at all advisable to attempt laying out 
any placer claims in the neighborhood, since, as Bill 
said: 

“ I reckon, Hap, this here place hez been gone over 
agin and agin by other fellows wot hev been here 
afore us.” 

It was during their visit to one of the islands be¬ 
tween the river channels, while they were panning out 
133 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

some gravel, that they unconsciously came almost in 
actual touch with the hiding Mashinsky, but what they 
said and what happened will be told in a subsequent 
chapter. 

On their return they found Scipio greatly excited in 
having caught a couple of splendid red salmon. 

“ I declar, Marse Hap,” he said, “ Scipio is free to 
confess dat he hab neber before seed such splendid fish. 
And ez to their being fresh, he added facetiously, “ go 
way, chile, dey just come out ob de watah. I took ’em 
out mahself.” 

It was to Scipio a matter of no little importance just 
how the salmon should be prepared for supper. Happy 
and the others were amused at hearing him argue with 
himself whether they had better be boiled, broiled, or 
baked. Finally, he came to the following conclusion: 

“ Dis hyah fish be especially fine. If I boil or broil 
dem ebery one will say, ‘ Scipio, you am sartinly a 
great cook.’ But if I bake dem, den none ob dem will 
say anyt’ing, ’cause dey’ll be so busy eatin’.” 

No one knew exactly how Scipio baked the fish, ex¬ 
cept that it was done in some way in a stone oven. As 
to this, however, they were unanimous: Never before 
had Scipio so excelled himself as in the case of the 
memorable baked red salmon he had taken that day 
from the Yukon. 

Being unsuccessful in catching Mashinsky, it was 
determined to go with their camping equipment and a 
guide to visit the camps that surrounded the Fairbanks 
134 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


district, especially toward the south. This they did, 
being careful as each camp was passed through to dis¬ 
tribute the circulars offering the two thousand dollars’ 
cash reward for the capture of the criminal Mashinsky, 
if alive. 

Besides aiding the general work, Awake-in-the- 
Night took especial interest in the distribution of the 
circulars. Although greatly handicapped by his limited 
knowledge of English, yet he was bright enough to aid 
them considerably in their pursuit of the criminal. The 
detectives had a large number of reward circulars 
struck off, and gave Awake-in-the-Night some of them. 
The Indian would go through the camps, and whenever 
he could get the opportunity of gaining the ear of some 
of the miners, he would say: 

“You read English? Then you find heap worth 
readin’ here,” handing the circulars around. 

It so happened that one day they came into a large 
camp on the Fourth of July. The miners had evidently 
given themselves up to having a “ good old time.” 
Although it was too early in the day to be drunk, yet 
some of them had succeeded in getting dangerously 
near the condition in which a man’s feelings are apt to 
get ahead of his common sense. 

A crowd had assembled at one of the outskirts of 
the camp, where they evidently had been shooting at a 
target and other objects set up against a few rough up¬ 
right posts. 

One of their number, who had nearly passed the 
135 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

danger limit in drinking, as might have been diagnosed 
from his condition, as well as from the nearly empty 
whisky flask that could be seen partly protruding from 
one of his pockets, had evidently shot somewhat better 
than the rest of them. He was jollying his companions 
on their shooting. 

“ Now don’t get scared, gents,” he said; “ I know ye 
kain’t begin to tech me in shootin’, but try it agin. I’ll 
give ye odds enough to bring ye more nearly ekal to 
me.” 

“ Shut yer potato-trap, Jim! ” cried his companion. 
“ We acknowledge ye be a good shot, but then even 
with the best of yer shootin’ ye beant much. We 
wouldn’t wonder, any time, ef a feller’d come inter the 
camp thet could take ye down several pegs.” 

“ All I have to say,” said Jim, with semidrunken 
gravity, “ bring the feller along and I’ll shoot agin 
him fer anything ye may put up.” 

It was at this moment that Happy, Bill, Blavinski, 
and Dimitri approached the group. 

It will be remembered that Happy was young look¬ 
ing for his age, and always carried his rifle slung over 
his shoulder and his pistol in his belt. When Jim saw 
them approach, believing he had a chance for some fun, 
he said to Happy, pointing to his pistol and rifle: 

“ Sonny, kin ye shoot them things ? ” 

“ Sure,” said Happy, with a pleasant smile. 

“ I didn’t quite mean that,” said the man. “ I meant 
kin ye hit anything ye aim at. I don’t kere how big 
it be.” 


136 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Put something up,” said Happy, “ and I’ll see what 
I can do as to hitting it.” 

“ There ye be, Jim,” said his companions with a 
derisive shout. “ Here’s come a little chap to the camp 
that perhaps kin beat ye shootin’.” 

And then one of them, turning to Bill, said in a low 
tone: 

“ Give it ter me squar, stranger, kin the youngster 
shoot? This feller Jim hez a swelled head, and we’d 
all be tarnation glad ef the youngster kin take a fall 
out of him.” 

“ Gents,” remarked Bill, “ I’ll tell ye true. I kin 
shoot purty well myself, and a’most all my life hev 
been with men who be good shooters, but never hev I 
seed a feller so quick and true on the trigger as this 
little chap.” 

There was a shout of delight when Jim’s companions 
heard Bill’s opinion. They put their heads together, 
and after a few moments’ conversation were ready for 
Jim. 

“ What be ye fellers a chinning about? ” said Jim. 
“ This youngster hez sed thet ef I put up somethin’ fer 
him ter shoot at, he’ll let me see whether he kin shoot 
er not. Now I’ll shoot agin him, and ef I don’t hit the 
mark five times oftener than he. I’ll acknowledge I’m 
beaten.” 

“ We’ll back up the little feller,” said Jim’s com¬ 
panions. “ How much money will ye put up agin us ? ” 

“ I beant very flush now. Suppose ye make it a hun¬ 
dred dollars.” 


137 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

In a short time seventy-five dollars was raised. 

“ I’ll put up the rest of the money,” said Bill, pro¬ 
ducing the cash. 

“What shell the mark be, youngster?” said Jim. 
“ Do ye think ye could hit any part of these posts 
twenty feet off ? ” 

“ Put some small object on the board and make the 
distance fifty feet.” 

The men shouted with delight when they heard 
Happy’s reply. 

“Don’t take too great risks, sonny,” said Jim; “ I 
be a great shot. How would this do ? ” he said, taking 
a nugget from one of his pockets, probably weighing 
half an ounce, or being in the gold of that district, 
worth perhaps from eight and a half to nine dollars. 
“ Kin ye see thet? ” he said, as he supported it on the 
board. 

“ Sure,” said Happy. 

Seeing the mark that had been placed for the 
youngster, some ten of the other men put additional 
marks consisting of gold nuggets around the one that 
Jim had placed there, saying: 

“ We’ll give the youngster some inducements fer 
winning; ef he wins, we’ll give him half of Jim’s pot, 
while ef Jim wins, he rakes it all in.” 

“ How do you want me to hit these marks ? ” asked 
Happy. “ Shall I hit them on the edge or fair in the 
middle ? ” 

“ Ef ye kin hit ’em at all it’ll be more than I expect,” 
replied Jim. 

138 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Plug ’em fair through the center, sonny,” said the 
other men. 

“And in what order shall I hit them?” inquired 
Happy. 

“ Begin at those farthest from the ground and go 
regularly down,” was the reply. 

There was great surprise when, these preliminaries 
having been settled, Happy took his place at fifty feet 
from the targets and, apparently without taking any 
careful aim, rapidly discharged the six shots from his 
revolver. Every ball struck, and, as far as could be 
seen, fairly in the middle of the nuggets. 

“ While Pm loading,” said Happy, “ some of you 
may care to see whether the targets struck have been 
struck fairly in the middle or not.” 

It could be seen from a distance that they had been 
hit in the order agreed upon, from the top downward. 
A shout of triumph arose when it was found that the 
nuggets had all been “ plugged squar through the cen¬ 
ter,” as expressed by the miners. When, having re¬ 
loaded his pistol, Happy struck all the other targets in 
the same way, the men rushed to the boy, raised him to 
their shoulders, and danced around Jim. 

“ Wall, Jim,” they said, “ kin ye do better’n thet, or 
do ye acknowledge yerself licked? ” 

“ I take off my hat to the youngster,” was the reply. 
“ I kin shoot better’n you fellers, but I kain’t equal this 
chap.” 

There is naturally an attachment between most men 

139 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


and bright boys, provided the boys are not forward, 
proud, or conceited. Notwithstanding his wonderful 
success, Happy had not, so far as they could see, ap¬ 
peared at all surprised or exultant when none of his 
shots missed. He appeared to take it as a matter of 
course, as something he had been so long in the habit 
of doing that it had long ago ceased to possess any 
astonishment for him. 

“ Whar did ye larn to shoot so straight, sonny? ” 

“ On a ranch in Texas,” was the reply. “ This man 
here,” he said, turning to Colorado Bill, “ taught me.” 

“ Then ye kin shoot some also,” they said to Bill. 

“ Wall,” was the reply, “ I reckon I be a purty good 
shot, but I kain’t tech the youngster either wid the gun, 
on a horse, or with a rope.” 

“ Here, sonny,” said one of the men, who had been 
picking up the gold marks, “ these be yourn.” 

Happy was at first disposed to refuse the nuggets, 
but the men said, “ Don’t hesitate to pocket them, 
sonny, they be yourn fairly.” 

“ We hev arranged fer an entertainment in this here 
camp to-day arter dinner. Will ye bring the youngster 
then and let him show us some of the things he kin do ? 
Thar will be a big crowd from some of the neighboring 
camps.” 

, “ We’ll come,” said Bill, after a short conference 
with his companion. 


140 


CHAPTER XI 


The Entertainment at a Fairbanks Mining-camp 

“ It's a full hour before dinner, Bill, and I’m hungry,” 
said Happy as they returned from the miners’ camp, 
where Happy had pleased the men by his wonder¬ 
ful shooting, and especially by taking the conceit 
out of the man who claimed to be the best shot in 
the camp. 

“ I reckon ye be always hungry, Hap,” said Bill. 
“ But I be glad ye be so. A feller who kain’t eat beant 
worth much.” 

When they approached what Scipio called the 
“ kitchen,” it was evidently not an ordinary dinner that 
was being prepared. Not only was Awake-in-the- 
Night helping him, but so also was one of the camp 
followers. 

“ I was going to ask you, Scipio, if you knew what 
day this is ? But I need not do that,” said Happy, as he 
and Bill approached, “ for I see you are getting a great 
dinner ready.” 

“ Oh, jess go away, Marse Hap, and quit foolin’ dis 
chile,” said Scipio laughing, for he liked to have Happy 
visit him no matter how busy he might be. “ Of course 
I knows dat dis day be de Fourth ob July, and I’s cook¬ 
ing accordin’. Jess let your eyes roam over what you 
kin see, and tell Scipio, don’t it look pretty and smell 
141 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

nice? Does ye happen to hev a big appetite, Marse 
Hap? ” 

“ Before I answer your question, Scipio, tell me how 
long I’ll have to wait for dinner? ” said Happy. 

“ Scipio will blow de bugle to say, ‘ come and eat ’ 
in jess one hour from now, moh o’ less,” replied the 
Negro, grinning. 

“ An hour more or less! ” cried Happy in pretended 
horror. “ Why, Scipio, I’m nearly starving now! 
Just look at me! Don’t you see how pale and 
thin I am ? ” 

“ Now you jess go away, Marse Hap,” replied 
Scipio. “ Do you think dis chile will let you go hungry 
dat long? No, indeedy! Scipio tinks too much of 
you. Try one of dese sweet biscuits. Dey hez been 
baked to get out of de way; den inspec’ dis plate of 
soup, and ’spress you’re opinion on it.” 

“ Come, Bill,” said Happy, “ and help me inspect 
what Scipio has cooked.” 

While enjoying the things immensely, Bill said: 
“ Don’t forget, Hap, we’ve promised them fellers at 
the camp to come to their show this arternoon. Ef 
Scipio be wery late with his dinner we kain’t wait fer 
it. Them fellers will feel hurt ef we don’t show up. 
What do you say, Hap, to taking what we kin get now 
and cutting the rest of the dinner?” 

“ What do you say to that, Scipio? ” inquired 
Happy, not by any means intending to give up the 
splendid dinner he saw being prepared, but rather to 
hear what Scipio would say. 

142 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I declar, Marse Hap,” was the reply, “ ye’ll break 
poor Scipio’s heart ef ye don’t stop and enjoy de won¬ 
derful things wot I’m preparing fer ye and the other 
gents.” 

Seeing that the man was actually distressed at his 
threatened absence, Happy said: “ I’m only fooling, 
Scipio. Do you think I’d give up the dinner I see 
you are preparing for any entertainment? Not if I 
know it.” 

“ Scipio’s mighty glad to hear ye say that, Marse 
Hap. He’s sartin ye’ll not be sorry.” 

That Fourth of July dinner was a great credit to 
Scipio, not only in variety and quality, but especially in 
excellence of cooking. While the service was neces¬ 
sarily poor, this defect was more than atoned for by 
many other merits. 

“ Scipio,” said Happy, at the end of the dinner, 
“ you have done yourself proud. If the chef of the 
Spokane could have tasted some of these dishes he 
might be disposed to come and try to steal you away 
and keep you shut up until you told him all your 
secrets.” 

“ Oh, stop yoh foolin’, Marse Hap!” cried Scipio, 
who was, nevertheless, greatly pleased at Happy’s 
opinion of his cooking. 

It was not surprising they all sat around the camp 
for a full hour afterward, chatting and actually for¬ 
getting their promise to visit the entertainment. 

“ I say, Bill,” remarked Happy with a smile; “ it’s 
143 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

too bad we’ve forgotten our engagement. Let’s go at 
once.” 

“ Thet’s so, Hap,” replied Bill. “ We must ax the 
gents’ pardons. Bring your guns and your rope 
with you. You kin reckon they’ll want you to do some 
more shootin’.” 

As Happy went to get the things Bill referred to, 
Blavinski inquired: “ Where are you and Happy 
going, Bill ? ” 

When Bill explained what had happened, Blavinski 
said to his companions: “ Let’s all go, gentlemen. 
There will be lots* of fun. You will go, won’t you, 
Nicola?” 

“ Certainly,” was the reply. 

“ And you too,” he said to the detectives. 

“ Let’s go, Petromelinski,” said Blank. “ There 
will be men from neighboring camps. We may pick 
up some valuable information about the men we’re 
looking for.” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night will come too,” said the In¬ 
dian. “ Give him heap papers about black-haired ras¬ 
cal and two-thousand-dollar reward.” 

As they were about leaving, a delegation of four 
men from the camp that was to have the entertain¬ 
ment came, asking for Bill and Happy, or as they 
called the latter the “ Gun Kid.” 

“ Ye’ll excuse us, gents,” said one of the men, “but 
the men at our camp hev asked us to call on ye and 
say they hope the gent and the kid what visited them 
144 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


this morning will come this arternoon ez promised. 
Our men will be a heap disappinted ef ye do not 
come.” 

“ We war just a startin’ for the show,” said Bill. 
“ Ef ye do not object, these gents will come with us.” 

“ Glad to hev all of ye come,” was the reply. “ But 
whar’s the kid ? ” 

“ Here he comes,” said Bill. 

“ Glad to see ye, sonny,” said the man who had done 
all the talking. “ We’ll show you lots of fun at our 
camp.” 

There were several hundred men from other camps 
who had come to see the entertainment, many of them 
had been attracted by what they had heard about the 
skill of the Gun Kid. 

There are few things that appeal more strongly to 
miners, prospectors, or Western men generally, than 
the ability to “ shoot sure and quick.” The fact that 
this was possessed by what was called a “ kid ” in¬ 
creased rather than diminished the interest. It is not 
surprising, therefore, that when our party reached the 
entertainment the miners who had already met Bill 
and Happy crowded around and gave them a hearty 
welcome. 

“ It war gettin’ so late thet we feared ye hed clean 
forgot us,” said one of them; “ so we sent a few of 
our fellers to tell ye. Our people promised the fellers 
in the other camps that we’d show them some gun 
wonders by a little kid. Ez ye kin see, they hev come 
k 145 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

and war beginnin’ to roast us fer false pretense. But 
it’s all right now, ye hev come and we be much 
obleged.” 

“ So this is the kid, is it? ” inquired one of the men 
from another camp, who was riding a beautiful, but 
apparently only partly broken horse. “ I say, sonny, 
kin ye ride and use a rope ? ” 

“ Sure,” said Happy, smiling. 

“ Would ye fear to ride my mount?” inquired the 
man. “ He be very fierce, and might give ye a bad 
fall.” 

“ I’ll risk it,” replied Happy, “ but not until after we 
shoot at whatever marks you intend setting up. Rid¬ 
ing a bronco is bad preparation for close shooting.” 

“ The kid hez ye that time,” said one of his com¬ 
panions. 

“ I’m not denying ye’re right, sonny,” said Steve. 

“ Now, let’s see some shooting at a mark,” cried 
some of the visitors. “ There be fellers here from five 
different camps, and each camp hez brought its best 
shooters to represent it. Ye fellers what be givin’ this 
entertainment kin choose who ye like.” 

“ Shall we choose the kid to represent us ? ” in¬ 
quired the man who had the entertainment in charge. 

“Yes; we choose the kid,” came from all the men. 
“ Don’t ye say so, Jim? ” 

“ Sartinly,” replied Jim. “ I kain’t shoot against the 
youngster.” 

“ We’ll begin with straight shooting first,” was the 
146 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


conclusion reached by a committee appointed for the 
purpose. “ Arterwards ye kin make it as fancy as ye 
wish.” 

An ordinary bull’s-eye target, with the usual black 
center and circle, was set up at a distance of one 
hundred yards. 

“ Now, kid, ye kin choose. Will ye shoot first or 
arter the others ? ” 

“ I’ll follow the others,” replied Happy. 

The five men representing the visiting camps were 
by no means poor shots; none of them missed the tar¬ 
get, and two hit the bull’s-eye, although not exactly in 
the center. Each man had six shots and, in order to 
avoid discussion, the targets were replaced by new 
targets at the end of each trial. 

“ Should I put all my balls through the bull’s-eye,” 
said Happy, “ there would be no way of determining 
whether the other five have not all missed the target. 
What do you say to my putting the first ball right 
through the bull’s-eye, and the others at equal distances 
on the inner edge of the first circle ? ” 

There was a derisive shout at Happy’s question. 

“ The youngster is not slow at bluff,” cried out 
some of the men. “ Come anywhere inside the circle 
and ye’ll be doing well,” they cried. 

But the men who had seen the shooting in the morn¬ 
ing said: “ Let the lad shoot as he asks. Ef he can’t 
hit the bull’s-eye, why then ye have the laugh on him.” 

As we have before seen, it was a peculiarity of 
Happy’s shooting, as we believe it is with all good 
147 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


revolver shots, that sight was obtained almost im¬ 
mediately on the distant object. The men were there¬ 
fore surprised and pleased when, without apparently 
taking any precise aim, Happy emptied all six cham¬ 
bers of his gun almost immediately one after the other. 

They could see that none of the shots had miscar¬ 
ried, but could not locate them with any certainty. 
Therefore a rush was made for the target. When they 
found the bull’s-eye pierced exactly in the center, and 
the other shots equidistant from one another on the 
inner edge of the first circle, there was a loud cheer 
from all, including the competitors, while they made a 
rush for Happy and began shaking his hand. 

“ Thanks, gents,” said Bill. “ Ye’d better save that 
until the end, or the youngster’s fingers may be cramped 
and he can’t use them at his best.” 

“ That’s true,” cried the men. “ Fair play, gents. 
But the lad is a dandy shot, all right! Kin he do better, 
Bill ? ” they inquired, for they had already caught his 
name. 

“ What ye hev seed, gents,” replied Bill, “ is nothing 
to what the lad kin do.” 

When the men representing the five camps saw that 
they were so clearly outranked they wished to retire, 
but the spectators would not listen to such a proposi¬ 
tion. 

“ Don’t play baby! ” they cried. “ Of course we kin 
see ye be no match fer the kid, but fight it out like 
grown-ups.” 


148 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


We will not take the time to describe the contest in 
what was called “ straight ” or “ plain ” shooting. It 
is sufficient to say that in all these contests Happy came 
out so far ahead that no one questioned his superiority. 

“ Now fer some fancy shooting,” said the spectators. 
“ Perhaps we kin beat the kid in the fancy line.” 

“ Here’s three to one on the kid that you kain’t! ” 
exclaimed one of the men. 

“ And here’s five to one on the kid! ” exclaimed 
another. 

Among some of the fancy stunts, a quart tomato 
can was thrown up in the air and hit by six shots as 
it was rising in the air. This was regarded by most as 
great shooting, so that the camp whose man had made 
the shot began hurrahing. 

“ Let’s see the kid beat that! ” they cried. 

Happy said something to Bill in a low tone that only 
a few of the men heard. 

Bill smiled and nodded his head, indicating yes. 

“ What does the kid wish ? ” they asked Bill. 

“ He asks for a smaller thing to shoot at,” replied 
Bill. 

A loud laugh from the few who heard what he 
actually said showed the rest that Bill’s translation of 
Happy’s remark was too free. 

“ Tell us what he acterally said,” they said. 

“ The youngster said he did not want to aim at the 
side of a barn; to give him a harder shot.” 

There was a loud guffaw from all. 

149 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ What will ye use, Bill ? ” they inquired. 

a How will this suit ye?” said Bill, holding up a 
small potato. 

“ It’s too small,” cried the men. “ Give the lad a 
fair show.” 

“ Do ye want to shoot at so small a mark ? ” inquired 
one of the men. 

“ I’ll do my best to hit it,” was the reply. 

There was much excitement when Bill threw the 
potato up in the air, and Happy emptied the six car¬ 
tridges of his revolver at the rapidly moving target. 
When all were found to have hit the mark there was 
again a shout from the excited crowd. 

It was so evident that the lad was the best' shot, all 
agreed to give the decision in his favor. 

“ Bill,” asked one of the men, “ get the lad to show 
us some other fancy shooting. He kin do more than 
we’ve seed, kain’t he? ” 

“ He kin fer a fact. I’ll ask him,” said Bill. 

There are a number of feats that a good, quick shot 
can do with a revolver. Happy showed this to the de¬ 
light of all the camp. Of these we will mention only a 
few. 

Handing Bill two of the nuggets he had plugged 
that morning, Happy asked him to throw them up in 
the air, and succeeded in hitting them both while fall¬ 
ing. Although this feat was one of the same char¬ 
acter as the potato-target, yet it was much harder, 
150 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


owing to the smaller size of the targets, and there 
being two of them. Consequently, when Happy suc¬ 
ceeded in striking both targets by firing two shots 
only, there was again shouting by all. 

Before trying the next thing, Happy said to Bill: 
“ Tell the men I cannot promise to succeed in what I 
am about to try.” 

“ Gents,” said Bill, “ the lad asks me to say that he 
don’t promise to succeed in his next shot. It be to 
show that a small mark kin be hit in the center ef it be 
fired right.” 

Bill then drove three small tacks partly into the 
posts, and said: “ Ef the balls hit the tacks fair in the 
center, they will drive them into the wood. Ef they 
hit out of the center, the tacks will fly off.” 

Going fifty feet from the target, Happy fired three 
shots and drove all three tacks into the posts. 

When the shooting was over, all the men crowded 
around the lad, shaking him by the hand and jollying 
with him. 

“ Ye be a great shot, kid,” said some of them. 

“ That’s because I had so good a teacher,” said 
Happy, pointing to Bill. “ There’s the man who taught 
me how to shoot.” 

“ Show us some of your shooting, Bill,” said some 
of them. 

“ Not arter the shooting what ye hev seed,” said 
Bill. “ I couldn’t begin to think of doin’ it. I don’t 
pretend to beat my pupil.” 

I5i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


‘‘How about mounting my horse, kid?” said the 
man Steve, referred to in the beginning of this chapter. 
“ But afore ye do, remember I telled ye it be a risk.” 

“ How long hev ye been riding thet mount ? ” in¬ 
quired Bill. 

“ For the last three weeks,” was the reply. 

“ Then,” said Bill to Happy, “ I reckon ye kin take 
the risk, Hap, kaiirt ye? ” 

“ Sure, Bill,” said Happy, grinning. 

Happy mounted the horse without any hesitation, 
and seizing the reins spoke kindly to the animal, pat¬ 
ting it on the neck, and then drove it a short distance 
in a circular path. But soon the horse began to kick 
and rear, and endeavor by various dangerous move¬ 
ments to unseat its rider. But it was all in vain; the 
lad stuck to the animal as if he were a part of it. 

Finally the struggle was over. The horse had met 
its master and knew it. Again speaking kindly to the 
animal, the lad put it through a number of gaits to the 
satisfaction of all. 

There were great doings in the camp for the rest of 
the afternoon. In the evening there were fireworks. 
Happy gave an exhibition of shooting at the balls of 
colored fire from the roman candles. This to a great 
shot was by no means so difficult as hitting the potato 
and the falling nugget. 

Awake-in-the-Night distributed the reward circu¬ 
lars respecting Mashinsky. As far as he could see he 
152 



“ The lad stuck to the animal ” 


Page 152 









































































































































































































































































































































The Land of Ice and Snow 


had no success. The possible reason was, as one of the 
men said to Blank: 

“ Ef ye want to ketch the feller, ye’d better go to 
some camp whar the men be down on their luck. Here 
we’re striking it so rich, we kin make a bigger pile by 
taking it out of the ground than by running arter a 
man. Of course, should the feller show up, we’ll be 
glad to run him in and collect the reward.” 

But the lack of success was only apparent. As we 
shall see, a trace of the thief and murderer was picked 
up during the entertainment that, though slight and 
leading them a chase to many parts of the country, in 
the end was crowned with success. 


153 


CHAPTER XII 


Further Adventures of Henry Clinton and 
Nicholas Dimitri 

i 

But let us go back to the events related in the first 
chapter, when Henry E. Clinton and Nicholas Dimi¬ 
tri accidentally became acquainted in the restaurant at 
Nome. The two men were detained in the city by the 
floating ice that acts as an effectual barrier to the ocean 
routes. As is well known, this isolation continues for 
seven months. The drift ice begins to form in No¬ 
vember, and does not disappear until late in May or 
early in June. During this time, however, communica¬ 
tion with the outside world can be had by means of 
submarine cables and overland telegraph lines, as well 
as by wireless telegraphy. 

For seven-twelfths of the year the inhabitants of 
Nome are practically shut in. Not but what they could 
reach distant parts of the country by sleds and stages, 
but such means require an excessive expenditure of 
physical energy. 

For example, the mails are continued through the 
year between Seattle and Nome, being carried during 
the winter by steamers between Seattle and Valdez, 
and by stages and dog-teams between Valdez and 
Nome, a distance of fourteen hundred miles, forty days 
being necessary for a single trip between the two cities. 
154 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


It must not, however, be thought that the people of 
Nome are completely shut in during the seven cold 
months of the year. Nome is very different now from 
what it was when it consisted of but a few log cabins, 
built of the drift-timber that was picked up on the 
coasts, for there are no trees for considerable distances 
from the town. The town grew rapidly when the rush 
of prospectors and miners began as a result of the dis¬ 
covery of-placer gold in the beach sands. In a few days 
it became largely a town of white tents. Now it has 
well-graded streets, electric lights, an excellent system 
of wonderfully pure water, good wagon-roads, and 
even a narrow-gauge railroad, connecting the city with 
the mines in the neighborhood. These improvements 
make visits to the neighboring towns easy. 

Nor are the people deprived of all social pleasures. 
There are in the city theatrical and literary societies, 
lecture courses, skee clubs, and to crown all, a yearly 
series of dog-races that, in this far-to-the-north city, 
correspond to the great English Derby. 

“ Will ye take in the Alaska sweepstake race with 
me, Nicholas? ” inquired Clinton. “ As ye know, it be 
the great event of this here town.” 

“ I shall certainly go with you to the races, Harry,” 
replied Dimitri. “ What is the course? ” 

“ It is between Nome and Candle City on the Arctic 
slope and return,” was the reply. 

“ That’s pretty far for a sled-race, Harry,” replied 
his companion. “ What is the distance? ” 

T 55 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ It be a good four hundred and twelve miles, count¬ 
ing thar and back agin,” was the reply. 

“ I don't believe in betting, Harry,” said Dimitri; 
“ but suppose we risk a small sum, just to give the race 
an additional interest? Have you any pointers as to 
the merits of the contestants? ” 

“ Thet’s jest the question, Nicholas,” remarked Clin¬ 
ton. “ Ez a rule, I don’t believe in pinters, at least 
those wot be given by others. But from what I hev 
seed myself, I'd advise that we plank down our dust 
on Scotty Allan. He drives a team of malamutes. I 
don’t believe any of the other teams kin beat Scotty’s.” 

“ Then,” said Dimitri, “ we’ll put a small stake on 
Scotty’s team.” 

“ Don’t ferget to take yer snow-glasses, Nicholas, 
and keep them on. Unless ye be more keerful, the fust 
thing ye’ll know ye’ll be down with snow blindness, and 
that’s something that be wery bad. It not only takes 
a feller off his feet while he hez it, but it be also a heap 
uv trouble arterwards, fer it be a thing a feller kin 
take easy agin when he has once had it.” 

“ All right, Harry,” said his companion. “ I know 
the dangers and will try to be sensible.” 

Situated as it is, so near the Arctic circle, Nome has 
a very short duration of sunlight during the winter 
months. While the daylight is almost continuous in 
June, the night is almost continuous in December. 
During the shortest day, the sun is only above the 
horizon for about three hours, and these three hours 

156 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


have the sunlight only from the far south. The sun 
rises and sets in the south, and is nearly devoid of the 
bright coronal rays. It presents the appearance of 
an enormous disk of burnished gold, with rays that 
have but little illuminating power, and still less heat. 

Clinton’s pointer concerning Scotty Allan’s dog- 
team proved to be correct. Scotty beat all competitors, 
and captured the sweepstake prize of five thousand 
dollars with, of course, his individual bets. His team 
completed the course in eighty-one hours and forty 
minutes. This was at a pace of more than a hundred 
miles a day, including all stops for food and resting. 

In the race over the same route in March, 1911, 
Scotty’s team again was the winner of a prize of ten 
thousand dollars. 

It is evident that in a country like Alaska, dogs are 
exceedingly valuable. Their greatest value is in winter 
for drawing sleds. In summer they are employed for 
carrying packs. Not only is their work of greater 
value in winter, but their physical strength is far 
greater after the snow begins to fly. 

It is the leader of the team that is most prized. This 
animal possesses^great, almost human intelligence; in¬ 
deed, in some respects its intelligence greatly exceeds 
that of many human beings. Often, when caught in 
blizzards, the drivers are saved by letting the animals 
take the sled wherever they wish. This almost invari¬ 
ably results in reaching a place of safety. 

157 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


The Eskimo’s dog has been provided by nature with 
a thick coat of fur that thoroughly protects it from the 
intense cold. His feet too are so hard that he can 
track even a great stretch of ice and snow without 
becoming footsore. “ Outside dogs,” as those from the 
States are called, cannot do this until they become used 
to the work, and will leave bloody foot-tracks even 
when making a short journey in the winter. 

Sometimes the Alaskan dog is bred by crossing it 
with a wolf, so as thus to insure toughness and in¬ 
creased vitality. An article in “ The Nome and Seward 
Peninsula,” from which the information concerning 
dogs has been taken, asserts that dogs thus bred do not 
manifest the same affection for their masters as do the 
dogs of pure breed; that it is only when hungry that 
they fawn on their masters and beg for their food by 
wagging their tails and barking; that when their 
hunger is satisfied, they appear quite indifferent to 
caresses and seem to wish to be left alone. 

The diet of the Alaskan dog is dried fish. When not 
fed with this, the dogs themselves become fishers, 
and actually catch fish for themselves. 

The outside dog, and sometimes the wolf-bred dog, 
is the faithful and inseparable companion and friend 
of the lonely Alaskan prospector, sharing uncomplain¬ 
ingly the hardships and sufferings of his master. 

But the commercial value of the Alaskan dog is 
threatened by a formidable rival; that is, the Russian 
reindeer. This animal can be successfully bred in 

158 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Alaska. On the Seward Peninsula there are extensive 
tracts covered by a variety of moss, known as the rein¬ 
deer moss, that is the reindeer’s natural food. This 
fodder possesses the great advantage of not requiring 
either to be cut or stored for winter use. When covered 
by the deep winter snows, the scent of the animal is so 
acute that it finds no difficulty in locating its food and 
afterward reaching it by burrowing through the snow. 

Great success has attended the raising of reindeer 
in Alaska on the Seward Peninsula. These animals are 
valuable, not only as beasts of burden, for hauling 
sleds, etc., but also as supplying tender, juicy, sweet, and 
wholesome meat that commands prices ranging from 
fifty to seventy-five cents per pound. The rich milk of 
the reindeer is frequently employed like the milk of the 
cow for producing a very rich cheese. It can readily 
be seen, therefore, that the domestication of the rein¬ 
deer proves to be a very profitable business to the 
natives in whose hands the development of this in¬ 
dustry is left by the government. This is especially 
true, since the only expense is the herding, the animal 
getting food for itself from the hour of its birth. Be¬ 
sides the flesh the reindeer can supply, its skin is very 
valuable for clothing and for the sleeping-bags used in 
traveling. 

That the reindeer is a dangerous competitor of the 
dog for dragging sleds was demonstrated recently in a 
sled-race from Nome to Fort Davis and return, a dis¬ 
tance of about seven and a half miles. In this race the 
159 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


competition was between dogs and reindeers. The race 
was won by a reindeer driven by an Eskimo named 
Tautuk. The time was thirty-three minutes and three 
seconds, as against thirty-three minutes and nine sec¬ 
onds by the dog-team. 

Clinton and Dimitri by no means spent all their time 
indoors. 

“ Come, Nicholas, let’s get out in the open air and 
try our luck in bobbing for tom-cod.” 

“ I’ll be glad to go, Harry; but you’ll have to show 
me how,” replied Dimitri. 

“ It’s simple enough,” was the reply. “ We go out 
on Bering Sea, cut a hole in the ice, set a hook on a 
line, bait with a piece of pork and other bait. The fish 
catches on and you haul it out.” 

“ That sounds easy, Harry,” replied Dimitri, laugh¬ 
ing. “ I think I can learn how to do that.” 

They went fishing and soon caught more cod than 
they could use, but there were other fishermen on the 
ice who were fishing as their regular work, so they 
had no difficulty in giving away all the fish they were 
unable to use. 

Another out-of-door exercise was skeeing. The 
skee, as is well known, is a species of snow-shoe shaped 
something like a long wooden skate that is loosely at¬ 
tached to the foot by means of a strap placed near the 
middle of the snow-shoe. 

When skilled in their use, it is possible for one 
160 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


readily to climb a steep hill, and once at the top it is 
equally possible to slide down again, using the skees as 
skates or sleds. A very high velocity can thus be 
reached. If the skee-runner springs up into the air, 
he may be carried by means of this velocity through 
very great distances. 

To a greenhorn skeeing looks very easy. It seems 
only necessary to put on one’s skees and slide away. 
But, like many other things that look easy, skeeing is 
very hard until learned. Somehow or other, until the 
necessary skill has been acquired, the two feet will per¬ 
sist in going in different directions, with the result of 
an inevitable fall. So long as the fall is in soft snow no 
serious harm is done, but if the snow is deep the un¬ 
fortunate skee-runner may be buried so far below the 
surface that, but for timely assistance, he might be 
suffocated. 

Clinton had thoroughly learned the use of the skee, 
and with his magnificent physical development was 
able to make a jump that carried him much farther 
than the average skee-runner. 

Dimitri soon learned the use of skees, and with his 
companion highly enjoyed the exercise this gave him 
in the open air. 

The several months of enforced stay at Nome passed 
very comfortably for the two men. At last on a day 
in early June, a keen-eyed Eskimo saw something in 
the distance that caused him to cry out, “ Oomiakpuk! ” 
(a steamboat.) 

l 161 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


This eagerly awaited signal was followed by the 
ringing of bells and the blowing of whistles. All work 
was suspended for the time, and everyone rushed out 
to see the welcome sight of the approaching steamer, 
ior this was a proof that the ice had disappeared far out 
in Bering Sea; that the long time of isolation was over, 
and the few months of summer had again set in. 

“ We can now get out of this place and take the boat 
for Tin City,” said Clinton to Dimitri, “ and look after 
our tin prospects.” 

“ We might have gone there long before this, 
Harry,” replied Dimitri, “ but the ground would have 
been so frozen that we could have done nothing in 
the way of further examination or work.” 

As mentioned in the first chapter, both men had taken 
out claims in tin prospects—Clinton on a tin-placer 
prospect, and Dimitri on a tin-lode prospect. 

“ Nicholas,” said Harry, on the way from Nome, “ it 
be well fer two pards to hev the same kind of ore in 
their prospects, even ef in one of them it be in a place 
with the stuff broke and mixed with gravel, and the 
other it be in a solid state as in a lode.” 

“ It is a great advantage, Harry,” replied his com¬ 
panion. “ As you can understand, in a severe climate 
like that of this part of Alaska there are only a few 
months of the year when it is possible to work in the 
open. The rest of the year the ground is frozen, so 
that working by streams of water is impossible.” 

162 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Tain’t hard to see that, Nicholas,” said Harry, 
without waiting for Dimitri to finish what he intended 
to say. “ And then in lode mining, since a feller can 
work underground, there be no reason fer not working 
all the year.” 

“ That’s so, Harry,” said Dimitri. 

“ Then my claim hadn’t orter to hev been put in our 
partnership on equal terms with yourn, Nicholas,” said 
Clinton. “ We must make some other division than 
equal shares. Don’t ye think it will be fairer ef we 
make it three fer you and one fer me ? ” 

“ I don’t think any such thing, Harry,” said Dimitri. 
“ We have agreed to work our claims together on equal 
terms, share and share alike, and I see no reason for 
changing the agreement now. If you are getting an 
advantage now, I will get one at some other time. 
Besides,” he added, “ there is an advantage in combin¬ 
ing two prospects in which the same metal is to be 
mined, especially two that are so near together. So 
please say no more about the terms of our partnership. 
It’s share and share alike, for good or for bad.” 

“ Ye be a liberal feller, Nicholas, fer sure,” said 
Clinton. “ Wall, sense ye so wish, I’ll say nothing 
further about it now except this, that Harry Clinton 
will get even with ye before ye get through with him. 
Ef he don’t put something into the partnership that 
will more than make up fer the difference ye kin call 
him what ye please.” 

“ But are you not forgetting, Harry, that the two 
gold-quartz prospects on which we have taken out 
163 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


claims may not be of equal worth? So far as can be 
seen, I believe, as a mining engineer, that yours is of 
far greater value than mine. So let’s call the matter 
off. We are pards, share and share alike.” 

“ All right, Nicholas, let’s say no more about it.” 

It may be said that the question as to the relative 
values of the prospect claims of the partners was never 
again discussed, either here or in other portions of the 
country they afterward visited together. 

Nearly a whole month was spent by the two men in 
a careful examination of their prospects. The ore, both 
in the placer and in the lode prospects, was an oxide 
of tin, or cassiterite. It is an ore of a black color, 
being nearly as heavy as metallic iron. The ore 
which comes in placer prospects is known as stream 
tin or float tin. 

“ There be three kinds of this stuff, Nicholas,” said 
Clinton, when they were examining the float ore. 
“ Tin ore and quartz, tin ore and a black stuff ye tell 
me be tourmaline, and simply tin ore.” 

“ Yes, Harry,” replied Dimitri, “ and these float 
ores agree with the three kinds of tin ore that we find 
in the lodes or veins.” 

“ How kin lodes of tin ore be best worked, Nicho¬ 
las?” inquired Clinton when they were examining the 
lode-vein in the lode. 

“ We’ll use drills and blast the rocks,” was the reply. 

164 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ How will we drive the drills, Nicholas? We could 
use a gasoline engine to drive air-pumps, and pipes 
could be laid down to bring the air from a distance to 
the drills.” 

“ Pumps driven by compressed air would not an¬ 
swer for this climate, Harry. The pipes would be sure 
to give trouble from becoming clogged with ice. 
Steam-pipes would be still more troublesome.” 

“ Then what kin we use? ” 

“ Electricity. Have a central plant and use a gaso¬ 
line engine for producing electricity by driving a dy¬ 
namo, and run copper wires from the dynamo to the 
drills.” 

A well-known fact as regards cassiterite, or dioxide 
of tin, that Clinton was ignorant of, was the different 
colors it assumed. To Clinton there was only one kind 
of tin ore and that was the black variety. But Dimitri 
assured him that specimens varying from almost color¬ 
less varieties to grays and browns were quite as pure as 
the black ores. 

There are a variety of minerals found in the vein 
matter of tin-lodes or veins. Some of the more impor¬ 
tant are fluorspar, zinnwaldite, a lithia-iron mica, wolf¬ 
ramite, vesuvianite, arseno-pyrite, sheelite, ilmenite, 
molybdenite, etc. 

Tin is in great demand for producing the sheet-tin 
used for roofing purposes and for tinware, as well as 
for the production of a variety of alloys. Moreover, 

165 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


tin ores are comparatively scarce, therefore the pros¬ 
pects of Clinton and Dimitri could not fail to command 
good values, provided the quantity of ore present was 
sufficiently great. They did not hesitate, therefore, to 
have considerable work done on the prospects, especi¬ 
ally since in order legally to hold the claims a certain 
sum of money had to be expended on them each year 
until a certain total expenditure was reached. Dimitri 
gave his opinion as a mining engineer that both pros¬ 
pects possessed large quantities of ore. 

But the limits of this volume will prevent any further 
detailed description of what these men did. After 
spending some time at their tin prospects, they planned 
to visit other prospects they had in the neighborhood of 
Cordova. These were gold-quartz lodes situated in 
the neighborhood of the McKinley Lake gold camp, 
some twenty-three miles from Cordova. 

These were the claims that the two men took out in 
their correct names, as had not been the case with the 
claims they had each filed on the tin prospects. 


166 


CHAPTER XIII 


Mashinsky 

“ If I can ever get out of this beastly country, I’ll cer¬ 
tainly do so.” 

The speaker was the Russian criminal Mashinsky, 
whom the detectives Blank and Petromelinski had made 
so many unsuccessful attempts to arrest for theft and 
murder. 

It is not our intention to follow, except generally, 
the many adventures this scoundrel had in successfully 
eluding the tireless pursuit of the two detectives. It 
is sufficient to say that having reached British Colum¬ 
bia he was unable to find employment, and drifting to¬ 
ward the southwest succeeded in reaching Seattle. He 
had become so reduced in circumstances as to be with¬ 
out means for purchasing more than a single meal a 
day, and that by no means a large one. He was there¬ 
fore glad to get work as a stoker on one of the steam¬ 
ships that ply between Seattle and Skagway by the 
inside passage. 

While the pay was fair and the board good and 
abundant, yet the labor was severe, so that the fugitive 
became dissatisfied, and hearing that work could 
readily be obtained at the salmon canneries, he deserted 
the vessel and obtained work at one of these places. 

Mashinsky had reasoned with himself that almost 
167 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


continually shoveling coal into boilers for many hours 
in succession must necessarily be far more severe than 
handling salmon. Then too, in his imagination he con¬ 
trasted the pure fresh air of the canneries with the 
heated air of the vessel’s hold. But he did not like his 
new work when he tried it. Although it required 
somewhat less severe physical labor than stoking, yet 
it was continuous for many hours of the day. As 
for the assumed pure air of the outside, he found it 
contaminated with the odors of the putrefying heaps 
of refuse that too often lay around to be trodden on by 
the workmen. So again we find the man dissatisfied 
and on the lookout for more agreeable employment. 

Accustomed as he had been for so large a part of his 
life to work as a lapidary, requiring a delicate touch 
and quickness of sight, Mashinsky naturally found 
shoveling coal or handling an almost countless number 
of fish very severe. He had by no means found the 
agreeable and easy life in America he had pictured to 
himself when he had fled to it after committing crime 
in Russia. 

As has been related in the other volumes in this 
series, the trouble he had brought upon himself began 
in Philadelphia, where he reluctantly joined his for¬ 
tunes with another rascal, Metchiniskofif, who forced 
him to agree to share the proceeds of the theft of a 
set of diamonds that were being recut at the shop of 
Francksen the Philadelphia lapidary, for whom he 
was then working. 

Forced by this last theft to flee from Philadelphia, 
168 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

the two men crossed the continent to Chicago and 
finally reached Salt Lake City, pursued by the Phila¬ 
delphia detective Blank and the Russian detective Pe- 
tromelinski. At Salt Lake City the men added another 
murder to their crimes, but again escaped the detec¬ 
tives. After many adventures, having failed in an at¬ 
tempt to sell a fake gold prospect to some Western 
miners, they again fled for their lives. 

During this flight Metchiniskoff made an attempt to 
hold up the lad Happy, who turned the tables on his 
would-be capturer, and handed him over to Petrome- 
linski after compelling him to give up the emerald that 
had been stolen from the Czar of Russia. 

It was at this time that, instead of standing by his 
partner in crime, Mashinsky basely deserted him, and 
almost immediately afterward falling into the hands 
of Joseph Smith and his Danite band, was led a miser¬ 
able life in the custody of the Apache Indians that 
formed part of the Danites. Here he was forced to 
do menial work while moving to and from the different 
gold mines and prospects belonging to Joe Smith. 

During the battle on the mesa in lower California, 
where Joseph Smith and his band were defeated and 
Smith killed, Mashinsky again escaped and reached 
British Columbia and Seattle as above described. 

Mashinsky’s experiences were by no means unusual, 
considering the circumstances. He had abandoned his 
calling as a lapidary, at which he could always gain 
an honest livelihood. If he had been industrious, 
169 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


he might have laid by money that would have 
enabled him to lessen his labors as the years passed. 
But such a life had no attractions for the man. He 
would appropriate for himself the results of the labors 
of others. This he had done, and so had no one but 
himself to blame for being a fugitive, and had fled 
many thousands of miles in order to escape being cap¬ 
tured and forced to pay the penalty of his crimes. 

After giving up his work at the salmon cannery, by 
obtaining work on boats and trains, Mashinsky suc¬ 
ceeded in reaching the great Treadwell mine. But 
again he was disappointed. While the pay for such 
work is excellent, the amount of physical labor is 
great'. He could lay by some little of his earnings, but 
this amount he thought too small. It was at this place 
he made the remark referred to at the beginning of this 
chapter: “ If I can ever get out of this beastly country, 
I’ll certainly do so.” 

In a well-ordered and disciplined camp, like that at 
the Treadwell mines at this time, there was a greater 
amount of mutual trust among the men than is gener¬ 
ally found in large cities or towns, where the law is 
supposed to be all-powerful. Consequently, the oppor¬ 
tunities for theft were many and great. Mashinsky 
believed the dangers arising from taking what was not 
his own so small that he concluded to risk them. 

“ These fellers,” he said to himself, “ are a lot of 
old women. I’ll feather my nest here and then get 
out.” 


170 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


But it did not take him long to discover his mistake. 
They were far from being old women. They merely 
trusted one another implicitly, but woe betide anyone 
who misplaced that trust. For such they had stern 
laws that were fairly applied and rapidly executed. 
None of the delays common in the so-called law-abiding 
districts occurred. If a man was convicted of theft, 
a rope or a bullet enabled him to pay his debt to the 
community without troubling either jail or jailer. 

This was Mashinsky’s experience. The theft of a 
leather bag containing several pounds of gold-dust was 
soon discovered. Everything seemed to point to the 
black-haired Russian. Had he remained an hour 
longer in camp he would almost certainly have been 
tried and executed. But he fled, and although very 
nearly captured, again managed to escape the fate 
that seemed, as it were, ever to come nearer and 
nearer. 

There is this difference between uncoined and coined 
money: If stolen or lost, it is, generally speaking, much 
easier to identify coined than uncoined money, since 
coined money has its peculiarities of date and the mark¬ 
ings on its face, as well as its milling; while uncoined 
money, at least in the shape of gold-dust or small nug¬ 
gets, has no easily recognized difference that will enable 
the one from whom it has been stolen definitely to 
claim it as his property. 

Of course we are not unmindful of the fact that the 
gold-dust or small fragments of gold from one placer 
171 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


can often be readily detected by an expert from those 
from another placer, but this requires greater skill than 
is possessed by the average man. Then too, it was to 
the advantage of Mashinsky that the gold he had stolen 
had been obtained from many different placers, since 
the theft had been from the general store at the mine, 
where the gold-dust was paid in as money, and had 
therefore been obtained from different parts of the 
country. 

Throwing away the leather bag that had been used 
to hold the gold-dust, Mashinsky placed the gold in 
another bag. Having saved a little money, he was not 
obliged to use it until he had reached Skagway. Nor, 
indeed, did he have to use much of it until he had 
reached Dawson. 

He had no difficulty in obtaining work in the mines 
at Dawson, and for a while led an honest life. But 
here he heard so much said about the Mounted Police 
of the Northwest, and saw the manner in which they 
maintained order in the city and at the mines, that he 
began to dread coming under their suspicion. This 
fear was one day rendered almost certain when, hear¬ 
ing of the way in which the police in all parts of the 
great territory of Yukon kept in communication with 
one another by telegraph and telephone, he concluded 
to make another flight. This time he chose the mining 
district at Fairbanks, Alaska, since, he argued, it was 
outside of the region in which the Mounted Police 
were all-powerful. 


172 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


While on his way from Dawson to Fairbanks, 
Mashinsky met Clinton and Nicholas Dimitri. Recog¬ 
nizing the latter as a Russian, he said to Dimitri in 
that language: 

“ Can I not ask help from a countryman ? I am 
stranded in this part of the world with practically no 
means to enable me to get back to my native country.” 

“How did it happen?” inquired Dimitri, who did 
not like Mashinsky’s looks, and therefore mistrusted 
what he had told him. 

“ I fell among thieves,” he said. “ I had plenty of 
money to enable me to visit the northern part of the 
country, where I am told by a Russian prospector that 
valuable gold mines are to be found. While in Dawson 
my pocket was picked by a scoundrel, and all the 
money I had, except about five dollars, was stolen. I 
am, therefore, adrift here so far from Russia.” 

“We can understand how the man feels,” said Clin¬ 
ton to Dimitri. 

“ Have either of you suffered from thieves ? ” in¬ 
quired Mashinsky. 

“ Yes,” was the reply. “ My companion and I had 
our pockets picked of about eight hundred dollars each 
in American money. Fortunately, we caught the 
thieves, made them cough up our money, and handed 
them over to the sheriff’s aid.” 

“ In what part of Alaska did this occur ? ” inquired 
Mashinsky, while a shudder went down his spine when 
he heard him say that these had been caught and 
handed over to the law for punishment. 

173 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ It was at Nome,” said Clinton. “ Now what do 
you want us to do for you? I am ready to help you 
if it does not require too great a pull on my wallet, and 
I do not doubt that my companion is ready to do the 
same.” 

“ It is not a gift I am asking for,” said Mashinsky in 
a tone of assumed dignity; “ it is only the favor of a 
loan. I shall of course give you my note payable in 
twelve months, by which time I shall be able to return 
to my native country and can send a remittance to 
whatever place you may name.” 

The two men agreed to lend Mashinsky one hundred 
dollars in United States money—fifty dollars from 
each. 

“We must not forget, Dimitri, how nearly we came 
to being in the same position this man is in,” said Clin¬ 
ton. 

The above incident occurred late one evening in 
Dawson. Clinton and Dimitri were occupying a small 
shelter tent, and invited Mashinsky to share it with 
them for that night. 

When Clinton arose next morning he found the 
stranger had disappeared, and with him a gold ring 
prized highly as a gift from his brother. He had taken 
the ring from his finger in order to remove some 
wagon-grease that had gotten on his hands while re¬ 
moving and greasing one of the wheels from a camp- 
wagon. 

“ Dimitri,” he said to his companion, “ I think I have 
been robbed by that black-haired Russian.” 

174 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Why do you say that, Harry?” he inquired. 

“ Because neither he nor my ring is to be found; 
both have disappeared.” 

“ Look around for the ring, Harry,” said his com¬ 
panion; “ you will probably see it shortly.” 

But neither the ring nor the man was found. They 
concluded that the ring was stolen and that the man 
was the thief. 

“Was the ring especially valuable?” inquired his 
companion. 

“ Only as a present from my brother. It is en¬ 
graven in the inside, ‘ H. E. C., from his brother,’ 
while hidden in a hollow space, covered by a spring 
door, is a lock of my dear mother’s hair.” 

“ What will you do, Harry,” inquired Dimitri, 
“ give it up or try to catch the fellow ? ” 

“ I’ll try to ketch the feller,” was the reply. “ I 
can’t, however, spare much time, since, as ye know, we 
have agreed to meet some parties at Cordova in refer¬ 
ence to our quartz-gold prospects at the McKinley 
Lake gold camp.” 

“ Will.you tell the men here of your loss? ” 

“What do you take me fer, Dimitri? Talk about 
it and have all the camp laughing at us for being 
suckers ? Suppose the story gets out about our having 
been pulled in for a loan of one hundred dollars, taking 
a thief into our tent, and letting him get off with a gold 
ring without our knowing when he left.” 

“ I agree with you, Harry,” said his companion. 
“ We’ll keep this matter to ourselves.” 

175 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Thus again Mashinsky succeeded in keeping out of 
the way of his pursuers, and got off with one hundred 
dollars and a gold ring to his credit. 

So far from feeling any compunction for his in¬ 
gratitude to his benefactors, Mashinsky actually 
laughed at his victims for letting him off so easily. 

“ They were greenhorns and suckers,” he said to 
himself. “ I despise men who are so easily fooled. 
Well, I’m in one hundred dollars and a ring. I dare 
not try to sell it anywhere for some time. I’ll risk 
wearing it. Should I get down to hard pan again, I 
can at least get money for the gold in it.” 

But although Mashinsky pretended to despise the 
men from whom he had stolen the ring, there was 
something in the six feet and some odd inches of 
Clinton that he greatly feared, as indeed he well 
might, for had he been caught he would have gotten 
a severe handling. 

Mashinsky had paid an Indian to take him in his 
boat down the Tanana River toward Fairbanks. 
During these ten days he learned enough of the pecu¬ 
liarities of the rivers in this part of Alaska to appre¬ 
ciate thoroughly the comparative safety they afforded 
to one who wished to make his way across the country 
from one place to another without being seen. 

There was especially one thing he saw in many of 
the rivers—islands formed by the stream cutting for 
itself two or more separate channels. It was the deeper 
channels only that were traversed by boats. It would 
176 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

therefore be possible, if one only had sufficient food, to 
set pursuit at naught. 

Succeeding in reaching Fairbanks and now having 
some little money in hand, Mashinsky again obtained 
work in one of the mining-camps; not, however, with 
any idea of remaining at work, but rather for the op¬ 
portunity it gave him for theft from the miners. 

Knowing the dangers to which he was exposing him¬ 
self, Mashinsky made preparations for escaping. Bear¬ 
ing in mind what he had done during the few days 
in an open rowboat, he bought a small boat and placed 
enough food in it to last for some time, together with 
a few simple cooking utensils and a few fishing-lines. 

Everything being provided, Mashinsky again stole 
from some of the miners. This time his escape was 
made by a very narrow margin of safety, or by what 
might be called the skin of his teeth. He was almost 
caught, but succeeded in throwing the men off his track. 
He reached his boat at night, and putting off made his 
way down the Tanana to the Yukon. 

It will be remembered that it was on this river that 
the two detectives, accompanied by Blavinski, Dimitri, 
and Happy and their companions, were in pursuit of 
the Russian in another boat, and that on one occasion, 
when their boat was stranded in shallow water near 
one of the banks, Happy and Bill got off with the idea 
of panning some of the gravel of the many channels of 
the river, while their companions were getting their 
boat back into deep water. 

m 177 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


It was on one of these occasions when Mashinsky, 
in order to avoid being seen, had taken his boat out of 
one of the shallow streams and was about kindling a 
fire to cook some fish he had caught, when he heard 
approaching footsteps. It was Happy and Bill, who 
were looking for placer-gold in the sands and gravel 
of the river. While a boat would not be apt to make 
its way in the shallow parts of the stream, such places 
were excellent in which to prospect for placer-gold. 

Quietly retiring to his boat and concealing himself, 
Mashinsky carefully listened to the conversation. To 
his great horror he saw the boy Happy and the cow¬ 
boy Bill, both of whom he knew were dangerously 
quick with their guns, and neither of whom was safely 
to be fooled with. But if the appearance of the two 
frightened the hiding man, he was still more frightened 
by the conversation which he could distinctly hear. 

“ Don’t ye think, Hap,” Bill was saying, “ that a 
feller like Mashinsky could hide himself in the boat 
we be told he is in, so that it would be very hard to 
ketch him? ” 

“ I suppose it might be hard for anyone to catch 
him, Bill,” replied Happy. “ But you must not forget 
that two men like Blank and Petromelinski, accus¬ 
tomed as they have been for nearly all their lives 
to running down criminals, can hardly fail to catch the 
man before long. If they think it worth their while 
to come thousands of miles into this far-off country, it 
must be because they feel certain that* the arrest of the 
man is only a matter of time.” 

i 7 8 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Then ye think we’ll ketch the rascal, do ye, Hap? ” 

“ I am almost certain of it,” said Happy. “ There 
is only one thing,” he added, “ that might possibly 
enable Mashinsky to escape.” 

“ And what be that, Hap? ” inquired Bill. 

“ If Mashinsky could find, borrow, earn, or steal 
enough money to enable him to provide a boat with 
food enough to let him travel along little-traversed 
routes, he might succeed.” 

“ But, Hap,” ejaculated Bill, “ fer a feller to travel 
along trails that be but little used, he must know the 
country and this the feller don’t know.” 

“That’s true, Bill,” replied Happy; “and then 
there’s another difficulty.” 

“ And what be that difficulty, Hap? ” inquired Bill. 

“ Travel is only possible in much of this country 
during the brief summer season. If forced to spend 
the winter in some city or town, the Mounted Police 
of the Northwest, who are on the lookout for him, 
would make such a sojourn extremely dangerous.” 

“ Thet’s so, Hap,” said Bill. “ Ye be right as ye 
generally be. And then as ye know, Awake-in-the- 
Night be helping a lot by handing around the circular 
in which a reward of two thousand dollars be offered 
fer the capture of the man.” 

The above comments had been carried on while Bill 
and Happy had stopped within a comparatively short 
distance of the hiding fugitive, panning some gravel 
they had taken from the bed of the stream. They were 
179 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


so near together that they might almost have touched, 
so that what they said could readily be heard. When 
the washing was done, Happy said: 

“ Let’s get back to the boat, Bill. We promised not 
to be away too long. We will only have time to get 
back. There is gold here, but apparently not in quan¬ 
tities sufficient to make it pay to file placer claims.” 

“ Ef we don’t take Mashinsky soon, Hap,” inquired 
Bill, “ do ye know where we’ll go? ” 

“ I think we’ll go back to our camp near Fairbanks, 
Bill. As to when we’ll go that I do not know. Per¬ 
haps to-morrow.” 

As the two men hurried off, a cold perspiration broke 
out freely on the face and body of the hiding criminal. 
He had, as he supposed, safely gone over several thou¬ 
sand miles in order to escape the very people now so 
near him. And who were these people? In the first 
place there was Happy, a most dangerously bright lad, 
who would not be apt to fail to see what there was 
any reasonable chance of seeing. Moreover, a lad 
frightfully quick with the trigger and able to hit any 
object within the range of his gun. Then there was 
Bill, another quick-and-sure shot, and especially skilled 
in following trails. 

Besides the above, there were the two dreadful de¬ 
tectives, Blank, of Philadelphia, a man who had given 
him and his companion Metchiniskoff in Philadelphia 
and elsewhere much trouble; and then too, the even 
more dreaded Petromelinski from Russia, the pick of 
180 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the Russian detectives, was with them. Nor was the 
Indian, Awake-in-the-Night, to be forgotten. He was 
a man who had a grievance against Mashinsky for a 
trick he had played on him while still with the Danites 
—a trick that nearly resulted in the Indian being killed, 
but which, by reason of his greater quickness, had 
resulted in Awake-in-the-Night scalping the man who 
had endeavored to kill him. 

All these men were not only on his track, but even 
at his very heels. He was indeed in a most dangerous 
position. He did not dare stir for at least twenty-four 
hours, during which he was able to get uncooked food 
only, for the danger of kindling a fire was too great to 
be considered. 

“ Where shall I go ? Where is it safe to go ? ” he 
inquired of himself. 

It did not require much thought to answer the ques¬ 
tion. The only safe direction to take would be some 
direction opposite to that which the lad Happy thought 
they would take possibly to-morrow; namely, toward 
the camp at Fairbanks. 

“ I will make for Cordova by the Copper River Rail¬ 
road,” he said. “ Fortunately, I have enough money 
to pay my way. At Cordova I can take a steamer for 
some port I will determine on.” 

But we will leave the fugitive here, having deter¬ 
mined on endeavoring to reach Cordova by the Cop¬ 
per River & Northwestern Railroad. 


181 


CHAPTER XIV 


The Capture of Mashinsky 

After the accidental coming together of Mashinsky 
and two of his pursuers, Happy and Bill, on one of 
the narrow-split channels of the Yukon, the two parties 
separated, Happy and Bill to rejoin their companions, 
and Mashinsky to remain in fear and trembling in his 
hiding-place until he could risk leaving it. 

Satisfied from what he had overheard of the con¬ 
versation between Happy and Bill that his pursuers 
would continue only a short distance down the river 
when they would return to Fairbanks, Mashinsky had 
but one thing to do, and that was to wait until he might 
safely pursue his retreat as rapidly as possible down the 
Yukon toward its mouth. 

“ It will be safe to do this,” he said to himself. “ For 
these fellows to reach Fairbanks they must go away 
from the Yukon. It’s lucky I had the brains to lay 
in enough food to last for many weeks. By hiding 
during the day and floating down the river at night, it 
will be odd if I do not escape.” 

But Mashinsky had failed to give proper thought to 
the dangers of floating down a stream that was un¬ 
known to him. Everything went right for a while, but 
on the night of the fifth day he carelessly fell asleep, 
and being drawn into dangerous rapids nearly lost 
182 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


his life by the wrecking of his boat. The wreck was 
so complete that he was unable to save anything. All 
his food, his fishing-lines, and other things so neces¬ 
sary to him, completely disappeared. He even lost 
his wallet and its contents, or practically all his 
money. 

He was now in a desperate position, without food, 
and lacking the knowledge of obtaining the food that 
almost always can be found in a country like the part 
of Alaska in which he then was, that is so very fertile 
during summer. It is true he collected some wild 
berries, but was afraid to continue using this kind of 
food, because of nearly dying from some poisonous 
varieties he had eaten. 

“ I must again risk visiting a mining-camp and see 
if I can’t get work to earn enough money to buy food 
to keep me alive.” 

He stopped at the first camp he met, but before 
actually entering it was horrified by seeing tacked up 
on a post one of the reward circulars offering two 
thousand dollars for his capture, if alive. 

“ Those devils, Blank and Petromelinski, feel sure 
of taking me,” he thought, and wearily dragged him¬ 
self away, almost dead with hunger and exhaustion. 
He walked on for several hours, until he reached a 
deserted native hut, consisting of a hole dug in the 
side of a hill. Here, in what would be called an ice- 
chest in civilized regions, that is, in a hole dug in the 
ground until it reached the permanently frozen earth, 
he found an abundant supply of salmon. They had 
183 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


been thrown there during a run of fish up the near-by 
river. They were eatable, at least when he had thrown 
away the top layers and gone down to those that were 
less decomposed. 

Lighting a fire, for he had some matches in a water¬ 
proof box that had escaped actual wetting at the wreck¬ 
ing of the boat, he cooked the fish and thus managed to 
satisfy his hunger. He remained in the hut for some 
days. On leaving it, after a long walk, he reached 
another mining-camp still farther to the south. 

Fearing to stay long in one place, he wandered from 
camp to camp, and at last reached a camp in Valdez 
Creek, a tributary of the Susitna River. 

“ I should be safe here for a while,” he said to him¬ 
self. “ I am entirely out of the trail of the devils who 
are following me. I find none of those circulars offer¬ 
ing two thousand dollars reward for me if living.” 

When Happy and Bill returned to camp they found 
their party greatly excited by the receipt of two tele¬ 
grams and a letter sent from Fairbanks by a special 
messenger. It had been the policy of the detectives 
liberally to recompense any special messengers bring¬ 
ing to them telegrams and letters. Consequently, there 
was generally no difficulty in having letters and tele¬ 
grams promptly forwarded. In order to keep the 
parties sending these communications advised of their 
movements, they were careful to send back by the same 
messenger, as often as they could, the direction of their 
subsequent route. 


184 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


“ As ye can see, Hap/’ said Bill to his companion 
on their return, “ our friends hev news of some kind or 
other.” 

“ So I see, Bill,” replied the lad. “ What is the news, 
Mr. Petromelinski ? ” he inquired of that gentleman. 
“ Does it refer to the black-haired Russian, or to Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri’s son and my uncle? ” 

“To both, my lad,” was the reply. “ I will read you 
one of the telegrams I have received from the land 
office at Cordova where mining claims are entered. It 
was wired to Fairbanks and sent here by special mes¬ 
senger.” It read as follows: 

Claims have been filed here by H. E. Clinton and Nicholas 
Dimitri for fissure-vein gold prospects in the McKinley Lake 
gold region, about twenty-three miles from Cordova. 

“ That’s splendid,” said Happy. 

“Of course it’s splendid,” said Blank; “but listen 
to the other telegram.” It read as follows: 

Mashinsky has been seen in a mining-camp at Fairbanks. 
Here he stole gold-dust from a storekeeper and is fleeing for 
his life. He has been traced to a boat floating down the 
Yukon. After a week from the time he started, this boat 
was picked up in a wrecked condition near some dangerous 
rapids. Later advices state that Mashinsky has been seen 
moving south toward the Valdez Creek, near Mount Mc¬ 
Kinley. 

“ It looks as if you would at last catch the rascal, 
gentlemen,” said Blavinski. “ What do you say? ” 

“ Of course we will catch him,” was the reply. “ He 
is in a most desperate position. He has no money, is 

185 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


obliged to work, and the mines are practically the only 
places in which he can get work. Don’t you agree 
with me, Ivan? ” 

“ Unless we botch the case, Blank, I think Ma- 
shinsky’s dance is up. Before long he will be safely 
on his way to St. Petersburg if the claims the United 
States Government have on him do not keep him in this 
country.” 

During this conversation, Blavinski and Professor 
Dimitri were anxiously waiting to hear Petromelinski 
read the letter that had been brought to him by the 
same messenger who brought the telegrams. 

“ And now,” said Blavinski to the Russian detective, 
“ let us hear the letter. It is, I suppose, about Clinton 
and Dimitri ? ” 

“ Yes, it is about the parties you name. I tele¬ 
graphed, by your permission, as you will recall, offer¬ 
ing a small reward to the parties connected with the 
government land office at Cordova for any additional 
information they could obtain concerning Clinton and 
Dimitri. As you will see, they advise me of the move¬ 
ments of these men. But let me read their letter. I 
will omit the unimportant parts, since, of course, I’ll 
give you the letter afterward to read. Listen to this: 

“ As to the men Clinton and Dimitri, who have taken out 
claims on gold prospects at the McKinley Lake gold region, 
we have traced them to Nome, where they passed the winter. 

“ These men are entitled to claims on two prospects at 
Tin City on the Seward Peninsula. We cannot, however, 
find any claims taken out in their names. We are informed 
that they have planned to take a steamer to Cordova, from 

186 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


which place they intend to visit their gold prospects and 
then to do some prospecting in the region between Fairbanks 
and Cordova. 

“ It will probably interest you to know that the men are 
comfortable so far as money matters are concerned. They 
have expended considerable cash in drilling on their proper¬ 
ties at Tin City, so that it would seem they own these proper¬ 
ties. If this is so they have, from all we can learn, struck 
it rich in this line.” 

The information obtained both by telegrams and by 
mail gave them plenty to think about. At first thought, 
it seemed to Blavinski and his party that they had 
better go directly to Cordova, leaving the detectives to 
follow Mashinsky, but it required only a short dis¬ 
cussion to enable the detectives to convince them that 
no advantage would result from their separation, at 
least for some time. 

“ As you will see, gentlemen,” remarked Petrome- 
linski to Blavinski and Dimitri, “ the section of coun¬ 
try to which Mashinsky has been traced lies between 
Fairbanks and Cordova. By following this route we 
shall, for a while, be going in the general direction of 
Cordova.” 

“ I think that’s true, Dimitri,” remarked Blavinski. 

“ But what is more to the point, gentlemen,” said 
Blank, “ don’t forget the letter states that after reach¬ 
ing Cordova the men intend doing some prospecting in 
the region between Fairbanks and Cordova. It seems 
to me that the best plan will be for you to go with us 
all the way to Cordova by the way of the Susitna 
River.” 


187 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ You are right , 1 ’ said Blavinski to the detective. 
“ What is your opinion, Dimitri ? ” 

“ I think we should all go together at least for a 
while,” replied Dimitri. “ We can strike the govern¬ 
ment trail say at Copper Center and follow it to Chi- 
tina, and then we can readily reach Cordova by the 
Copper River Railroad.” 

The probability of capturing Mashinsky pleased none 
of the party more than it did Awake-in-the-Night. 
When he heard the detectives express their opinion 
that the man would soon be captured, he said: 

“ Awake-in-the-Night heap glad the black-haired 
rascal will be caught.” 

“ Do you know why Awake-in-the-Night dislikes 
Mashinsky so much, Bill? ” inquired Blavinski. 

“ I hev asked him that ere question,” replied Bill, 
“ but he gave me no other answer than that Mashinsky 
played him a dirty trick. More than this he wouldn’t 
say. Suppose you ask him, Hap,” said Bill. 

“I’ll do so, Bill,” said Happy, “but not now. I 
think it is something in which the Russian got the 
better of the Indian, so that he would not like to talk 
about it before everybody. I think I can persuade him 
to tell me if I ask him when no others are around.” 

Acting on this supposition, Happy took the first op¬ 
portunity when alone with the Indian to say, “ What 
do you think of Alaska, Awake-in-the-Night? ” 

“ Alaska heap big country. Has much yellow stone 
that white men like so much. Awake-in-the-Night 
188 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


like the country in that direction, 1 ” pointing to the 
south, “ heap better. How does Smile-on-his-Face like 
the country? ” he then inquired of Happy. 

“ Very much, indeed,” was the reply. “The Great 
Spirit has given much riches to his children in this 
country. But he says: * You must work hard to get the 
good things I placed here for you so many, many ages 
ago.’ 

“ Here one can find much gold, silver, copper, coal, 
and other things the white man needs to build his great 
cities with, so here he comes to get them.” And then 
with the idea of leading the Indian to ask questions, 
Happy said: 

“ Alaska is a great country in which to find things. 
Keep your eyes open, Awake-in-the-Night, and you 
may find many things that are worth finding.” 

“ Does Smile-on-his-Face think we will find that 
black-haired rascal, Mashinsky?” 

“Alaska is very large,” replied Happy. “ It has 
many places in which a man can hide. Perhaps Ma¬ 
shinsky will see us coming and will creep into some 
hole or some other place, so that we will pass him and 
he will again escape. You know he has succeeded in 
getting off a number of times now.” 

“ But the thief-takers think they will take him sure. 
Mashinsky works heap in miners’ camp, so we catch 
him sure.” 

“ I hope the detectives are right,” replied Happy. 
“ We must do all we can to capture the man. He is 
very bad and should be punished. He acted meanly to 
189 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


his employer in Philadelphia. Mashinsky very bad 
man. Does not hesitate to kill anyone he dislikes. 
He doesn’t like you, does he, Awake-in-the-Night ? ” 

“ Black-haired rascal hates Awake-in-the-Night. 
Heap bad man, he did mean thing to Awake-in-the- 
Night. He told one of Smith’s Indians that I was a 
friend of the white people. He told him where to find 
Awake-in-the-Night. Indian would have killed me, 
but Awake-in-the-Night too quick; killed him and took 
his scalp. Awake-in-the-Night hates Mashinsky and 
hopes he will be captured.” 

“ And so do I,” said Happy. 

“ What will they do when they catch Mashinsky ? 
Do you know ? ” inquired the Indian of Happy. 

“ I think they will take him to St. Petersburg, a 
great city in Russia, where they will kill him. If you 
want the man captured, Awake-in-the-Night, you must 
keep your eyes open.” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night will do all he can to help 
catch the man,” was the reply. “ I will get some 
more reward papers from the thief-catchers and will 
again say to the men in the camps we visit: ‘ You like 
to make big money? Then help us catch the fellow 
this paper talks about.’ ” 

They traveled slowly toward the south. They had 
excellent mounts and were well equipped with every¬ 
thing necessary for camping as well as for prospecting. 

“ This is a wonderfully well mineralized country, 
Blavinski,” said Dimitri to his companion. “ I un- 
190 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


derstand it has only been indifferently prospected, ow¬ 
ing perhaps to its lack of transportation facilities. I 
see indications of gold, coal, copper, and many other 
minerals.” 

“If that’s so, professor,” replied Blavinski, “ we 
must keep our eyes open and we may find something of 
value besides the men we are looking for.” 

“ Did ye hear what Professor Dimitri has jest said, 
Hap? ” inquired Bill. “ Ef this be so, Bill is betting 
on ye, Hap, fer getting in on sich a deskivery ez soon 
ez, if not sooner, than the rest of the crowd.” 

“ I’ll do my best, Bill,” replied Happy, “ and so I am 
sure you will.” 

Their trail lay along the eastern flanks of the moun¬ 
tain range from which Mount McKinley, the highest 
point of land on the North American Continent, rises. 

It is unnecessary to say that they visited every min¬ 
ing-camp on this route, for it was in these camps they 
hoped to find Mashinsky. In all of them Awake-in- 
the-Night never failed to hand around the reward cir¬ 
culars, telling any who wished to get a “ heap of 
money ” to read it and show them how to catch the 
man. 

One day, in a camp situated on the eastern slope of 
Mount McKinley, Awake-in-the-Night began handing 
around the circulars, when one of the miners ap¬ 
proached him and said: 

“ Give me one of those papers. One of my friends 
says that there is a chance fer a feller to make a big pile 
of money.” 

191 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ Can White-face read English ? ” inquired Awake- 
in-the-Night. 

“ I can for sure,” was the reply. “ Do you think I 
am an ignoramus ? ” 

“ Then,” said Awake-in-the-Night, “ read this. It 
tells you what you ask me.” 

The man took the circular and began reading it. 
Soon he was surrounded by several others who read it. 

“ Holy smoke! ” said the men to whom Awake-in- 
the-Night had given the circular. “ As I make it out, 
the feller you want so bad to catch that you are ready 
to hand out big cash so freely, has been in this camp 
during the last week.” 

“ That’s so,” said one of the men. “ Ye mean the 
black-haired Russian what’s been hanging around the 
place, and doing just as little work as he kin. What’s 
the feller wanted for ? ” he asked of the Indian. 

“ He kill a man; stole diamonds and heap of things,” 
was the reply. 

“ That’s what I think the feller hez been trying to 
do here,” said another man. “ He lighted out some 
time last night, arter supper, and hez been seen a 
climbing the side of the mountain,” he said, pointing 
to Mount McKinley. 

“ Awake-in-the-Night heap obliged for what white 
man tells him,” remarked the Indian. “ He go tell 
his people the man they search has gone up the moun¬ 
tain.” 

Happy and Bill were the first of the party that 
Awake-in-the-Night met. 

192 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ What is it you have to tell us ? ” inquired Happy of 
the Indian. “ I can see by your face that it is very 
important.” 

“ Smile-on-his-Face heap bright,” remarked the In¬ 
dian. “ When man in camp read the thief-catchers’ 
paper, he said: 4 1 know that man; he in this camp for 
many sleeps. He left in a hurry last night and has 
been seen climbing the big mountain.’ ” 

“ Bully for you, Awake-in-the-Night. Come with 
us and tell the story to the rest. I reckon we will get 
the fellow now. He certainly can’t climb over the 
mountain and must come down when he gets hungry.” 

On hearing the important news, a plan was formed 
for dividing themselves into parties for searching the 
mountain. When the miners heard of the promised 
reward they wished to take part in the pursuit, es¬ 
pecially as the reward would come to the one capturing 
the fugitive. 

“ Remember,” said Petromelinski, “ the reward is 
only for the man if taken alive. Should you shoot or 
kill him there will be no reward.” 

Bill and Happy started off in the company of 
Awake-in-the-Night, getting some of the men to show 
them where the man had been seen climbing the moun¬ 
tain. After a long search they succeeded in picking up 
his trail. This was done on a portion of the mountain 
about five hundred feet above the level of the camp. 

“ One man going up the mountain here,” remarked 
Awake-in-the-Night. 

“ Ye be right thar,” replied Bill, “ and from the 
193 


N 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


marks he hez left it be a white man, for he wore shoes 
and not moccasins.” 

“ The tracks seem to show the man is lame,” re¬ 
marked Happy. “ See,” he added, “ the marks made 
with the right foot are stronger than those made by 
the left foot, as if he was favoring his left foot.” 

“ I seed that, Hap,” said Bill, smiling, “ and wuz 
a-waiting fer ye to tell about it. Do ye see any other 
things?” he inquired. 

“ Yes, Bill,” was the reply; “ the footsteps are near 
together as if the man was very tired. Is that what 
you mean? ” 

“ Ye hev struck it, Hap,” said Bill, greatly pleased 
that his companion had not failed to note the facts. 

As to Awake-in-the-Night, he merely shook his head 
and said, “ Smile-on-his-Face heap bright.” 

The three men now started on a run, following the 
footsteps which were well marked. They were skilled 
in following up trails. At one place the trail came to a 
sudden stop. 

“ Here be whar the feller set down to rest,” said 
Bill. “ I reckon he be very tired and nearly played 
out.” 

“ White man’s foot hurt,” remarked Awake-in-the- 
Night. “ Took off shoe, foot bleeding. See,” he 
added, pointing to some drops of blood. 

“ And,” remarked Happy, “ it is the left foot, as I 
thought from the way in which the footsteps show 
that he favored that foot.” 

But the footsteps still led up the mountain, and the 
194 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

three men continued following them. They had gone 
rapidly and were at a considerable distance from the 
others. 

Returning again to Mashinsky, he had worked his 
way toward the south, going from camp to camp. 
Taught by bitter experience, he had refrained from 
stealing. At last, however, unable to work and feel¬ 
ing the necessity for getting some ready money, he 
again stole gold-'dust from one of the miners. 

While he had not actually been detected in the act, 
yet the loss of money was quickly discovered. He 
heard one of the men say: “ That black-haired fellow 
has swiped some of my dust. Ef we catch him, what 
shall we do? ” 

“ String him up,” was the reply. “ It’s too hard 
work to get the dust to let any fellow make off with 
it.” 

So Mashinsky left the camp in a hurry. It was now 
near dark, so he succeeded in getting off without being 
seen. In his hurry he took the side of Mount Mc¬ 
Kinley and began slowly climbing the mountain. 

He kept this route up for some hours when he lay 
down to sleep, but started early the next morning and 
w'as seen from the camp far up the side of the moun¬ 
tain. 

“ There goes the feller who swiped your gold-dust, 
Pete,” said one of his companions to the owner of the 
money. “ Will you go arter him? ” 

“ Can’t spare the time,” was the reply. “ I’d lose 

195 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


more money trying to catch the feller than I could 
earn by staying here and working. If I caught him I’d 
have the satisfaction of seeing him strung up by a 
rope; but even that would not pay me for the lost 
time.” This was before Awake-in-the-Night had 
shown the man the reward circular. 

“ Ye be very sensible,” remarked one of his com¬ 
panions. “ Ez ye kin see, the durned fool is climbing 
straight up the mountain. He can’t climb over it, so 
he’ll have to come down; then we can catch him, git 
yer money fer ye, and string him up.” 

Bill, Awake-in-the-Night, and Happy continued to 
follow the trail until they came to an extended tract 
where no footsteps could be seen. They tried to pick 
them up again, but were unable to do so. 

“ Let’s scatter,” said Bill; “ keep right on, Hap. 
I’ll go on your left and Awake-in-the-Night on the 
right. We kain’t miss the feller now.” 

“ It is understood,” said Happy, “ that the man is 
not to be killed.” 

“ Thet’s right,” said Bill. “ I reckon it would 
greatly disappint them detective fellers ef the man war 
shot. Do ye understand? ” he asked of the Indian. 

“ Awake-in-the-Night understand. He not kill man. 
Rather give him up to the thief-catchers.” 

The direction which Happy was following, in an en¬ 
deavor to pick up the trail of the fugitive, extended 
for fully a half-mile over a hard, smooth, rocky sur¬ 
face that to an inexperienced eye gave no signs what- 
196 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

ever of having been walked over. Here and there, 
however, the displacement of a stone, or a minute speck 
of finely ground stone, showed the lad he was on the 
trail. These indications increased in numbers until at 
last a surface covered with fine soft soil was reached, 
where the trail was again well marked. 

This trail was evidently the same as the one he 
and his companions had followed when together. 
There was the same halting gait from the left foot, 
and the same short distance between steps that marked 
a tired man. 

“ The footsteps are getting nearer one another,” re¬ 
marked Happy. “ The man is nearly played out. I’ll 
approach him cautiously. He is probably armed and I 
do not want to shoot him to defend myself.” 

Thinking it possible that since the man was to be 
taken alive his rope or lasso might be of use, the lad 
had thrown the rope over his shoulder on starting out. 

At last he saw from the trail that he was drawing 
nearer the fugitive, and at last could see him limping 
up the mountain. 

Hearing the approaching footsteps, Mashinsky 
stopped, looked back, and saw that his pursuer was no 
other than the hated kid, who had given him so much 
trouble not only in Philadelphia but also in some parts 
of the West. Drawing his revolver, he shouted: 

“ At last I’ll have my revenge. I will kill you for 
all the trouble you have given me,” and with that he 
discharged one of the chambers of his revolver. 

Now, fortunately for Happy, this is where the man 
197 




The Land of Ice and Snow 


made a great mistake. He should have shot first and 
spoken afterward. But speaking first, Happy, who was 
unusually quick in his movements, seeing the direction 
in which the man was aiming, rapidly moved to one 
side, so that the ball did not even come near him. Be¬ 
fore the man could fire another shot the lad had drawn 
his revolver, and aiming at the man's hand shattered it, 
causing the revolver to fall from his hand, and then 
quickly taking his rope or lasso from his shoulders he 
ran toward him. 

Seeing him coming, Mashinsky drew his knife with 
his left hand and stood confidently awaiting his ap¬ 
proach, but before he knew just what had happened, 
the coil fell over his head, and Happy drawing on the 
rope tightly brought the loop down around the man, 
holding his arms closely to his side. 

At almost the same time Bill and Awake-in-the- 
Night, hearing the shots, came running toward them. 

“ Be ye hurt, Hap? ” said Bill anxiously. “ I heerd 
the first shot and knew it warn’t your gun. Then I 
heerd your gun. I see you have roped the man in a 
very pretty way.” 

“ I’m not hurt, Bill,” said Happy with a smile, on 
account of his great luck in thus escaping. “ But see to 
securing the fellow.” 

“ The hold ye hev on his arm with your rope will 
hold him all right, Hap,” was the reply. “ I’ll see to 
him. But,” he added, “ Awake-in-the-Night is ahead 
of me. Hold on to the end of your rope while I go 
and help the Indian secure him.” 

198 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


As Bill approached the captive, he heard Awake- 
in-the-Night address him: 

“ Awake-in-the-Night heap glad you are caught. 
He will soon see you handed over to the thief-catchers. 
Look,” he added, “ they are coming.” 

Sure enough the two detectives were approaching 
them on a run, Mr. Petromelinski leading. He was 
closely followed by Blavinski and then by several other 
miners and by Blank and Dimitri. 


199 


CHAPTER XV 


Hunting-camp on the Slopes of Mount McKinley 

When the two detectives reached the place where 
Happy, Bill, and Awake-in-the-Night stood around the 
captured fugitive, Petromelinski stopped to slip hand¬ 
cuffs on the man. 

“ I need not tell you what I want you for ? ” he re¬ 
marked. 

“ But suppose you tell me, all the same, mister,” 
replied Mashinsky. 

“ For murder and for theft,” said the detective. “ I 
have no doubt there will be other crimes for which you 
will have to answer. A fellow like you is not apt to 
have spent much time in a country like this without 
having committed something for which the law will 
want him. But what you may have done since makes 
but little difference. We have enough against you to 
take you back to Russia for the part you took in the 
theft of the Russian diamonds and the emerald of the 
Czar of Russia. You are so much wanted in Russia 
that the czar has sent Blank, the great American de¬ 
tective, to help me run you in. This I have done with 
the aid of this bright lad,” he added, pointing to 
Happy. “ Your dance is up. You had better begin 
getting ready for the other world.” 

“ You have no cause for being so proud,” replied 
200 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Mashinsky in a bitter tone. “ If it had not been for 
the lad, whom I regret I did not succeed in killing, you 
would not have caught me yet.” 

“ I’m not denying that,” replied Petromelinski. “ So 
much was thought of the aid of the lad that a request 
was sent to him from Russia through me to secure his 
help.” 

“ As soon as you get through your chinning,” said 
Mashinsky to the detective, “ I wish some of you would 
do what you can for my right hand that the youngster’s 
bullet struck. That would be more to the point than if 
you stood around here grinning like a set of jackasses.” 

The last remark was addressed to the remainder of 
the pursuers who had collected around the prisoner. 

“ Ye had better muzzle yer potato-trap,” said the 
miner from whom Mashinsky had committed his last 
theft. Me and my pard feel disposed to shoot ye, or 
string ye up here, and so save these gents the trouble 
of hauling ye to another country. What do ye say, 
gents? ” he added, addressing the party. “ Would ye 
kere if we shoot the feller now ? ” 

“ Much obliged to you,” said Petromelinski to the 
miner. “ But this gentleman and I,” pointing to Blank, 
“ have been sent here by the Czar of Russia, against 
whom this fellow has committed many crimes. Should 
we fail to take him alive to St. Petersburg we would 
lose our standing with the czar. I am sure none of 
you would want to cause us to do that.” 

“ We sartinly would not,” was the reply. “Ye kin 
take the fellow and welcome. Of course he must hand 


201 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


over the gold-dust he has swiped from me,” said the 
man from whom the gold had been taken. “ This be 
it,” he added, taking a bag of gold-dust from one of 
the man’s pockets. “ Shall I keep it? ” he inquired. 

“ Certainly,” said the detective. “ That goes with¬ 
out saying. Of course, you will prefer a charge of 
theft against the man.” 

“ Draw up the papers, mister,” replied the man. “ I 
and my mate will put our names to them.” 

While they were getting ready to dress the man’s 
hand the miners were looking with much interest at 
the bullet shot that had disabled him. 

“ Was that a chance shot, kid?” inquired one of 
them of Happy, “ or could ye do it again ? ” 

“ I could do it again, sir, if necessary,” replied 
Happy. 

“Let me tell ye, gents,” said Bill proudly to the 
miners, “ this ’ere lad be a true gun wonder. He’s 
quick on the trigger and don’t miss what he aims at. 
I be sure ye would be surprised at what he kin do with 
gun or rifle.” 

“ Would ye feel disposed to show us, kid ? ” inquired 
the miners anxiously. “ It be but little we have in the 
way of shows here, and we’d be obliged if ye would 
show us some quick and fancy shooting.” 

“ What do ye say, Hap? ” inquired Bill. “ Will ye 
do this to please the gents ? ” 

“ Sure, Bill,” said Happy with a smile. “ But let’s 
get the man’s hand fixed first.” 

While dressing the hand Happy’s quick eye had 
202 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


detected on it the gold ring that had been stolen from 
his uncle. Removing it, he examined it and said: 

“ Look at this, Bill; as I thought, it is a ring of my 
Uncle Harry’s that I knew he prized highly. “ See,” 
he continued, showing the ring to Professor Dimitri, 
“ the initials, 4 H. E. C., from his brother/ inside 
the ring? ” 

“ This is very interesting,” remarked Dimitri, who 
had just finished dressing the man’s hand. “ Tell me,” 
he said addressing Mashinsky, “ how did you get that 
ring? I will be much obliged if you will tell me. I 
have come a great distance in an endeavor to find my 
only son, who left Russia many years ago. I have in¬ 
formation that, in company with a man named Clinton, 
he has been seen in this country near Fairbanks.” 

“ I don’t care whether you find your son or not, but 
since you have fixed my hand and made it more com¬ 
fortable, I’ll do what you ask. But, tell me, what sort 
of a looking man is the fellow you think had this ring? 
Can you describe him? ” 

“ There should be no trouble about that,” was the 
reply. “ The man stood several inches above six feet 
with his shoes off, and is magnificently developed phys¬ 
ically. I don’t believe many people would care to have 
a tussle with him.” 

“ That’s the fellow to a dot,” said Mashinsky. 
“ There can be no doubt about it. And what kind of 
a looking fellow was the other man? The one you 
think may be your son ? ” 

Dimitri rapidly described the appearance of his son. 

203 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Was his first name Nicholas and his last name 
Dimitri? ” inquired Mashinsky. 

“ That’s the man,” said Dimitri, concealing his 
anxiety and eagerness. “ Tell me where the men were 
when you saw them.” 

The man told him that it was nearly one year ago; 
that he heard the two men talking about tin prospects 
near Tin City on the Seward Peninsula; and that they 
also had claims on gold-quartz prospects somewhere 
on the McKinley Lake gold-fields, twenty-three miles 
from Cordova. 

The two detectives were greatly elated at their 
finally running down the fugitive. 

“ This will greatly please his majesty, the czar,” 
Petromelinski said to Blank, “ and will improve my 
standing with him. I shall be careful to inform him 
of the great service you have been to me. What do 
you say to accompanying me to St. Petersburg, Blank ? 
It will give you an opportunity for seeing Asia. We 
are not far from Bering Strait, and can get a boat by 
means of which we can reach Vladivostok. Of 
course, his majesty will bear all your expenses until 
you reach Philadelphia.” 

“If you are sure of the matter of expense,” replied 
Blank, “ I’ll go with you. Of course,” he added, “ we 
cannot leave this part of the world until we find Clinton 
and Dimitri.” 

“ Of course not,” replied his companion; “ but what 
shall we do with the prisoner in the meantime? He is 
204 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

a slippery fellow. If he should get away now we would 
be in a bad fix.” 

“ Put him in charge of Awake-in-the-Night,” was 
the reply. “ Happy has learned why the Indian hates 
him so much. If in his charge the man can never 
escape. That’s the way I square it.” 

“ And it’s the way I square it too,” was the reply. 

But let us for a while go back to Clinton and Dimi¬ 
tri. Shortly after the arrival of the steamship at 
Nome, thus showing that practically all the ice had 
disappeared from Bering Sea, they made arrangements 
for leaving by steamer for Cordova. Shortly before 
leaving something occurred to change their plans. 

“ Hev ye heard the news received here lately, 
Nicholas? ” inquired Clinton. “ Ef true it sartinly be 
great.” 

“To what news do you refer, Harry?” replied 
Dimitri. 

“ Of wonderful finds of copper, coal, and gold in the 
great district between Cordova and Fairbanks, in the 
valley of the Copper River.” 

“ I know the district to which you refer is wonder¬ 
fully mineralized. It has not been so attractive to 
prospectors as it would have been, owing to the diffi¬ 
culty of carrying supplies from the outside, or bring¬ 
ing its products to shipping or transportation centers. 
But now that the Copper River & Northwestern Rail¬ 
road has been completed from Cordova to Ivennecott, 
and since, moreover, it has, at the southern terminus at 
205 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Cordova, a magnificent harbor that never freezes, and 
is so shut off from the winds of the Pacific as to in¬ 
sure safety to vessels even during the prevalence of 
the most severe storms, prospectors are giving more 
attention to the district. If we had not decided to 
reach Cordova by sea, it might have been advisable to 
give up the ocean voyage and catch a boat up the 
Yukon to Rampart or some other convenient town, 
strike off toward the south and southeast to the Mount 
McKinley district, and the head waters of the Susitna, 
to the Copper River Railroad to Cordova.” 

“ But there be nothing to keep us from doing this, 
Nicholas,” replied Clinton. “ We kin change our 
plans, take a boat up the Yukon, and then reach the 
McKinley Lake region and the other districts uv which 
ye speak. Shell we do it? ” 

“ Nothing would please me better,” was the reply. 

The change of plans was made and soon the two 
men, on leaving the boat and securing a small camping 
outfit and a guide, were steadily approaching the same 
flanks of Mount McKinley the parties searching for 
them had already reached. 

When Mashinsky was handed over to the custody of 
A wake-in-the-Night, his hands were secured by hand¬ 
cuffs and his feet with ankle-irons, with which the de¬ 
tectives had provided themselves. 

“ Now black-haired rascal cannot get away,” said 
the Indian. “ Awake-in-the-Night will watch him all 
the time until he is on his way to his prison.” 

206 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ And now for the two thousand dollars’ reward for 
the capture of the man,” said Petromelinski. “ Of 
course it all goes to the lad. Don’t you think so, Bill ? ” 

“ Sure,” was the reply. “ It be true that Awake-in- 
the-Night and I were with Hap when we went together 
to pick up the feller’s trail, but Hap was all alone when 
he knocked the man’s gun out of his hand with a bullet 
and then pinned his arms to his body by his rope, and 
very neatly wuz this done, ez I have already said. In 
consequence,” continued Bill, “ I say thet the hull two 
thousand dollars goes to Hap.” 

Awake-in-the-Night was at some little distance 
guarding Mashinsky. 

“ Won’t you relieve the Indian, Blank, for a few 
minutes,” said Petromelinski, “ and tell him to come 
here? I want to ask him a question.” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night,” inquired the detective as 
soon as the man approached, “ I was saying to Bill 
that in my opinion the reward of two thousand dollars 
for catching Mashinsky all belongs to Happy. Bill 
says it does sure. What do you say? Shall it all go 
to the lad, or do you think a part should go to you? ” 

“ Awake-in-the-Night says give all to Smile-on-his- 
Face. He caught the man. Awake-in-the-Night is 
glad he got him.” 

“ But surely I have something to say about that, Mr. 
Petromelinski,” said Happy. “ I want the reward 
equally divided between Bill, the Indian, and myself.” 

“ As fer me,” said Bill, “ I don’t want it, and I hope 
ye’ll excuse me ef I say I’ll be durned ef I take it.” 

207 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ You’ll do no such thing, Bill,” said Happy, laugh¬ 
ing. “'It will give me much pleasure to give you one- 
third and Awake-in-the-Night one-third.” 

They tried to persuade Happy to change his mind, 
but as Bill said: “ Ye’d never suppose a good-natured 
chap like Hap could be so obstinate, but when he’s once 
sot his mind on what he thinks be right, ye kain’t budge 
him.” 

In this case, however, a compromise was agreed on; 
i. e., Happy was to take one thousand dollars and 
Awake-in-the-Night and Bill each five hundred dollars. 

“ Smile-on-his-Face is heap generous,” was the In¬ 
dian’s only remark. 

“ Ef I travel much more with ye, Hap,” remarked 
Bill, “ I’ll get to be a blooming millionaire. I never 
thought I’d be anything like ez rich ez I be.” 

The miners were too anxious to enjoy a good exhibi¬ 
tion of fancy shooting to forget Happy’s promise to 
show them what he could do. So he did a few things 
with his revolver and rifle that so pleased them that 
they succeeded in getting Bill to promise to try to per¬ 
suade the lad to give a further exhibition to which all 
the miners in the neighborhood would be invited. 

“ I don’t like to do this, Bill,” said the lad when Bill 
informed him as to what the miners wished. “ It looks 
as if I were stuck on myself. Now, as you know, I 
don’t think there is anything surprising in my shooting. 
It is only a matter of taking good aim, keeping my hand 
still, and pulling the trigger.” 

208 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ It may seem thet way to ye, Hap/’ remarked Bill, 
grinning, “ but it don’t seem thet way to others. It 
don’t often happen thet a feller kin do those simple 
things ye speak about. They may do one of them, but 
somehow or other they kain’t do all of them. Some 
one of them goes wrong, so that the balls don’t strike 
jest whar the fellers want them to.” 

“ Wall, ye sartinly be a wery unusual kid,” remarked 
one of the miners who overheard the above conversa¬ 
tion. “Ye are a great gun wonder fer sure, but don’t 
seem to know it.” Nevertheless, while speaking he, as 
well as all the others, was greatly pleased at the entire 
absence of pride in the lad. 

“ Suppose we put it in this way, kid,” said another of 
the miners; “ ef we ask ye to do us the favor of seeing 
ye shoot, will ye say yes? ” 

“I will sure, gentlemen,” said Happy, laughing; 
“if you name some time for me four or five days from 
now.” 

“ We’ll do it and thanks to you,” said the man. “ Ef 
you can appoint the day now, we’d like it so as to send 
messengers to all the camps in the neighborhood, so ez 
to make the day a day when we’ll have a time what ye 
might call a very big day.” 

“ All right,” said Happy. “ Suppose we say Satur¬ 
day; that will be just five days from to-day.” 

They had, of course, engaged as a guide a man thor¬ 
oughly familiar with the section of the country through 
which they had intended to pass. This man, named 
o 209 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Zeke, was of Yankee extraction. He had been in 
Alaska for the past fifteen years, and was a fairly good 
prospector, but spent most of his time as a registered 
guide, and in preserving the heads and skins of large 
game. 

Zeke was greatly attracted to Happy, especially after 
he saw some of the lad’s gun work. To Zeke, as 
perhaps to most of the men, it was the lad’s genuine 
unconsciousness of doing anything wonderful in his 
shooting that especially attracted him. 

“ That lad of yours, Bill,” said Zeke shortly after 
the brief exhibition, “ be a great chap. I like him better 
than any youngster I’ve ever seed. Kain’t ye persuade 
the gents what run this party to spare a week or so to 
do some hunting here. Although it ain’t the best time 
in the year fer sech things, yet if ye give me the chance 
I kin get shots fer ye on some of the biggest game in 
the country. And then I’d like to give the lad the 
chance of his life fer bringing down some big animals.” 

“ I like yer idee, Zeke,” said Bill. “ I feel pretty 
sartin that both Mr. Blavinski and Professor Dimitri 
will be glad for a chance at big game. I hev heard 
both say they hoped they could bag some big game 
afore they left the country. Wait here, Zeke, I’ll arsk 
the gents to come here.” 

“ Zeke,” said Blavinski, as he returned with Bill and 
Happy in company with Dimitri, “ Bill says you told 
him you believe you can give us a chance at some of the 
big game of Alaska. If we conclude to try them, can 
210 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


you take us to any good site for a camp in the neigh¬ 
borhood, where we can pitch our tent and see what kind 
of game is to be found in the mountains ? ” 

“ I kin show you a place fer a camp that I don’t be¬ 
lieve kin be beat. It’s about one thousand feet up the 
side of Mount McKinley, whar thar be good water and 
fine lakes, and in places lots of hook-and-line fishing 
for grayling and different kinds of trout.” 

“ But how about the big game? ” inquired Dimitri. 
“ Can we reasonably expect to get a shot at some of 
them ? ” 

“ Wall,” replied Zeke, “ I reckon that the Alaska 
range of mountains, in which Mount McKinley be, is 
the highest mountain range in this country. As ye 
know, Mount McKinley beats all the other mountains 
in the hull United States in height. In consequence, 
then, thar be a greater wariety of climate here than at 
most other places, so that it would seem as if there 
orter be a great wariety of all kinds of game, especially 
big game. I ain’t pretending to say jest why this be, 
but this I know, becase I hev hunted on Mount Mc¬ 
Kinley for the past fifteen years and I hev shot bear, 
moose, mountain-sheep, and caribou. Besides these 
thar be a plenty of smaller furred animals, sech ez the 
snowshoe rabbit, the cottontail rabbit, and a few black 
foxes. And then, ye’ll be likely at times to get a chance 
at the most savage of all game, the grizzly bear.” 

“ How about birds, Zeke,” inquired Dimitri; “ are 
there many to be found here ? ” 

“ Be thar any birds?” exclaimed Zeke, as if sur- 
211 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

prised at such a question. “ Thar sartinly be a many. 
Above the timber-line ye’ll find ptarmigan, while below 
it grouse; lower down on the rivers and on the flats, 
whar ye find lakes and lagoons, thar be geese, swans, 
ducks, plovers, and snipe.” 

“ Let’s stay here at least a week, Dimitri,” said Bla- 
vinski. “We have almost as good a chance to meet the 
men we are looking for here as elsewhere.” 

“ I am willing,” said Dimitri. “ What do you say, 
gentlemen? ” he inquired of the detectives. “ We have 
completed one important part of our quest. Do you 
think we will lose time by spending a whole week 
here? ” 

“ Not at all,” said the detectives, who were in great 
good humor at the capture of Mashinsky. “ We’ll stay 
around the camp on the mountain, arranging our plans 
for safely sending Mashinsky to Russia.” 

“ Then, Zeke,” said Dimitri, “ show us the way to 
the camp site you were telling us about. We’ll settle 
down there and try not to lose any time hunting some 
of the great game of Alaska.” 

“ I must tell ye, gentlemen,” said Zeke, “ that the 
game-laws of Alaska be wery strict. Sense I be one of 
its registered guides, I be under oath to see thet these 
laws be strictly carried out. The laws permit miners 
and prospectors to kill any kind of Alaska game at any 
time, provided they be in need of food, but if killed 
during the closed season the game so killed must be 
used by them only.” 


212 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ You need not worry about the license to shoot, 
Zeke,” said Blavinski. “ Hearing at Juneau that a 
license is necessary for hunting, I took the precaution 
of getting a hunting license in the name of Dimitri, 
Happy, and myself. I thought it well worth what it 
cost, two hundred and fifty dollars; for the license to 
Professor Dimitri and myself, as foreigners, cost me 
one hundred dollars each, and that for Happy cost me 
fifty dollars.” 

“ You’re the kind of gents, sir, I likes to act as guide 
fer,” said Zeke enthusiastically. “ I kin sartinly give 
you all a splendid time, now the license is out of the 
way.” 

“ I am greatly obliged to you for the license, Mr. 
Blavinski,” said Happy. “ You have done so much for 
me that nothing would please me better than for you 
to tell me something I can do for you.” 

“ Why, what a good-natured little duffer you are! ” 
exclaimed Blavinski, laughing. “ Have you not just 
done me a great service in capturing the rascal Ma- 
shinsky ? ” 

“ I have,” was the reply; “ but you should not count 
that, since you have just paid Bill, Awake-in-the- 
Night, and me, through the detectives, two thousand 
dollars.” 

“ Well,” said Blavinski, “ if you especially wish it, 
I’ll ask you to do something for me. The Czar of 
Russia is fond of the trophies of the chase. I would 
especially like, while in Alaska, to get the skins and 
heads of the different species of bears, moose, elk, 
213 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


caribou, and have them handsomely prepared as a 
gift to his majesty. Will you do this? ” 

“ I will, sure,” said Happy, actually laughing aloud. 
He was so greatly pleased at the request that his usual 
silent laugh or smile was quite insufficient properly to 
express his feeling*. “ I should only be too glad to do 
this for you as well as for his majesty, the czar, who 
you will remember has been very kind to me.” 

“ An excellent idea, my lad,” said Blavinski. 
“ Shoot the animals and I’ll have the skins and horns 
prepared and send them to the czar in your name. 
Zeke, you can put such things in a condition in which 
they can be safely shipped, can you not? ” 

“ I kin prepare ’em for ye ez well ez anyone kin, 
and ef ye do not ask me to be too saving in the prepa¬ 
ration, I kin put ’em in sech a condition that I’ll bet 
big money his majesty cannot pint to any specimen in 
his collection that’ll beat those ye give him.” 

“ Then, Zeke,” said Blavinski, “ it is understood that 
you may spend, in reason, as much money as you please 
in preparing the specimens.” 


214 


CHAPTER XVI 


Happy Saves the Life of Nicholas Dimitri 

“ Marse Hap,” inquired Scipio, the day their camp had 
been located on the slopes of Mount McKinley, about 
one thousand feet above the level of the place where the 
miners were working, “ does ye tink ye might possi¬ 
bly bring Scipio one of dem mountain-sheep what I 
hears de miners talking about? Ef what dem fellers 
says is true, de meat from dat animal be especially good 
for de table. Scipio wants to diskiver, ef possible, de 
best way to cook it. He ain’t sartin whether it would 
taste best ef it be roasted, and ef so, he should roast it 
plain or filled with rabbits. He’d like to know, when 
cooked in steaks, ef it ought to be broiled or made into 
a stew or pie, or how? ” 

“Oh, shut up, Scipio,” cried Happy; “you make, 
my mouth water. I suppose from the way you talk 
that nothing but three or four mountain-sheep will 
satisfy you. Is that So ? ” 

“ Now don’t ye go and trouble yerself to shoot a 
big lot of sheep for Scipio. By being keerful, I kin 
make three or four do. Does ye understand me, 
honey? ” 

“ I understand you, all right,” cried Happy; “ don’t 
you, Bill?” 

“ I do fer sure,” replied Bill, grinning. “ The feller 

215 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


wants ye to bring* him ez many of the critters ez ye 
kin; but he means, bring at least three or four.” 

“ Hev ye any idee, Mr. Cook,” inquired Zeke, who 
heard the above conversation, “ about how much 
one of them mountain-sheep, ye’re talking about, 
weighs ? ” 

“ I specs,” replied Scipio, “ dat when ready for cook¬ 
ing dey weigh jest what a little kid does—p’raps thirty 
or forty pounds.” 

“ Not the mountain-sheep ye get here,” replied Zeke. 
“ When dressed ye’ll seldom find them weighing less 
than from eighty to ninety pounds. Now tell Zeke, 
Mr. Cook, ef we bring four sech sheep, what could ye 
do with from three hundred and twenty to three hun¬ 
dred and sixty pounds of fresh meat in camp? It 
would spile afore it could be eaten. Ye’d better ask 
fer one sheep at a time and git it fresh. With so quick 
and sure a shot as the lad be, we ought ter get a fine 
sheep whenever we need it.” 

“ Den, Marse Hap,” said Scipio with a grin, “ I 
spect I’s made a mistake; s’pose you only bring Scipio 
one sheep and whatever other little animals, such as 
rabbits, as ye meet.” 

“ All right, Scipio,” said Happy. “ I’ll remember 
what you say.” 

“ We’ll find the mountain-sheep above the timber- 
line, whar the grazing-grounds be,” remarked Zeke, 
as they were getting ready for their first day’s 
shooting. 


216 


I he Land of Ice and Snow 


“Is Scipio right, Zeke,” inquired Bill, “when he 
sez thet the meat uv the mountain-sheep be so durned 
good to eat? ” 

“ He sartinly be right, Bill,” was the reply. “ The 
meat of the critter alius makes good eating; but, ez 
ye would expect, it be best when the grazing is best, 
and this I reckon would be, say, from July to Septem¬ 
ber. Then ye’ll find the meat so juicy and good to 
eat that, ez I hev heard some men from England say, 
even the Southdown mutton they are all so proud of 
ain’t in it with the Mount McKinley mutton.” 

“ Wall, I be glad to hear ye say thet,” replied Bill; 
“ I’ll be ready to do my share of the eating when Scipio 
gets hold of the critter. And so I reckon ye’ll be ready 
too, Hap; fer, ez I have often remarked, ye be a’most 
alius ready to eat.” 

“ I’ll promise to do my full share as far as eating is 
concerned,” replied Happy. “ I think too much of you, 
Bill, to let all the hard work in the eating line fall on 
you.” 

“ I can understand how the reindeer, moose, and elk 
can find their food in winter when it is covered by the 
deep snow, but I don’t quite see how the sheep can find 
it. How do they manage, Zeke? ” inquired Blavinski. 

“ They don’t attempt to scratch among the snow, 
sir,” replied Zeke. “ I suppose they might do this, 
though I reckon the sheep kain’t scent out their fod¬ 
der as the reindeer kin the moss. They get their eat¬ 
ing on the places on the mountains whar the wind hez 
blowed away the snow.” 


217 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Be there much vegetation in sich unkivered places, 
Zeke? ” inquired Bill. 

“ Thet’s jest it, Bill,” was the reply. “ Thar be so 
little fodder thet unless ye’d train yer eyes to see it, 
ye’d think thar war nothing at all to be found. But 
it’s thar fer all that, and the sheep grow fat on what 
they get.” 

“ What is the color of the mountain-sheep, Zeke? ” 
inquired Happy as they were approaching the high 
edge of the forest, for he was anxious to know what 
to look for. 

It be generally a pure white,” replied Zeke. “ But 
ye’ll find the tip of the tail be black and the horns hev 
a yellowish color. In course, the color waries a little; 
but, ez I hev said, it is generally white, like the color 
of snow.” 

“ Do you think we’ll have much trouble in getting 
a shot at a band, since, as you say, they are so easily 
frightened ? ” inquired Happy. 

“ Sence the critters generally travel in bands of 
from one hundred to one hundred and twenty, I reckon 
we kin hardly fail to get something. But tell me, kid, 
kin ye see far? ” 

“ I think my eyesight is as good as that of most 
people,” replied Happy. 

“ What does that mean. Bill ? ” inquired Zeke. 
“ Hez the kid only ordinary sight, or is it like his 
shooting, nothing wery remarkable? ” 

“ I see ye’re on to the kid, Zeke,” replied Bill with 
a grin. “ I hev seen keen-sighted fellers afore, but 
218 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


I hev never seed anyone who could begin to tech the 
lad in this direction.” 

As was natural, the conversation frequently turned 
to the Alaska game-laws. As a result of these and 
other conversations, they learned that the game-laws of 
Alaska had been drawn so as to protect all animals 
except eagles, ravens, and cormorants. 

By “ game-animals ” the law means deer, moose, 
caribou, mountain-sheep, mountain-goats, brown bears, 
sea-lions, and the walrus. By game-birds are meant 
such water-fowl as ducks, geese, brant, and swans, 
and such shore-birds as the plover, snipe, curlew, and 
several species of ptarmigan and grouse. 

The great extent of Alaska renders it necessary, in 
order to protect the game-animals, during different 
seasons of the year, to divide the country into zones, 
according to the latitude. For example, the laws per¬ 
mit brown bears, moose, caribou, mountain-sheep, 
walrus, and sea-lions to be killed any time from August 
first to December tenth, north of latitude 62°, and deer 
and mountain-goats from April first to February first. 
Caribou are protected on the Kenai Peninsula until 
August twentieth. 

A sensible provision for the protection of game in a 
country where the differences in climate are so marked, 
empowers the commissioner of agriculture to modify 
the close seasons, above mentioned, in certain parts of 
the country. 

It is very properly declared unlawful for anyone 
219 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


to kill a female or yearling moose. It also limits the 
number of animals one person can legally kill during 
any single year to not more than two moose, one wal¬ 
rus or sea-lion, three caribou, three mountain-sheep, 
and three brown bears. 

There was one section of the game-laws that Bla- 
vinski had carefully considered; that is, that non-resi¬ 
dent sportsmen wishing to send specimens out of the 
country are limited to a certain number. When killed 
north of latitude 62°, this number was only four deer, 
three caribou, three mountain-sheep, three mountain- 
goats, and three brown bears during any one year. 

By the advice of Zeke some of them had brought 
fishing-rods and lines, since he promised them sport in 
fishing, either for trout or for grayling. 

“ There are,” he said, “ wery few streams in this 
part of Alaska in which ye kain’t catch grayling.” 

Grayling may be properly regarded as game-fish. 
They take a fly greedily and put up a good fight for a 
few moments. The best fly for this fish is the black 
gnat. They were able to catch many grayling which, 
when Scipio was through with them, made excellent 
eating, since they contained a white meat possessing 
an excellent flavor. 

Another species of game-fish common in Alaska is 
the trout. Of this fish there are at least five different 
kinds; namely, the rainbow, the dolly-varden, the lake, 
the cutthroat, and the* steel-head trout. 

It was the steel-head trout that interested them the 
most. This fish always accompanies a run of salmon 
220 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


to their spawning-ground; for, during the salmon sea¬ 
son, it lives on the salmon eggs. The steel-head is 
commonly eighteen inches in length, but sometimes 
attains twice that size. 

The lake trout is an inhabitant of the large lakes 
of the interior of Alaska. It reaches a considerable 
size and is an excellent game-fish, making a great fight 
to resist being pulled in. 

While making their way up the flanks of Mount 
McKinley to the upper limit of the timber-line, Happy 
noticed tracks that were new to him. Bill and Zeke, 
who had gone ahead a little to one side, had missed see¬ 
ing them, while the others were some distance behind. 

“ I’d prefer having the animal that made those 
tracks some distance from me,” said Happy to himself, 
“ and shall have my rifle handy. I would certainly 
need it should the animal be disposed to go for me.” 

He then began to examine the tracks carefully. 

“ The animal’s feet are fully a foot and a half in 
length, and are armed with great claws,” he said. 
“ From the distance between its strides, the animal 
must have a body between eight and nine feet long.” 

Happy continued thinking over what he saw before 
him, and then said to himself: 

“ I can only think of one such animal that Zeke said 
we might find here, and that is a grizzly. Now I think 
of it, the tracks are not unlike those of the bear tracks 
I have seen in Texas. I guess I’d better call Bill and 
Zeke. They should know of this.” 

221 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

With that Happy uttered a cry closely resembling 
that of a bird that he and Bill frequently used for call¬ 
ing each other. 

Bill and Zeke were together when the call was heard. 

“ Do ye hear that, Bill? ” inquired Zeke. 

“ I hear it all right,” said Bill. “ That’s Hap’s 
signal.” 

“ What does it mean, Bill ? ” inquired Zeke. 

“ It means, 4 Come, Bill, I want to talk to you.’ ” 

“ Then,” said Zeke, “ we’d better hurry to the lad. 
There’s no telling what he might hev seed on this 
mountain.” 

Bill repeated the call, thus letting Happy know he 
had heard it and was coming. At the same time 
Happy repeated the call now and then, so as to help 
Bill in locating him. 

“ What do ye want, Hap ? ” inquired Bill as he and 
Zeke came running to where the lad was still examin¬ 
ing the tracks. 

“ Look at these tracks, Bill,” replied the lad, point¬ 
ing to the markings. 

“ Howling wildcats! ” exclaimed Zeke in surprise. 
“ Them two critters sartinly be full size, beant they, 
Bill?” 

“ They be that,” replied Bill, and then turning to 
the lad he said: “ And what hev ye made of these 
tracks, Hap? I don’t think ye hev ever seed sech afore. 
But I know that would not keep that big brain of yours 
from supposing. Now tell me, Hap, what ye hev sup¬ 
posed they be.” 


222 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I think, Bill,” replied Happy, “ the marks are like 
the bear tracks you taught me to recognize in Texas, 
only these are much bigger. Why, the two animals 
who made these must have feet a foot and a half in 
length. I was guessing when I first saw them what 
the length of the body was, judging from the strides of 
the animal, or the distance between steps.” 

“ And what did ye make it to be, Hap? ” said Bill, 
looking toward Zeke with a grin that showed how 
proud he was of his pupil. 

“ I should say that the animal’s body is between 
eight and nine feet in length.” 

“ And hev ye come to any conclusion as to what the 
name of the animal be ? ” 

“ I’m not certain, Bill,” was the reply, “ but from 
what Zeke has told me of the animals we might meet 
here, I think they must be grizzlies.” 

“ Ye be quite right, Hap. Them marks be made by 
grizzlies, and ef I read the marks right they be big 
fellows, sartinly ez big ez ye hev judged and perhaps 
even bigger. What do ye think of the lad’s guess, 
Zeke?” 

“ I kin only say, Bill,” replied Zeke in genuine de¬ 
light, “ that lad of yours be a wonder in other things 
than shooting. He’s ez bright as they generally cum. 
In fact, he’s a durned sight brighter.” 

“ What shall we do, Zeke, go on and follow the 
trail or wait for the others? ” inquired Happy. 

“ By rights thar be only one thing we should do,” 
was the reply. “ Ef sech ugly fellows ez grizzlies be 
223 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


about we must let the others know. We don’t want 
no chance shots made at them. Ef we shoot it must 
be with big balls, and the shots must be made to go in 
the only two places whar they’ll kill the critter to once, 
for unless we’re sartin of killing we be durned fools to 
shoot them at all.” 

By this time the others had reached them. When 
told what the tracks were, Blavinski said to Happy and 
Bill: 

“ Do you remember, my lad, what Professor Dimitri 
and I said to you and Bill when we made you a present 
of the rifles you have with you, that the time might 
come when to have such rifles in the hands of two 
like you and Bill, who know how to use them, might 
more than repay us for the money they cost ? ” 

“ Do you know how dangerous an animal a grizzly 
bear is to attack, Happy?” said Professor Dimitri. 
“ Tell him, Bill.” 

“ I reckon Hap knows without me telling him,” re¬ 
plied Bill. 

“ I know the animal is difficult to kill,” said Happy; 
“ and unless he is shot either in the brain or in the 
heart, by a ball from a gun that can give him a power¬ 
ful shock, he will live long enough to kill you before 
he dies.” 

“ Jest so, kid,” said Zeke; “or, ez I hev heard it 
wery well put, when a fellow kills a grizzly, the tarna¬ 
tion beast will live long enough to rush at him, give 
him a swipe with one of his big paws, and ask him to 
please jine in his funeral.” 


224 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Think of getting a blow from an eighteen-inch 
paw, armed with claws fully five inches in length, 
Happy,” said Professor Dimitri. 

“ And a blow from an animal weighing at least eight 
hundred pounds, and the length of whose body is from 
eight to nine feet,” added Blavinski. 

‘‘Shall we follow the grizzlies, Zeke?” inquired 
Blavinski. “ You’re the guide. We do whatever you 
say.” 

“ What do ye think, Bill? ” inquired Zeke. 

“ I would advise,” replied Bill, “ that we go on arter 
mountain-sheep, ez we intended. We won’t let the 
grizzlies stop us unless they try to prevent us. In that 
case we’ll go agin the bars.” 

“ That’s the talk, Bill,” said Zeke. “ We’ll take your 
advice.” 

Keeping up the mountain until they reached the 
upper limit of the snow-line, they at last saw a flock 
of sheep. 

“ I’m afraid they be too far off to hit,” said Zeke, 
“ and yet the wind is blowing toward them. Perhaps 
we’d better try.” 

“ I’m sure my rifle will carry that far,” said Happy. 
“ Shall I try? ” 

“ Do so,” said Zeke. “ I’ll shoot too, but I’m sure 
they are too far off for my rifle.” 

Both Happy and Zeke fired and one of the animals 
fell, the others scampering off. 

“ That be your shot, kid,” said Zeke. “ My ball 
225 


p 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


went wide of the mark. Ye see the distance war too 
great, as I feared.” 

As they were about running to examine the dead 
animal, two things happened that surprised and hor¬ 
rified them. The thing that surprised them was to 
see two men running toward the sheep from a point 
several hundred yards on their right. The thing that 
horrified them, was the sight of two immense grizzlies 
running down the mountain toward the dead sheep. 
The grizzlies were evidently very hungry and intended 
to get the animal or know why. 

Happy rapidly focused his glasses, and cried in dis¬ 
may, “ Bill, one of those men is my Uncle Harry! ” 

“And the other man is my son, Nicholas!” cried 
Professor Dimitri, also employing glasses. 

“ Thet be a wery dangerous thing to do,” said Zeke, 
as he saw the man that Dimitri recognized as his son 
run toward the nearer bear and aim his rifle at the 
animal and fire it. “ Onless he hit the critter right, it 
will kill him sure. The tall feller sees the danger and 
be trying to keep his pard back, but he kin not per¬ 
suade him. See! ” he cried in horror, “ the animal he 
shot at be going fer him! ” 

The grizzly, which was only enough hurt to suffer 
considerable pain, ran with ominous growlings to¬ 
ward the man. When quite near, it sat on its haunches 
angrily glaring at its enemy, and then suddenly rushed 
with almost incredible speed toward him. 

226 



“ The other animal . . . made for 
Happy ” Page 227 



















The Land of Ice and Snow 


And now Happy did what must be regarded as one 
of the pluckiest and most sensible things he had ever 
done. He took the chance of saving the life of Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri’s son. There was a great danger of 
the shot striking the man rather than the bear. But 
then the lad was a wonderful shot and was not in the 
habit of getting excited, so he sensibly concluded to 
take the chances. 

He had very little time, but it was ample for some 
of his fancy shooting. During the small fraction of a 
second, while the animal’s head was pointing straight 
toward him, he fired his rifle and planted a bullet di¬ 
rectly between his eyes and therefore through the 
brain. As the animal fell and momentarily exposed 
its side another bullet was sent directly through the 
heart. 

The .30-.40 soft-nose balls and the smokeless powder 
were of such a nature that the shocking-power of the 
ball was very great, so that the animal fell dead within 
a foot of the man, who had fainted from horror. 

The other animal at first rushed toward Clinton, but 
hearing the shots and seeing its mate fall, it changed 
its mind and made for Happy. The lad, who still had 
several cartridges in his rifle, quietly stood his ground, 
not firing until the animal was only a hundred feet off, 
when he sent a bullet through its head directly between 
the eyes. Although the rifle-ball passed through the 
animal’s brain, yet the tenacity of life was so great that 
it struggled furiously to rush at Happy in an endeavor 
to insure another funeral, but staggering, momentarily 
227 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


exposed its side to the lad; he remained as cool as if 
he had only been aiming at a mark, and sent a bullet 
through its heart, when it fell dead within a few feet of 
the lad. 

The wonderful rifle practice of Happy, for it was 
indeed most wonderful, greatly astonished all who 
saw it. 

“ Thet beats anything I hev ever seed, or anything 
I ever expect to see,” said Zeke enthusiastically. 
“ That man ez surely owes his life to the wonderful 
skill and coolness of the lad ez there be a sun shining 
jist now in the sky. I hev been among shooting men 
most of my life, but I’ll be durned ef I’d believe shoot¬ 
ing could be done ez it hez been done jist now, unless 
I seed it fer myself.” 

As to Professor Dimitri, he remained only long 
enough to say to Happy: 

“ I will not attempt now, Happy, to say all I feel. 
It certainly is to you that I owe the life of my son, but 
I’ll talk more of this after I go to see him,” and then 
started off on a run to Nicholas, who was still lying 
in a faint on the ground. 

“ Don’t touch either of the critters,” cried Zeke, 
rushing after Professor Dimitri. “ There may still 
be life in them, although I think they be quite dead.” 

“ Hap,” said Bill, “ ye hev sartinly done a most 
wonderful thing—a thing so onusual that Bill knows 
it will be spoke of in all parts of this blooming coun¬ 
try ez soon ez the news uv it spreads. And Bill knows 
228 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the news will spread tarnation quick. Bill is indeed 
proud the lad what hez done this thing be his friend. 
But,” continued Bill in astonishment as he saw the 
lad’s face, “ I’ll be durned ef ye don’t acterally seem to 
think thet ye hev not done so much arter all.” 

“ I am certainly very glad to have been able to do 
what I have done, Bill,” replied Happy, “ but don’t 
you see it was not so very wonderful after all. I 
merely aimed twice for each bear and did not flunk.” 

“ Thar now, Hap,” exclaimed Bill, “ shet up, please, 
and don’t say anything else or ye’ll make Bill angry. 
But, no,” he almost immediately added, “ ye kain’t 
do that sence Bill knows ye be honest and acterally ain’t 
stuck on yerself even now.” 

“ No, Bill,” exclaimed Blavinski, “ Happy is not 
stuck on himself. As I have said before, Happy is a 
jolly little duffer, and I add to that he is the most 
sensible little duffer I have ever seen and ever expect 
to see. Do you know, my lad,” he continued, “ I have 
always greatly liked you; now I actually love you. 
How little I imagined when we made you a present of 
that rifle the use to which you would put it. Be sure 
that what you have done to-day will give you the good 
opinion of the Dimitris and, therefore, of the Czar 
of Russia, who, as you know, is their relative. But let 
us join the others. You will naturally want to speak 
with your uncle.” 


229 


CHAPTER XVII 


Happy Finds his Uncle and Professor Dimitri 
his Son 

Clinton and Dimitri had taken one of the Yukon 
River boats at St. Michael on Norton Sound, about 
fifty miles from the mouth of the Yukon. St. Michael 
is one of the most important towns in Alaska, since it 
is here that all the ocean-steamer traffic is transferred 
to steamers up the Yukon. The two men had planned, 
as already mentioned, to go up the river to Tanana, 
and then strike across the country to the south for the 
McKinley Lake gold region near Cordova. 

The Yukon is the greatest of all the rivers of Alaska, 
and ranks in size as the fifth largest river of North 
America, being only exceeded in length by the Mis¬ 
sissippi, the Winnipeg, the Nelson, and the St. Law¬ 
rence. It drains an area of more that two hundred 
thousand square miles. Its length is about twenty- 
three hundred miles, but if the windings are taken into 
account, the distance from its head waters in Canadian 
territory to its mouth is probably three thousand miles. 

The Yukon enters the territory of the United States 
at Eagle. From this place it flows northwestwardly to 
Fort Yukon above the Arctic circle. Here it takes a 
big bend and continues in a southwesterly course to its 
mouth. Its total length in the United States is one 
230 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

thousand miles. Some of its more important tribu¬ 
taries in this country are the Porcupine, the Chandalar, 
the Tanana, the Koyukuk, and the Inoco. 

The largest tributary of the Yukon is the Tanana. 
Counting its windings, this river has a length of 
nearly one thousand miles, although, taken in a straight 
line from its source to its mouth, the distance is only 
five hundred miles. 

While on the subject of Alaskan rivers, it may be 
said that the second largest river is the Kuskoquim, a 
river that has its head waters on Mount McKinley. It 
flows in a general westerly and southwesterly direction, 
emptying into Kuskoquim Bay, after passing through a 
distance of nearly one thousand miles. Unlike the 
waters of the Yukon, those of the Kuskoquim are 
nearly as clear as crystal. 

It is an interesting fact that in one part of its course 
the Kuskoquim flows within sixty miles 61 the Yukon, 
the watershed between the two rivers being compara¬ 
tively low. 

The principal rivers draining the Arctic slopes of 
Alaska are the Kobuk and the Noatak, discharging 
into Kotzebue Sound, and the Colville, discharging 
directly into the Arctic. 

The principal rivers of the Pacific Coast are the 
Susitna and the Copper rivers. Both of these streams 
are navigable in parts of their courses, the Susitna 
emptying into Cook Inlet, and the Copper River into 
the Gulf of Alaska near Prince William Sound. 

The Susitna River has its head waters in the Alas- 
231 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

kail mountain range, from which Mount McKinley 
rises. 

The Copper River is the most important of the south 
Alaskan rivers. Its head waters are in the mountains 
that divide the Pacific Coast slope from the Tanana 
Valley. This river flows in a nearly due southerly 
direction, through a distance of about three hundred 
miles. There are serious obstacles to navigation near 
its mouth, such as great glaciers, dangerous rapids, and 
a delta with mud flats, etc. At a distance of seventy 
miles above its mouth, however, there is an abundance 
of water, with favorable conditions for transportation 
by ordinary river steamboats. 

Owing to the construction of the Copper River & 
Northwestern Railroad, a description of which will 
subsequently be given, the country drained by this 
river, as well as that lying between Fairbanks and 
Cordova, has recently been opened to tidewater. 

The above information as to Alaskan rivers has 
been condensed from an admirable article in the 
“ Alaska Almanac for 1909,” from which other im¬ 
portant authentic information has been obtained. 

In the upper portion of its course the Yukon flows 
through a canonlike valley. Shortly after entering 
Alaska, from the Dominion of Canada, it crosses a 
plateau or high plain. This portion of the river valley 
forms what is called the tundra region. Here the 
channel is wide and the flow sluggish, especially on 
the flats near Fort Yukon, where, by islands and cut- 
232 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


offs, the channel has an increased breadth of from ten 
to thirty miles. Farther down the stream, near Fort 
Hamilton, it again flows between precipitous moun¬ 
tains, and then again widens until the great delta near 
its mouth is reached. This delta region has an area of 
fully nine thousand square miles. 

“ This is an old town, Harry,” remarked Dimitri 
while strolling through St. Michael, where they had 
gone to take the steamboat up the Yukon. 

“ It be for a fact,” was the reply. “ Ez we hev 
plenty of time, suppose we take a look at the military 
post, whar ye kin see cannon that be more than a 
hundred year old.” 

“ I suppose,” remarked Dimitri upon examining 
them, “ that these old guns were regarded as great 
engines of war when they were first placed here. How 
absurdly small they seem when compared with the big 
guns we use now in our coast defense, or on our iron¬ 
clad vessels.” 

“ Ye sartinly be right, Nicholas,” replied Clinton; 
“ and yet, ez I understand it, these guns wuz actually 
great when placed here; that is, great ez compared with 
the guns used afore this time.” 

There are to be seen along the banks of the Yukon 
many Indian villages, consisting for the greater part of 
wretchedly built huts, filthy in the extreme, and in¬ 
habited by squalid and low-grade people. Many of 
these places, however, had been abandoned years ago. 
233 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


In strong contrast were towns that owed their 
growth to mining enterprises. In many cases these 
towns compared favorably with large towns and cities 
of the States. They have their systems of water 
supply, electric lights, telephone and telegraph lines, 
and frame and stone houses supplied with all the mod¬ 
ern conveniences. 

Both men had passed up and down the Yukon before, 
so that to them the cities had lost their novelty. They 
passed a number of mining and other towns. The 
first of importance was Kaltag, where the winter trail 
leaves the river and goes directly across the country 
to Norton Sound. Here the military telegraph to St. 
Michael leaves the river. Then they passed Nulato, 
forty miles above Kaltag. 

They passed many other towns before Tanana, op¬ 
posite the mouth of the Tanana River on the banks of 
the Yukon, was reached. This town had grown 
rapidly since the development of the mines at Fair¬ 
banks. 

On reaching Tanana they proceeded up the river, 
and then, having obtained good mounts, went toward 
the eastern flanks of Mount McKinley, where the exci¬ 
ting event related in the preceding chapter occurred to 
Happy and his party. 

Going back to the shooting of the two grizzlies, 
when Clinton saw that his friend Nicholas Dimitri, 
despite his warning, had aimed at the grizzly and only 
234 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


wounded it, he ran toward him in order to aid in the 
terrible fight he saw must occur. He would have shot 
at the animal had not his friend been in the direct line 
of fire and he feared killing him. Moreover, the other 
bear was hastening toward him. 

With horror he saw the wounded and infuriated 
beast rush angrily toward his friend. 

“ It be all up with Nicholas,” he said as he saw his 
friend drop to the ground in a dead faint. “ I don’t 
believe I keer to live ef my chum be killed. I reckon 
I’ll jine him and put up the best fight I kin.” 

And then he saw Happy for the first time. He had 
been looking at the sheep, at the bear, and his friend, 
so that he had not before seen the lad. 

“ That sartinly be a wery little kid to tote a rifle like 
the one he hez. I wonder ef it war him or one of the 
other men what killed the sheep. However, I kain’t 
stop to ax meself sech questions now, I must look arter 
Nicholas.” 

But something occurred that astonished the man 
still more. The grizzly had nearly reached his friend, 
in a direction almost in a straight line between his 
friend and the boy. It would certainly be dangerous 
for the boy to shoot, since the bullet might strike the 
man. Without any hesitation, however, the boy raised 
his rifle and, apparently without taking any especial 
aim, sent a bullet directly between the animal’s eyes. 
As the beast fell over on its side, another quick shot 
sent a bullet in his side near the forepaw, and the beast 
fell dead within a few feet of the still unconscious man. 
235 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Ef I ever get out of this alive/’ said the man again 
to himself, “ I must sartinly get to know that kid. He 
be a great gun wonder fer sure. Somehow or other, I 
feel drawed toward him as ef I hed seed him before. 
But this kin hardly be. How could I ever hev seed the 
chap before? ” 

A shout from Bill and Zeke caused Clinton to look 
around, only to see the mate of the animal charging 
toward him with hideous cries. It had seen the falling 
of its mate. Suddenly it made two changes in the 
direction in which it was rushing. First it made for 
its mate, as if to see what ailed it. Then, as if having 
concluded that it was Happy who had caused the trou¬ 
ble, again changed its direction and rushed directly 
toward him. 

“ Look out fer yerself, kid! ” cried Clinton. “ The 
animal be coming slap toward ye. Ef ye kin shoot do 
so, or it’ll soon be all over with ye. I darsn’t shoot 
sence, ez ye kin see, I might hit ye.” 

After thus speaking, the man stood still with his 
rifle in place, ready to shoot as soon as the change in 
direction of the animal would permit him to do so 
without danger of striking the lad. 

“ Holy smoke! ” cried the man. “ Why don’t ye 
run, kid.” But Happy stood his ground, apparently 
free from alarm. The distance between the angry 
grizzly and the lad grew very small when again the 
rifle came to the lad’s shoulder, and almost immediately 
a ball was sent directly between the brute’s eyes. Then, 
as the animal fell over, and its side was momentarily 
236 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


exposed, another shot followed and the animal fell 
quite dead with the second bullet through its heart 
and only a few feet from the shooter. 

“ Don’t go near the animal, kid! ” cried the man. 
ei Ye be a wonderful shot. I’ll talk to ye as soon ez I 
see ef my pard needs my help.” 

When Happy and Blavinski reached Nicholas Dimi¬ 
tri, they found he had regained consciousness and was 
surrounded by Professor Dimitri, Zeke, and Clinton. 
They heard Clinton speaking. 

“ Ye war never nearer death than just a little while 
ago, Nicholas,” he said. “ Ef some of the most won¬ 
derful shooting I hev ever seed hed not been done, ye’d 
be dead now fer sartin instead of lying there com¬ 
fortable like within a foot only uv the critter who 
wanted ye.” 

“ I don’t remember just what has happened, Harry,” 
replied Nicholas. “ It was all so quick. I probably 
shot at the beast, but only hurt and angered it. When 
I saw it coming so swiftly toward me I tried to shoot 
again, but somehow or other I fell over in a dead faint. 
Tell me all about itT 

“ This here lad put two bullets in the critter; one 
through its brain and the other through its heart. 
It war a risky thing to do, sence the shot might have 
killed ye instead of the bar. But it didn’t. But I see 
now it warn’t ez risky ez I thought, sence I know how 
true the lad kin shoot. I’ll tell you about it arter a 
while.” 

“ How does it happen that you are in this country, 
237 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

father? ” said the man, recognizing Professor Dimitri. 
“ Did the lad whom my chum says saved my life come 
with you ? ” 

“Yes, Nicholas; he is one of our party,” was the 
reply. 

“ Is that you, Colorado Bill? ” inquired Clinton in a 
surprised tone, now recognizing Bill. “ What be you 
doing way up here in this blooming country? Were 
you with the party what brung the kid here ? ” 

“ The lad ye mentioned be in our party, and I reckon 
it be a mighty lucky thing that he cum here the time he 
did, otherwise your friend thar would hev been dead 
fer sure.” 

“ I'm free to say, Bill,” remarked Clinton, “ that 
my chum sartinly owes his life to the lad. Sech shoot¬ 
ing as I hev jist seed beats anything I would hev 
thought possible.” 

“ Thar’s whar ye be right, stranger,” cried Zeke. 
“ I reckon that, like myself, ye hev seed lots of won¬ 
derful gun play, and like me agree that the youngster 
beats the band ez a sure and quick shot.” 

“ Gentlemen,” said Professor Dimitri, “ let me in¬ 
troduce you to my son Nicholas Dimitri, one of the 
men for whom we have been looking. This is my friend 
Petrof Blavinski, who joined me in the search.” 

“ And this,” said Happy, offering his hand to Clin¬ 
ton, “ is Nicholas Dimitri’s partner, Harry E. Clinton, 
of Texas.” 

“ Wall,” cried Clinton in astonishment, giving the 
lad a warm clasp of the hand, “ so ye be a kind of 
238 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


wizard ez well ez a gun wonder! Who be ye what 
tumbles to my name so quick like ? ” 

“ Don’t you remember me, Uncle Harry? I’m the 
little kid you and Bill once knew down on the Texan 
ranch. I am somewhat older now. You have changed 
but little. I knew you at once.” 

“ Wall, I sartinly be astonished not a few,” cried 
Clinton; “ but I be wery glad and wery proud to 
know that my nephy be so likable a chap. Give us 
yer paw agin, Ralph,” he said, holding his hands out 
to Happy. 

But, somehow or other, a mere shake of the hand 
was not enough to express the man’s delight for, 
changing his mind, he grasped Happy with both hands 
and, lifting him from the ground, hugged him not en¬ 
tirely unlike the grizzly intended to do. 

“ I asks your pardon, Ralph, and yours too, gents,” 
he cried; “ but I’m so all-fired glad to see the youngster 
agin, and so proud of the kind of chap I hev seed him 
to be, that I kind of let my feelings get the best of 
me.” 

“ That’ll do, Uncle Harry. I forgive you. Please 
don’t squeeze me so hard. I don’t believe the grizzlies 
would have hugged me very much harder than you 
have. Do you?” he added, laughing as his uncle re¬ 
leased him. “ I don’t think any of my ribs are broken, 
though I could not have stood it much longer.” 

“ And how be your father, my brother, Ralph, and 
the rest of the family? ” inquired Clinton. “ Are they 
still living in Texas?” 

239 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ They are all in good health, Uncle Harry,” was the 
reply. “ They are still living in Texas, although not in 
the same place. Father has bought a large tract of 
land nearer the gulf than the old place and is laying 
it out in fruit, vegetables, and as a cattle ranch.” 

“ Ye forgot, Hap,” said Bill, “ to tell yer Uncle 
Harry who found the cash to buy that ’ere land.” 

“ Why do ye call the lad ‘ Hap ’? ” inquired Clin¬ 
ton. “ I know that a female kin change her name 
when she marries, but I never knowed a male fellow 
could. How did you get that new name, Ralph? ” 

“ Tell him, Bill,” said Happy. 

“ Hap be short fer Happy,” said Bill. “Ye hev 
been so long from yer home, Harry, that ye don’t know 
yer brother took his family to Philadelphia. Here 
Ralph was knowed ez ‘ Happy Clinton,’ because he is 
so durned sure that everything what happens to him be 
good luck. We hev cut the name down to Hap. I’ll 
tell ye about it arter a while; fer, ez ye kin see, the 
other gents here hev much to chin about, and we must 
give them a chance.” 

“ Interduce me to this here gent, Bill,” said Clinton. 

“ Sartinly, Harry,” was the reply. “ This be our 
hunting-guide. He tells us his name be Zeke. Ef I 
knowed the rest of his name I’d trot it out fer ye; 
being ez I don’t, I’ll let it go at Zeke.” 

“ Ez long ez I don’t kick,” remarked Zeke, “ thar 
will be no harm done in only calling me Zeke.” 

“ Do ye reckon ye kin give your party good shoot- 
240 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ing?” inquired Harry. “ How many days hev ye 
been on the hunt ? Be this a regular day’s kill ? ” 

“ I’m thinking one mountain-sheep and two grizzlies 
will be good enough fer one day’s work,” said Zeke 
with a smile. “ I can’t say what other days will show 
up, but ef they be ez good ez this one I reckon all 
should be satisfied.” 

While this conversation had been going on, Happy 
had been reloading his magazine rifle. 

“ I see ye hev been well brought up in the shooting 
line, Ralph,” said Clinton. “ It be a good rule never 
to carry an unloaded gun. Ye never know when ye 
might want to use it. Who taught ye how to shoot ? ” 

“ Bill,” replied the lad. 

“ Then Bill hez a right to be durned proud of his 
pupil,” said Clinton. “ Shake, Bill,” he said, grasping 
the man’s hand. “ I congratulate you.” 

“ I know I hev a right to be proud, Harry,” replied 
Bill, “ and I’m free to confess that I be proud.” 

“ Uncle Harry,” said Happy, anxious to change the 
conversation, “ I found something here in Alaska that 
belongs to you. Better take it now,” he added, hand¬ 
ing him the gold ring he had taken from Mashinsky’s 
finger. 

“ This sartinly be mine, Ralph; whar did you find 
it?” 

“ On a man’s finger,” was the reply. 

“Be that man a black-haired Russian?” inquired 
Harry eagerly. “ Ef he be, I owe him a tarnation 
thrashing. I’d like to see him.” 

Q 241 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I reckon we kin accommodate yer, Harry,” said 
Bill. “We hev the same identical black-haired Rus¬ 
sian in our camp down the mountain, with hand¬ 
cuffs on his wrists, and ring-irons on his legs, waiting 
to be took to Russia to be hanged fer murder and other 
things he hez done agin the law.” 

“ Ef thet be the case,” replied Clinton, “ I kin fer- 
give him the thrashing he hez arned from me.” 

“ I’d be obliged if some of you gents would help me 
to cut up these critters,” said Zeke to Bill and Harry. 
“ We’ll get some of the meat of the sheep to camp and 
leave it with Scipio.” 

“ I wish you to do your best with one of the grizzlies, 
Zeke,” said Blavinski. “ You won’t object to my 
sending to the Czar of Russia the head and skin of 
the animal that so nearly killed Nicholas Dimitri, will 
you, Happy? ” 

“Not at all, sir,” was the reply; “and if you so 
wish, please do the same thing with the animal that 
tried to kill me.” 

“ Thank you,” said Blavinski, much pleased. “ I’ll 
send it to the czar with your compliments. Don’t for¬ 
get, Zeke,” added Blavinski, “ that I want you to 
spare no expense in preparing the heads and skins of 
these animals. I want them to equal any his majesty 
has in his collection of the trophies of the chase.” 

“ Ye can be sure I’ll see to it all right, sir,” replied 
Zeke to Blavinski. “ I hev never seed the equal uv 
these bars. By acteral measurement, I find they beat 
242 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


anything I ever heard uv in the mountains. Sure, I’ll 
fix up their heads and furs; they be things well worth 
keeping.” 

“ Do the best you can with them,” said Blavinski. 
“ We will want some help in dressing the animal and 
carrying the furs to our camp. Won’t you go and get 
Awake-in-the-Night to come here, Bill, if you can find 
someone to take his place in guarding Mashinsky.” 

“ I’ll go with you, Bill,” said Happy. 


243 


CHAPTER XVIII 


What Followed the Shooting of the Grizzlies 

“ Wait a minute, Hap,” said Bill, as they were start¬ 
ing off for the camp. “ I might ez well take Scipio 
the best of the sheep meat so he kin get it ready for 
eating when we all return.” 

“ Cut the sheep in two, Bill,” said Happy, “ and I’ll 
carry some.” 

“ In that case,” replied Bill, “ we kin take the hull 
critter atween us.” 

This was soon done, and the two made their way 
down the mountain toward the camp. 

“ It be great news we’re taking to them detective 
fellers, Hap, about finding the other two men we war 
looking fer,” exclaimed Bill. “ It’ll sartinly surprise 
’em a big lot, don’t ye think ? ” 

“ It will surprise them all right,” was the reply. 
“ But it will be a pleasant surprise.” 

“ I war thinking that ef I had come so fur to find 
the two men, I’d be a kind uv disappinted like ef I 
war not thar when the men war found. Don’t ye think 
ye would ? ” 

<f That’s true, Bill; but there was no reason for 
either Mr. Blank or Mr. Petromelinski being with us 
this morning. We went on a hunt while the detect¬ 
ives remained at camp to consider plans for safely 
244 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


sending Mashinsky to Russia. No blame can be at¬ 
tached properly to them for being away.” 

“ Ye be right, Hap,” exclaimed Bill. And then, as 
if to change the subject, he added: “That big uncle 
of yours be in wery good condition, Hap. He is sar- 
tinly a well-built fellow. He be much taller than your 
father, Happy.” 

“ Father is fairly tall and well built,” was the reply, 
“ but he cannot begin to touch Uncle Harry. How 
do you like Professor Dimitri’s son, Bill? He looks 
like his father, don’t he?” 

“ Wery much so, Hap. I like the gentleman all 
right; though it does seem kind of bad to me thet a 
man should go off in a dead faint, like a woman, jest 
at a time when he orter be in first-class fighting condi¬ 
tion. But I reckon a feller kain’t always help actin’ 
out his natur’.” 

“ You must not conclude, Bill,” remarked Happy, 
“ that the man lacks courage because he fainted at the 
time he did. He is a highly intellectual man, and it is 
often the case with such men that they are very sensi¬ 
tive to what occurs. I should not be surprised if on 
more extended acquaintance we find he is braver than 
an ordinary man.” 

“ I declar, Marse Hap,” exclaimed Scipio, as the two 
men brought him the two parts of the body of the 
mountain-sheep. “ Dis heah meat looks all right. 
Scipio don’t hesitate to tell ye dat it be prime. Ef ye 
don’t say anything, I’ll hev some of it ready fer ye 
245 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

when ye all come back. Did ye shoot anything else? ” 
he added. 

When Bill told him of the grizzlies and of the danger 
to which they had been exposed, the man exclaimed : 

“Ye sartinly must take better kere of yerself, Marse 
Hap. Ef dat bar hed killed ye, what would poor 
Scipio hev done? Don’t ye go after any old grizzlies. 
Let ’em alone, and ez I hev been told, dey’ll let ye 
alone.” 

“But, Scipio,” inquired Bill, grinning, “suppose, 
one of those grizzlies war going like mad fer one of 
us, you wouldn’t like us to let ’em alone then, would 
ye?” 

“ I specs in dat case I’d say ‘ shoot.’ But don’t ye 
get put in sech a place offener than ye can help, Marse 
Hap,” added Scipio. 

“ I imagine that is the meat of a mountain-sheep, 
Bill,” remarked Petromelinski, as he and Blank ap¬ 
proached them. “ If it tastes as good as it looks, it will 
make fine eating. Where are the others? Have you 
any news for us ? ” 

“ What news would please you the most, gentle¬ 
men ? ” inquired Happy. 

“ See here, youngster,” said Petromelinski, who had 
been closely examining Happy’s face, “ tell me what 
it is you have up your sleeve. I’m sure it’s something 
great.” 

“ I will,” replied the lad, smiling, “ when you have 
answered my question.” 

246 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ What news would please us the most?” inquired 
Petromelinski, repeating the lad’s question. “ Suppose 
you answer that question, Blank.” 

“ What news would please us most? ” replied Blank. 
“ Why surely, that Clinton and Dimitri, the men for 
whom we are looking, have been found. Is that it ? ” 
he inquired. 

“ The men you mention have been found and are 
now on the mountains helping to skin the bodies of 
two immense grizzlies that were shot this morning 
while making a ferocious attack on some of us,” said 
Happy. 

“ Was Professor Dimitri injured?” inquired the 
detective anxiously. 

“ The gent didn’t get a scratch,” replied Bill; “ al¬ 
though one of the bars war actually killed within a few 
feet of him.” 

“ Tell me all about it,” said Petromelinski. “ This 
is certainly great news, Blank. Now nothing prevents 
our taking Mashinsky to Russia ourselves. His maj¬ 
esty will certainly be greatly pleased when, besides 
having Mashinsky placed in the hands of Russian jus¬ 
tice, he learns that we have not only located Professor 
Dimitri’s son, but have been instrumental in deliver¬ 
ing him from an awful death.” 

“ If you are going back again to the place, gentle¬ 
men,” said Blank, “ I would like to go with you, not 
only to see the grizzlies, but also to talk with Clinton 
and Nicholas Dimitri.” 

“ We’ll be going back in half an hour,” replied 
247 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Happy. “ Bill and I want to get something to eat 
first” 

“ While ye be chinning with Scipio, Hap,” said Bill, 
“ I’ll go and tell some of the fellows at the miners’ 
camp that two big grizzlies are on exhibit up the side 
of the mountain.” 

“ And I’ll tell Awake-in-the-Night that we want help 
while you’re away, Bill. Don’t stay too long, I’m very 
hungry.” 

“ I’ll sartinly be back in time to jine ye in eating,” 
said Bill. 

“ Awake-in-the-Night don’t want to leave black¬ 
haired rascal alone,” said the Indian to Happy. “ Un¬ 
less the thief-catchers ask him to go, he’ll stay.” 

“All right,” replied Happy; “perhaps you had 
better remain with the prisoner.” 

When Happy, Bill, and the detectives reached the 
camp, for Awake-in-the-Night did not accompany 
them, they found that the men had sufficiently cut up 
the body of one of the grizzlies to trace the courses of 
the two rifle-balls. The one striking the head between 
the eyes had passed directly through a portion of the 
brain; the one striking the side had plowed its way 
through the heart. It was not surprising, therefore, 
considering the great shocking force of the charge, that 
death had been practically instantaneous. 

While the inspection was going on, some ten or 
fifteen of the miners, who had heard from Bill of the 
248 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


wonderful shots of the kid on the mountain, and of 
the two great grizzlies having been killed within a few 
feet of the men they were endeavoring to kill, had 
taken time enough off to go and look at the animals. 
They were, like all the others, greatly impressed at the 
accuracy of the aim, the quickness of the shots, and 
the necessary coolness of the one shooting that would 
permit him to kill the animal without injury to the 
man the bears were attacking. 

“ How be this, kid ? ” inquired one of the men in a 
good-natured way; “ ye said ye’d give us fellows a 
chance to see the next fancy shooting ye did in these 
diggings. And here ye have done some very fancy 
shooting without letting us know. Tell us why ye 
have acted in this way.” 

“ I guess it was because I was pressed for time,” 
added Happy, laughing. 

“ Will ye try to make it up when ye get the 
chance ? ” inquired another of the men. 

“ I will sure, gents,” was the reply. 

“ I did not have time to tell you, Happy,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, the first opportunity he had of talking 
with the lad privately, “ the great obligation under 
which you have placed me by saving the life of my son 
by your skill and coolness. You may rest assured that 
what you have done to-day will never be forgotten 
either by me or my people.” 

“ Please say no more about the matter, Professor 
Dimitri. It has of course been a great matter for 
249 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


rejoicing to me that I have been able to do what I have, 
but I do not like to be thanked so much, sa I beg that 
you will let the matter rest.” 

“ I know, my lad,” was the reply, “ that you are in 
earnest when you say that you do not like to be 
thanked. I will therefore do as you request, and say 
nothing more about it. Of course, you will under¬ 
stand, that it will be impossible for me to forget what 
I owe you. That will ever be stored in my mind.” 

When Awake-in-the-Night heard of the shooting of 
the grizzlies, he merely said: “ Smile-on-his-Face heap 
great shot. Always hits what he aims at. Never gets 
afraid. Holds rifle in hand without shaking.” 

“ What are your plans, gentlemen?” inquired Bla- 
vinski of the two detectives, some days after the event 
related in this chapter. “ Will you remain with us for 
a while, or will you leave us, since the work for which 
you came to Alaska has been accomplished? ” 

“ Blank and I have been talking the matter over,” 
replied Petromelinski. “ We have concluded that un¬ 
less you would prefer our remaining with you we will 
leave for St. Michael, from which we believe we can 
charter a schooner for Petropaulovsk, when we will 
proceed as rapidly as possible for Vladivostok, and 
take the Transcontinental Railroad for St. Petersburg. 
Our exact movements, however, will depend on orders 
I expect from the chief of the police department in Rus¬ 
sia. It may be that the department will take charge 
250 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


of Mashinsky as soon as we reach Russia. I am free, 
however, to confess that I would prefer taking per¬ 
sonal charge of him until we reach St. Petersburg/’ 

“ Will you accompany Mr. Petromelinski, Blank,” 
inquired Blavinski, “ or will you remain with us until 
we return to the Gordon mine ? ” 

“ That will depend on the advices he receives from 
Russia. He has kindly invited me to accompany him. 
I should like to do so, but don’t feel as if I could afford 
the expense of returning to the United States by 
steamer across the Atlantic.” 

“ If that is your only difficulty,” said Blavinski, “ I 
think you may make up your mind that you will be 
asked to return with Petromelinski. The Russian 
police authorities, I am sure, will feel under obliga¬ 
tions to you for the efficient aid you have rendered 
your colleague.” 

“ And now tell me, Nicholas,” said the professor to 
his son, “ what you and Clinton have been doing in 
this country. Have you had any success in mining? ” 
Nicholas gave his father information concerning the 
tin prospects in the Seward Peninsula, and the gold- 
quartz prospects in the McKinley Lake gold district. 

“ I imagine, Nicholas,” said the father, “ that you 
will wish to remain in Alaska to look after your in¬ 
terests.” 

“ It seems to me I should be here,” was the reply. 
“ Besides, it would be unfair to my associate, Mr. Clin¬ 
ton, to leave him. What are your movements, father ? 

251 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Will you return with Blavinski to the Gordon mine, or 
can I persuade you to remain here, at least for a while, 
and help me in prospecting a part of the time and in 
examining our gold claims ? ” 

“ Suppose we have a talk with Blavinski about this,” 
was the reply. 

“ I have no choice in the matter, Dimitri,” said Bla¬ 
vinski to the professor. “ I must return to the Gor¬ 
don mine in order to look after the interests of the 
people in the Russian syndicate, in whose name I in¬ 
vested considerable money. I shall therefore remain 
here for a few weeks with the people from the Gordon 
mine, and shall then return with them to that property.” 

“ Then I will remain with you for some time,” said 
Professor Dimitri, “ since my son and his associate in¬ 
form me that it is their intention to do some prospect¬ 
ing in this promising district.” 

When Clinton saw Mashinsky he found it difficult 
not to punish the man for his theft. He contented him¬ 
self with saying: 

“ So ye be the mean skunk that though taken in and 
treated like a white man, took yer chance and stole 
from the men who helped ye. I owe ye the durndest 
thrashing ye ever had, but the detectives tell me they’ve 
booked ye for Russia, so I’ll let ye alone.” 

The shooting of the grizzlies naturally gave rise to 
many comments covering the habits of bears generally 
and grizzlies in particular. Zeke, who was now more 
252 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


attached to Happy than ever, told him much about 
these animals. 

“ The grizzly bars that ye shot, kid,” he said one day 
to Happy, “ be not only wery strong and hard to 
kill, but they also be so wery intelligent that they are 
dangerous fellows to fight. Ez I hev heerd some of 
my mates say, ‘ a grizzly hez the strength of ten strong 
men and the sense of twelve.’ The critter, ez ye hev 
seed, kin sit on his hind quarters and fight with his 
forepaws. He be a wery quick hitter,” he added. “ I 
hev seed the animal ward off blows by his paws thet 
beat enything in boxing I hev ever seed.” 

“ But some of the men tell me,” remarked Happy to 
Zeke, “ that a grizzly can be fooled in such a way that 
don’t make it look as if it was so intelligent after all.” 

“ What be thet way, kid ? ” inquired Zeke. 

“ They told me how a grizzly was once fooled by a 
man he had struck. The man played possum and pre¬ 
tended to be dead so well that the bear was fooled. 
Not being enraged by injuries, it proceeded to scratch 
a hole in the ground with its paws, dragged the man to 
the hole, and began covering his body with grass and 
leaves, intending when hungry to come and eat it. 
The bear made a good job in hiding his game, press¬ 
ing the grass and leaves down against the man so as to 
completely cover him. Then when it went off to rest 
the man quietly crawled out of the hole and slipped 
away without being detected.” 

“ That war certainly wery cute in the man,” said 
Zeke with a hearty laugh. 

253 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Can a grizzly climb a tree, Zeke? ” 

“ I hev seed them do it many a time,” was the reply. 
“ I hev heerd some fellows say it kain’t be done, but I 
reckon that’s only when the critter be wery heavy. 
These fellows ye shot weighed eight or nine hundred 



Grizzly Bear 


pounds each. Sech a critter might not easily find a tree 
that could hold it.” 

For the sake of my reader who has never seen a 
grizzly bear, a wood-cut has been inserted on this 
page. It has been taken from “ Wood’s Natural 
History.” 


254 



The Land of Ice and Snow 


The two detectives left them in a few days with 
their prisoner, accompanied by a cook and a man to 
look after the horses. They made straight for Tanana, 
where they got a boat down the Yukon for St. 
Michael. 

Blavinski in due time received a telegram from them 
at St. Michael, stating that Blank had been requested 
to accompany Petromelinski, and the two had taken a 
boat for Russia. 

In finally disposing of Mashinsky, it may be said that 
the detectives safely reached St. Petersburg with their 
prisoner, who was duly tried for his many crimes, sen¬ 
tenced, and hanged. 

As Blank afterward informed his friends, the Rus¬ 
sian police treated him very straight, not only paying 
all his expenses, but liberally recompensing him for 
his services. 

The camp on the sides of Mount McKinley was con¬ 
tinued for over a week, during which time a variety 
of large game was shot, as we shall briefly describe in 
the next chapter. 

As to the exhibit of fancy shooting on which the 
men insisted, it may be said that the news of the shoot¬ 
ing of the grizzlies had spread rapidly through the 
mining districts, so that Happy was surprised at the 
great size of his audience. 

255 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


The gun exhibit was in all respects a great success. 
But the things done differed in no essential respect 
from that already referred to, so no reference will be 
made to them here. 

“ Ye be a great gun wonder, Ralph,” remarked his 
uncle. “ I sartinly be proud that you be my nephy.” 


256 


CHAPTER XIX 


i 


Other Big Alaskan Game 

The camp of Blavinski and his friends, on a slope 
of Mount McKinley, remained for at least ten days 
after the shooting of the grizzlies. It had lost three 
of its members by the departure of the two detectives 
and Mashinsky for Russia, and had gained two in their 
place when H. E. Clinton and Nicholas Dimitri ac¬ 
cepted an invitation to camp with them. 

There was abundant material for conversation every 
night at their camp-fire, not only in what had happened 
on their daily hunting excursions on the mountain, but 
especially in discussing, in groups, the many things 
that had occurred in their families and among their 
mutual friends, during the time they had heard noth¬ 
ing of one another. 

Although thus broken up into groups consisting of 
Happy, Bill, and Clinton; Professor Dimitri, his son, 
and Blavinski; Bill and Zeke; each day’s hunting sup¬ 
plied sufficient material for general conversation, and 
thus prevented the separate groups from continuously 
separating themselves from the others. 

Relieved of the custody of Mashinsky, Awake-in- 
the-Night now spent most of his time either in helping 
Scipio, for whom he had, strangely enough, conceived 
a marked liking, or in attending to their horses. This 
257 


R 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


latter work required so much of his time that Zeke had 
requested them to secure a helper from among the 
men seeking employment at the many mining-camps in 
the neighborhood. 

If, as has been well said, Alaska is the paradise of 
sportsmen who seek big game, then the flanks of Mount 
McKinley and the Alaskan mountain range from which 
Mount McKinley rises., are, so to speak, in the very 
heart of that paradise, for here there is not only a 
wonderful variety of game, both great and small, but 
with a few exceptions there is also an abundance of 
each kind. As Harry Karstens, a noted Alaskan guide, 
says in an interview in the Tanana number of the 
“ Alaska-Yukon Magazine,” January, 1909: 

“ I think the Alaskan range the best hunting-ground 
for all kinds of game in Alaska. No great effort is 
required to go out from camp and get a bear, moose, 
sheep, or caribou. . . 

“ I saw twelve moose in one day at the base of 
Mount McKinley, and have seen in this region a herd 
of caribou of at least five hundred animals. In the 
summertime the herds of caribou break up into small 
herds of twenty-five or thirty.” 

It is not difficult to find the reasons for both the 
variety and number of different kinds of game in this 
region. The river valleys at the foot of Mount Mc¬ 
Kinley and the entire Alaskan range, are extremely 
fertile, so that during the summer there is an abun- 
258 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


dance of vegetable food for herbivorous animals, and 
where there are plenty of plant-eating animals there are 
generally to be found many flesh-eating animals. 

The cause of the great variety of both kinds of ani¬ 
mals is readily found in the marked difference in the 
warm summer climate at the base of the mountain 
range, and the cold winterlike climate near its summits, 
a difference that is almost comparable to that existing 
between the equatorial and the polar regions. 

Lack of space will make it impracticable to attempt 
to relate the circumstances attending the shooting of 
each of the big animals, or as to the one by whom most 
of the successful shooting was done. It is enough to 
say that Happy got his full share of the “ kills,” and 
that both Blavinski and Professor Dimitri, to their 
great delight, each got a moose and a caribou that they 
were careful to have Zeke prepare for shipment to 
Russia as trophies of their skill as huntsmen. Clinton 
and Nicholas Dimitri each got a number of animals, 
such as black bears and a caribou. 

Instead of describing just how these animals were 
shot, we will make a far better use of our space by 
noting some of the more interesting points in their 
natural history. For the greater part the author is 
indebted for the facts to “ Wood’s Natural History.” 

Since many of the big game of Alaska belong to the 
deer family, we will begin by a description of these 
animals. It is not an easy matter to state the peculiari- 
259 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ties by means of which the different kinds of deer are 
distinguished from one another. A common basis for 
classification is founded on their horns. But this basis 
is manifestly impracticable, since in many cases some 
species have no horns whatever, while others have 
horns varying in character and appearance at different 
times of their lives; moreover, several species that 
are undoubtedly distinct, possess horns closely resem¬ 
bling one another. It is therefore advisable, as is done 
by some naturalists, to combine with the general shapes 
of the horns the extent of the muzzle or snout (the 
projecting mouth and nose) ; the kind of hair that 
forms the fur; and the position and presence of certain 
glands in the hind legs. 

Generally speaking, deer are readily distinguished 
from one another by the character of their horns. As 
a rule, these are found only in the males. The horns 
are composed of solid bony material, and are shed and 
renewed every year. The shedding of the horn is a 
curious process. 

Doctor Wood, in the book above referred to, thus 
describes the changes that take place in the growth of 
the horns in the case of common stag, or red deer, of 
Europe: 

“ In the beginning of the month of March he is 
lurking in the sequestered spots of his forest home, 
harmless as his mate and as timorous. Soon a pair of 
prominences make their appearance on his forehead, 
covered with a velvety skin. In a few days these little 
prominences have attained some length, and give the 
260 


0 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

first indication of their true form. Grasp one of these 
in the hand and it will be found burning hot to the 
touch, for the blood runs fiercely through the velvety 
skin, depositing at every touch a minute portion of 
bony matter. More and more rapidly grow the horns, 
the carotid arteries enlarging in order to supply a suf¬ 
ficiency of nourishment, and in a short period of ten 
weeks the enormous mass of bony matter has been 
completed. Such a process is almost, if not entirely, 
without a complete parallel in the history of the animal 
kingdom. 

“ When the horns have reached their full develop¬ 
ment, the bony rings at their bases, through which the 
arteries pass, begin to thicken, and by gradually filling 
up the holes, compress the blood-vessels and ultimately 
obliterate them. The velvet now having no more nour¬ 
ishment loses its vitality, and is soon rubbed off in 
shreds against tree-trunks, branches, or any other in¬ 
animate objects. The horns fall off in February, and 
in a very short time begin to be renewed. These or¬ 
naments are very variable at the different periods of 
the animal’s life, the age of the stag being well under¬ 
stood by the number of tines upon its horns.” By 
“ tines ” is meant the prongs on an antler. 

The moose, or elk, is the largest of the deer tribe, 
and the largest of the herb-eating animals of the north¬ 
ern lands. It sometimes attains a height of seven feet 
at the shoulders, thus equaling many an ordinary ele¬ 
phant. Its horns are very large and widely palmated 
261 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

at their upper extremities. The total weight of the 
horns is sufficiently great to excite surprise that the 
animal can carry them so readily. 

The moose does not reach its full size until its four¬ 
teenth year. Its muzzle is quite large and is much 
lengthened in front. This gives a unique expression 
to the animahs countenance. 

In Alaska the range of the moose extends from the 
Kenia Peninsula north and west to the Kuskoquim 
River, and east to the valley of the Tanana. It is 
especially abundant in the country lying between 
Prince William Sound and the Kuskoquim River, and 
in the Alaskan mountain range, particularly on the 
sides of Mount McKinley. 

The moose is closely hunted, since its flesh forms ex¬ 
cellent eating and the skin and horns are very useful. 
It is an enduring animal, and has a swift, though an 
extremely clumsy, gait. It is able to cover much 
ground in a short time, since its long strides, rendered 
possible by its long legs, give it a pace that is much 
more rapid than is apparent. 

There is this peculiarity about the animal when run¬ 
ning; that is, it possesses the power of passing rapidly 
over obstacles that would be impassable to a horse. 
When the ground is sufficiently hard to bear the weight 
of so large an animal, it gives the hunter a long and 
hard chase. But when covered with soft, thick snow, 
its pursuers, when provided with snow-shoes, can soon 
overtake the poor animal, who flounders in the deep 
snow and soon succumbs to fatigue. 

262 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


The moose is so very wary that hunters find it dif¬ 
ficult to approach it, this approach being detected by 
reason both of the acute hearing and delicacy of scent 
of the animal. Though, as a rule, the elk avoids man, 
yet at certain seasons it is seized with great excitement, 



Moose or Elk 


and apparently possesses a desire to fight anything and 
everything that crosses its path. It fights both with its 
immense horns and its front feet. The latter are capa¬ 
ble of giving a blow of sufficient force to kill a wolf 
instantly. 

The appearance of the moose can be seen from an 
263 



The Land of Ice and Snow 


examination of the accompanying figure from Doctor 
Wood’s book. 

The skin of the moose is very thick, and when 
properly prepared, and employed for clothing, is im¬ 
penetrable to an ordinary pistol-ball or knife-thrust. 

“ I don’t understand, Zeke,” said Happy one day 
when they were out hunting, “ how a moose with its 
huge horns can make its way through a forest. I 
should think its horns would be caught in the trees.” 

“ They sartinly would, kid,” replied Zeke, “ ef the 
critter hadn’t the trick of throwing em back on 
its shoulders. I reckon the horns help instead of 
hindering it.” 

“ I know that the moose can swim. Can they swim 
fast?” inquired Happy. 

“ The moose sartinly kin swim fast. I reckon thar 
be few animals that kin beat it in a fair race. It ’pears 
to enjoy swimming in the lakes or rivers in summer, so 
ez to cool off. When the black flies and skeeters are 
wery bad, it swims with only its nose and horns stick¬ 
ing out of the water, so as to git red of the pests.” 

“ It seems queer, Zeke,” remarked Happy, “ that so 
large and strong an animal can be chased into the water 
by a gnat or a mosquito.” 

“ It sartinly does seem kind of queer, kid,” replied 
Zeke; “ but what would ye say to a big grizzly being 
made to run when a cloud of mosquitoes or gnats 
tackled him? Yes,” he continued, “ and caused to flee 
until he gave up the ghost.” 

264 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ How could that be, Zeke ? ” inquired the lad in¬ 
credulously. 

“ Acause the pesky things bite so tarnation hard ez 
to make his eyelids swell ontil the animal be blinded.” 

“ What part of the moose furnishes the best eating, 
Zeke ? ” inquired Happy. 

“ When fresh,” was the reply, “ the flesh be mighty 
good eating. When smoked like a bar, I be told that it 
is wery much liked. But I never tried it, so I kain’t 
say this is so fer sure. But thar be a part wot all 
agree beats the other parts all holler, this be the big 
muzzle or upper lip. When biled, it be not unlike the 
rich jelly that gents what hev eaten green turtle say be 
like the turtle’s fat.” 

Much of the above conversation had taken place 
while Zeke and Happy had been sitting down eating a 
lunch Scipio had prepared for them. The wind was 
blowing on their backs, so that any animal approach¬ 
ing them would not be apt either to hear them or detect 
their scent. 

Suddenly they heard a succession of faint sounds as 
if far away. 

“ What’s that, Zeke ? ” inquired Happy. “ They are 
new sounds to me.” 

“ Pick up your rifle, kid,” said Zeke, doing the same 
thing himself. “ That be the tread of moose. Shoot 
ez soon ez ye kin see the critter and ye think yer rifle 
will carry that fur.” 

“Do you think the moose will come to us to be 
265 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

shot?” said Happy, laughing. “ I thought we would 
have to track them very carefully.” 

“ Ye be right, kid,” was the reply. “ We be lucky in 
setting here still and talking and in heving the wind 
blow toward us. Ye kin be sure of this: they’ll get on 
to our being here afore long. Then we’ll hev to shoot 
quick, or afore we kin hit them the critters will be out 
of sight.” 

Zeke was right in his prediction. The clicking 
sounds, due to the striking together of the animal’s 
cloven feet, which separate at every step and fall to¬ 
gether again as the animal raises its feet from the 
ground, were heard more and more distinctly, when 
suddenly they ceased. 

“ Now, kid, this be yer time to shoot quickly,” said 
Zeke, rising and looking in the direction in which they 
had heard them approaching. 

A band of five magnificent moose was seen looking 
suspiciously toward the man and boy. They recog¬ 
nized them almost immediately and started off at a 
rapid pace in the direction in which they had ap¬ 
proached. Happy fired two shots in rapid succession 
and Zeke one. Three of the animals fell. 

“ Ye sartinly be wery quick at the trigger, kid,” said 
Zeke. “ The two fellows with antlers be yours and the 
other be mine.” 

Both the moose shot by Happy had magnificent 
antlers. 

“ Ef, ez I heard ye say, ye want antlers to give to 
Mr. Blavinski to send to the Czar of Russia, I reckon 
266 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

ye'll find these about ez good ez any ye’ll get. They 
sartinly be magnificent. I hev seen at an exhibit a 
moose head with antlers not eny better than these that 
the fellow exhibiting them claimed were worth twenty- 
five hundred dollars. I noticed, however, that there 
were not many fellows trying to buy them at that 
price.” 

Another class of animals belonging to the deer tribe 
is the reindeer. There are two varieties of these 
animals—the reindeer belonging to the northern part 
of Europe and Asia, and the caribou, or the reindeer of 
America. 

The reindeer, as represented in the accompanying 
figure from Wood, is characterized by large branch¬ 
ing or palmated antlers that are divided into two 
distinct portions: the bez-antler, or that directly above 
the brows, and the brow-antler. 

The reindeer has been domesticated for a long time 
in Lapland. It is useful for its flesh, milk, and hide, as 
well as for a draft animal. In Kamchatka it is also 
employed as a saddle animal. It has a rapid gait, often 
attaining a speed of ten miles an hour. Its fur is long 
in winter and of a grayish-brown color, except in the 
neck, hind quarters, abdomen, and the end of the nose, 
which are white. In summer the colors deepen, the 
browns darkening and the whites becoming a grayish 
tint. 

The reindeer has migratory habits, passing to and 
•fro between the woods and the hills at different seasons 
267 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of the year. During the summer months this migra¬ 
tion appears to be for the purpose of endeavoring to 
escape the attacks of mosquitoes, gnats, and other in¬ 
sect pests, which breed so rapidly near the forest lands. 
By far, however, the chief insect plague of the rein¬ 
deer is the gadfly, which deposits its eggs in the 



Reindeer 

animal’s hide where it causes great pain and annoyance. 
The necessity for migration is so great that it exists 
even in the case of the domesticated animals that are 
permitted by their owners to continue this habit, the 
herders accompanying their herds to suitable localities. 
The reindeer is extensively employed for drawing 
268 



The Land of Ice and Snow 


sleds and carrying people on its back. It is capable of 
drawing a load of from two hundred and fifty to three 
hundred pounds at a pace of from nine to ten miles an 
hour. 

As already mentioned, the United States Govern¬ 
ment has demonstrated the practicability of raising 
reindeer in Alaska. Availing itself of the extended 
areas covered with reindeer moss, the natural food of 
the animal, it employs this natural pasturage for rais¬ 
ing thousands of these useful animals. 

Since reindeer meat is not only a sweet and whole¬ 
some food, and a full-grown animal weighs from one 
hundred and fifty to two hundred pounds, it is not 
difficult to see that herds of animals, so valuable for 
other purposes than for food, would seem to offer 
many inducements as a promising private industry. 

The caribou, or American variety of reindeer, is 
still to be found in great numbers in Alaska through 
a region extending from the head of the Tanana River 
to the Arctic slopes, as well as on the slopes of Mount 
McKinley. 

The caribou, like the ordinary reindeer, is migratory. 
This migration takes place up and down the Tanana 
River. Like the moose or elk, the caribou finds no im¬ 
pediment in the waters of lakes and rivers, readily 
crossing them and even appearing to take pleasure and 
relief by long continuing in this element. 

The flesh of the caribou forms an important food. 
When, during the autumn migration, they pass the 
269 



During much of the year the flesh of the caribou is 
ry and tasteless. There is, however, a layer of fat 
270 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


mining-camps at Fairbanks, sometimes great numbers 
are killed for food. 


Caribou 




The Land of Ice and Snow 


between the skin of the back and the crop in the male, 
sometimes two or three inches in thickness, that is re¬ 
garded as of greater value than the remainder of the 
carcass, including skin and bone. The marrow in the 
bones too is much esteemed, either when eaten raw, 
when mixed with the fatty substance above referred to, 
or with the dry flesh, to make excellent pemmican. 
The animal travels in herds, sometimes several hundred 
in number. 

The caribou is large, measuring, when full grown, 
about three feet and a half in height at the shoulder. 
It has not yet been domesticated and put to work as a 
beast of burden, although it would seem to be especially 
fitted for that purpose, since it possesses great strength 
and endurance. 

The general appearance of the caribou can be seen 
from an inspection of the accompanying figure from 
Doctor Wood’s “ History.” 

Our hunting party in the camp on Mount McKinley 
killed nearly to the limits furnished by the game-laws, 
not only keeping Scipio well provided with an abun¬ 
dance of fresh meat, but, to the great delight of the 
different mining-camps, adding substantially to their 
larders. 

A number of very beautiful heads and antlers of 
caribou were obtained, Happy presenting Blavinski 
with several especially fine heads for the Czar of 
Russia. 

Nor did our hunting party fail to add to the collec- 
271 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


tion heads and skins of other members of the bear 
family besides the grizzlies. 

Two great specimens of black bear were obtained. 
This species is prized for its smooth, glossy, black fur, 
and its fat. The animal is very fond of honey and of 
the little snails that are to be found at certain seasons 
in the dew-covered grass of prairielike regions. When 
it has succeeded in finding a bees’ nest in a tree, the 
bear gnaws through the wood with its teeth and cuts 
it open with its claws and greedily chews the sweet 
honey and bees, without apparently caring for the 
stings of the angry insects. 

Doctor Wood thus refers to the fat of the bear : 

“ The fat of the bear is, as is well known, considered 
as an infallible specific for increasing the growth of the 
hair and promoting its gloss, and is therefore a valuable 
article of commerce. The only portion of the fat that 
is legitimately employed for this purpose is the hard 
white fat which is found in the interior of the body. 
As might be expected from the enormous amount of 
titular ‘ bear’s grease ’ which is annually consumed, 
even in England, but a very small portion of the sub¬ 
stance which is called by that name has ever formed a 
part of a bear’s person. The pig steps in to make good 
the deficiency, and the greater portion of the material 
which is sold under the name of ‘ bear’s grease ’ 
is in reality, more or less, hog’s lard, colored and 
scented in order to charm the eye and nostrils of 
the purchaser.” 


272 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


The Indians are so greatly impressed with the cun¬ 
ning and intelligence of so formidable an animal as 
the bear that they endeavor to lessen the indignation 
of the dead animal’s spirit by various ridiculous cere¬ 
monies. Its head is placed on a new blanket, decorated 
with the best trinkets that can be had; smoke is blown 
into the nostrils, and a speech made lauding the animal 
and regretting the necessity that has arisen for its 
killing. 


s 


273 


CHAPTER XX 


How Happy Discovered Rich Copper Prospects 

They had left the Mount McKinley shooting-camp and 
were prospecting slowly toward the east. Although 
indications were not wanting that the entire district 
was highly mineralized, yet nothing definite was dis¬ 
covered until they had gone along one of the upper 
valleys of the Susitna River and reached the country 
lying between the head of this and the Copper River. 
Upon reaching the Copper River they proceeded to¬ 
ward the south to about twenty miles north of Copper 
Center. 

It had rained hard all the previous night, but the day 
broke clear and bright. Happy and Bill had gone on 
ahead of the others in an endeavor to shoot something 
for their larder in the way of fairly large game or 
birds, many of the latter of which, according to the 
experience of Zeke, might be looked for in that region. 

“ I hev never seed ye in better condition, Hap,” re¬ 
marked Bill, who had been silently observing the lad’s 
elastic step. “ Ye be feelin’ tip-top, be’ant ye? ” he in¬ 
quired. 

“Thank you, Bill,” was the reply; “I am feeling 
better than usual and even hungrier.” 

“ Then ye sartinly be in good health; fer, ez I seed at 
breakfast this morning, ye hed a good appetite, sech ez 
274 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

Bill likes ye to hev, fer he knows it means ye be wery 
well.” 

“ Look at the color of that stream of water, Bill,” 
said Happy, pointing to a little stream that was running 
down the rocks. “ I think it only flows after a heavy 
rain, such as we had last night.” 

“ What be the stuff that gives the water sech a green 
color, Hap? ” inquired Bill. “ Do ye know? ” 

“ It is a copper salt the water has dissolved from 
copper minerals from some place above us,” replied 
Happy. 

“ I hev heard that water like thet is pisenous. Be 
that true? ” 

“ Yes, Bill; water containing even a smaller quantity 
of copper salt is dangerous, but where there is enough 
in the water to give it the color that has, it would cer¬ 
tainly be deadly if drunk.” 

“ Tell me, Hap,” inquired Bill, “ what ye war think¬ 
ing of when ye said the stream probably only flowed 
arter heavy rains? Bill knows ye well enough to be 
sartin that ye war thinking of something more.” 

“ I was thinking, Bill,” was the reply, “ that if a 
stream so deeply colored with copper poured every day 
over those rocks, some prospector or other would long 
ago have traced it and located the copper mineral from 
which the rain-water gets its deep color.” 

“ Then ye think that ef ye followed the stream up 
the rocks ye might possibly find a bed of copper ore. 
Be that it?” 

“ That’s it, Bill,” was the reply; “ but I’m not count- 
275 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ing on the amount of copper mineral being large 
merely because the water is so deeply colored. In the 
first place the stream is very small. In the second 
place a small quantity of copper salt can produce a 
deep coloration.” 

“ But, of course, Hap,” said Bill anxiously, “ ye’ll 
follow the stream to see whar the water gets the min¬ 
eral from. Ef it be a big deposit, Bill would like wery 
much fer ye to be the fust to find it. Ye’ll give yerself 
all the chances ye kin, won’t ye? ” 

“ Sure, Bill,” said Happy, smiling. “ What a big- 
hearted, affectionate fellow you are. I actually believe 
you’d rather I’d find a valuable copper deposit than to 
find one yourself. Is not that so ? ” 

“ It sartinly be, Hap,” was the reply. “ But thar’s 
no danger that Bill will win out in anything what re¬ 
quires a good head-piece ef he be pitted against sech a 
fellow ez ye be. And even ef thar war, ez ye say, Bill 
would rather ye’d get thar afore him by a durned 
sight.” 

They followed the colored stream up the slope for 
some little distance. At places it disappeared in fis¬ 
sures, but was always again found farther up the in¬ 
cline. At last, however, they found a place where the 
waters welled up from a fissure like an ordinary 
spring, except that it was deeply colored. 

“ Hev ye found a good lot of copper ore, Hap? ” in¬ 
quired Bill anxiously, as he saw the lad carefully ex¬ 
amining the rocks out from between which the colored 
276 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


water was welling, as well as a great extent of neigh¬ 
boring rocks that closely resembled them in general 
appearance. 

“ That’s too hard a question for me to answer, Bill,” 
replied Happy. “ I’m not well enough up in the sub¬ 
ject. I am looking for a fissure-vein like that in the 
Gordon mines. This, as you know, is a place where a 
deep fissure extending through the rock, far down 
below the surface, has been slowly filled with mineral 
and vein matter.” 

“And hain’t ye found a fissure-wein, Hap?” in¬ 
quired Bill. 

“ Not as yet,” was the reply. “ There are many 
places where the rocks have been broken and faulted 
that may be practically what is called a fissure-vein. 
Still,” he added, “ this much I think is evident—some¬ 
where below the surface here there are beds of copper 
mineral that the waters of this spring run over. 
Now,” he said, as they were walking over the surface, 
“ as you can see there is a very extended region here 
covered with the same kind of rocks. The chances, 
therefore, are that beds of copper minerals are to be 
found here. If we could only see below the surface 
we might be sure. But let us go farther along the 
line that seems to separate the different kinds of rock.” 

“ All right, Hap,” said Bill, now still more interested. 
“ Bill will go with ye, though he kain’t help ye much.” 

“ Here is something that may help us,” remarked 
Happy, pointing to a deep crack, or fissure, extending 
through the same kind of broken rock along which 
277 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

they had been walking. “ It looks as if that fissure 
might reach down to some of these deposits.” 

The place to which Happy pointed was a deep fis¬ 
sure that had been formed during some great con¬ 
vulsion of nature. Besides the fissure a marked shift¬ 
ing, or change of level of the strata on each side of 
the fissure, had occurred. In other words, there was 
marked faulting of the strata. 

Though the fissure had vertical walls, yet on one 
side the surface drainage had cut an incline in one of 
the walls, so that they were able to make their way, 
although only with great difficulty, for nearly one hun¬ 
dred feet below the general surface. 

“ We have found a copper deposit, Bill,” said 
Happy, “ and it seems to be a big one. See,” he said, 
pointing to a number of different copper minerals, 
“ here is bornite, chalcopyrite, chalcocite, and other 
copper minerals.” 

“ Hap,” remarked Bill, “ ef ye don’t mind, won’t ye 
give these things names what Bill kin understand ? ” 

“ Certainly, Bill,” was the reply. “ I mean here are 
various minerals that consist of copper combined with 
sulphur, or brimstone.” 

“ All Bill cares to know,” was the reply, “ is be these 
the kind of copper rocks that kin easily be used for 
getting the copper out ? ” 

“ They are all splendid copper minerals, Bill,” replied 
Happy, “ and if, as seems possible, there are enough of 
them, unless claims have already been entered for it, 
the prospect will prove of very great value.” 

278 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Then Bill feels glad, sure.’' 

“ What surprises me, Bill,” remarked Happy, “ is 
that the fissure has not already been discovered by other 
people. If so, they will surely have entered their 
claims for it.” 

“ I reckon, Hap,” said Bill, grinning, “ ye war so 
much took up in thinking of the copper minerals that 
ye didn’t observe how this place hez been hid by trees 
what hev growed on the sides of the fissure.” 

“ That’s so, Bill,” said Happy when they had again 
reached the surface. “ As you say, there is an almost 
complete hiding of the fissure by a dense growth of 
trees. Well, that is certainly in our favor,” he added, 
as smile after smile rippled on his expressive face. 

“ I reckon, Hap,” said Bill, “ ye will tell the rest 
what ye hev diskivered ? ” 

“Sure, Bill,” said Happy; “we are very fortunate 
in having in our party two able mining engineers like 
Professor Dimitri and his son Nicholas Dimitri. They 
will probably be able to see much more in this discovery 
than I have been able to do.” 

“ This is a most wonderful discovery, Happy,” ex¬ 
claimed Professor Dimitri, when he and the rest of the 
party had examined what the lad had located. “ If it 
has not already been claimed, which I hardly think has 
been done, since I find none of the permanent land¬ 
marks or monuments the laws require shall be placed 
on a piece of mineral land to show that it has been 
claimed, it will be exceedingly valuable. Tell me how 
279 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


it happened you came to find a fissure so hidden by the 
trees? Was it pure luck, or did you reason it out? ” 
“ How could the lad possibly reason out that a deep 
fissure containing valuable copper minerals would be 
found in so unlikely a looking place as that dense clump 
of trees, Nicola?” inquired Blavinski. “ Come, tell 
me, my lad,” he added in a jollying manner to Happy. 
“ You must agree that there is such a thing as dumb 
luck. You and Bill, or only one of you, accidentally 
fell into the fissure and were thus brought directly 
against the minerals. Am I not right? ” 

“ Not this time, at any rate, sir,” replied Happy. “ I 
don’t say, sir, that there is no such thing as luck. But 
I certainly don’t believe in waiting for it to come. I 
believe in hunting it up. Tell Mr. Blavinski just how 
it was we found the fissure, Bill.” 

“ Bill had nothing to do with finding the crack, 
gents,” was the reply. “ It war all done by Hap when 
he seed a little stream of very green water a-flowing 
down the side of some rocks. 

“ ‘ How deep be the color of that thar water, Bill ? ’ 
said Hap to me. ‘ I reckon thar be no stream at all 
except arter a heavy rain, sech as we hed last night.’ 

‘ Now I hev traveled with Hap enough to know 
that he hed something on his mind, so I axed him, and 
he said: 

Let’s follow that little stream slap up the hill, 
Bill, and see ef we kin find the pile of copper ore from 
which it gets its color ’; so we followed it to war it 
cum out from atween some cracks in the earth jest like 
280 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


a little spring, except that the water be colored and 
very pisenous, as Hap told me. Then Hap he begun 
looking around, and I said: 

“ ‘ What be ye looking fer, Hap ? ’ 

“ ‘ A fissure-wein,’ he said; ‘ something like the wein 
on the Gordon mine.’ 

“ I sed nothing,” remarked Bill, “ ez I seed Hap was 
thinking, and arter a while he says: 

Bill, I kain’t find no fissure-wein onless that 
broken place above the rocks be the same ez sech a 
wein.’ 

“ And then agin Hap said nothing. I suspected he 
war thinking, so I stopped talking. Arter a while he 
said: 

“ ‘ Thar be lots of broken rocks what look jest like 
the place from which the spring comes through only 
arter a big rain. Now, sence thar be copper mineral 
whar the water came out, and all the other rocks look 
like these rocks, you and I, Bill, will look kerefully at 
all sech rocks.’ 

“ Hap did jest this, and I’ll be durned if he didn’t 
keep his eyes so on the ground at his feet that he 
acterally did not see the trees that war thick around the 
big crack.” 

Notwithstanding the extremely ungrammatical lan¬ 
guage in which Bill told how Happy had made his dis¬ 
covery, it was most excellent as to facts, showing, as 
it did, that luck had nothing whatever to do with the 
discovery of the fissured and faulted copper region. 

281 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Is Bill’s description enough, Mr. Blavinski, to 
prove that it was not a matter of luck, but an applica¬ 
tion of the few principles of geology I have been able 
to get from Professor Dimitri and the other scientific 
gentlemen at the Gordon mine; principles that enable 
me, although a greenhorn, to find what I hope will be 
a good copper prospect.” 

“ I acknowledge my mistake, my lad,” said Blavin¬ 
ski. “ But if you call yourself a greenhorn, I wonder 
what a full-fledged geologist would be. What do you 
say, Professor Dimitri?” 

“ The steps the lad has taken are in every respect 
correct. I do not see how the most accomplished geolo¬ 
gist could have improved on them. What do you say, 
Nicholas? ” 

“ They were all right,” was the reply. “ I believe 
they have resulted in the discovery of a most valuable 
copper prospect, and would recommend that we at 
once take steps for examining it, lay out claims, and 
see that such claims are properly entered as soon as 
possible at Cordova.” 

“ So ye be great ez a prospector ez well ez a gun 
wonder, Ralph,” exclaimed Clinton in a delighted tone. 
“ Ye make me feel proud that ye be my nephy.” 

“ Gentlemen,” said Blavinski, “ I think you will 
agree with me that the claims on this prospect should 
be made out in the name of the discoverer, Happy; or, 
at least, in the names of Happy and Bill.” 

“ That’s quite fair,” said the two Dimitris and 
Clinton. 


282 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ You must let me have a say in that matter, gentle¬ 
men,” remarked Happy. “ The claim should, in all 
fairness, be divided equally among all the leaders of 
the party who have agreed to do prospecting in this 
part of the country. Because I happened to be the 
first to see the prospect there is no reason why all 
should not share in it. Some of you would have prob¬ 
ably seen it when you crossed the lines of broken rock.” 

“ I have no hesitation in saying,” remarked Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, “ that the chances were all against my 
seeing it.” 

“ And I say the same thing,” added Nicholas Dimi¬ 
tri. “ What do you think, Harry ? ” he said, address¬ 
ing Clinton. 

“ I'll back up what ye say, Nicholas,” was the reply. 
“ Don’t ye think so, Zeke ? ” he added, turning to that 
man. “ Ye be a prospector.” 

“ Sence I be a-working fer ye, gents, taking ye over 
the country, I sartinly hev no right to be guv a part of 
the claims what ye may put on this prospect. I think 
tliet Happy and Bill hev the right to claim the hull busi¬ 
ness.” 

“ Gentlemen,” said Happy, “ you are all certainly 
very liberal, but I must insist that Mr. Blavinski, Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, and Nicholas Dimitri share these claims 
with me. I wish that Bill, who was with me at the time 
of the discovery, be also made a sharer in them.” 

Although they tried to induce Happy to change his 
mind, they were unable to do so. 

“ Suppose we leave the question as to how the claims 
283 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


shall be divided until we make an examination of the 
prospect and see how many claims can be properly 
made,” suggested Blavinski. “ Are you satisfied with 
that, my lad? ” he inquired of Happy. 

“ I am satisfied,” was the reply; “ although I should 
tell you now that I do not see anything that can arise 
that will induce me to change my mind.” 

An entire week was spent in a careful examination 
of the prospect. The Dimitris reported that, in their 
opinion, the prospect was not a fissure-vein, but more 
properly came under what is generally known as a 
collection of “ bunch deposits,” or deposits occurring 
in rocks that, owing to faults or fractures, permit the 
copper-bearing solutions coming up from below to 
deposit their metallic material in the spaces. 

The copper minerals were found in greatest abun¬ 
dance either in rocks known as greenstones, or in lime¬ 
stones, though principally in the greenstones. The 
principal copper minerals were such copper sulphides 
as bornite, chalcopyrite, chalcocite, together with cup¬ 
rite, or the dark-red oxide of copper, and tenorite, or 
the black oxide of copper, and the secondary copper 
ores; i. e., those formed by the gradual oxidation of 
the sulphides in portions of the ore beds above the 
water-line, and the subsequent combination of the oxide 
with the carbonic oxide of the atmosphere, such as 
malachite, or the green copper carbonate; azurite, or the 
blue copper carbonate; and a somewhat different ore, 
chalcanthite, or the blue copper sulphate. 

284 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Another vein of valuable mineral substances con¬ 
tained much native or metallic copper. This was found 
for the greater part in the greenstone. It takes the 
form either of small grains or slugs, or of crumbled 
leaves or films, deposited along places in the rock where 
fractures resulted from strains or movements in the 
rocks. 

There is a close resemblance between some of the 
native copper found in the greenstones and the 
amygdaloidal copper ores of the Lake Superior copper 
region. 

Without going any further into the matter of the 
copper prospects, it may be said that it was found that 
sixteen claims could be legally made on them. As a 
compromise, it was finally agreed that these claims 
should be divided as follows: viz., Blavinski one, Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri one, Nicholas Dimitri one, Clinton one, 
Bill three, and Happy seven, Professor Engleman one, 
Mr. Christian one, and Rob and Emil one between 
them. This last claim was assigned by Happy from 
one of the claims given to him, as was also one claim 
between Zeke and Scipio and Awake-in-the-Night. 

It may be said that the copper claims entered on the 
prospects discovered by Happy, hereafter called the 
“ Happy Copper Prospects,” were near a well-known 
copper district in Alaska. An article in the “ Alaskan 
Magazine ” for 1909, based on the United States 
Government report, says: 

285 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ But the copper resources of Alaska cannot be 
judged by the production. In the country tributary to 
the north of Prince William Sound there are copper 
belts where the values are beyond estimation. The Ne- 
besna White belt is north of the Wrangel Mountains, 
extending from the westerly part of these mountains 
more than one hundred miles, evidently into Canadian 
territory. In the opinion of Henry Bestnofer, one of 
the best-informed mining men of the West, there is 
enough copper in this region to furnish the world’s 
supply of this metal for many years to come. There are 
croppings of copper ledges here three hundred feet 
wide. The ores are chalcocite, bornite, and oxide. The 
estimated value of these ledges is from twenty to 
twenty-five per cent copper. These ledges all carry a 
small quantity of gold and a few ounces of silver to the 
ton. The formation of the belt is very similar to the 
formation of the copper region of Lake Superior. The 
metal frequently occurs as metallic copper. Nuggets 
weighing two tons or more have been found. The di¬ 
mensions of one piece discovered were nine feet long, 
two feet wide, and eighteen inches thick. 

“ All of this region is as yet in the prospecting stage, 
but the formation and assays for these croppings in¬ 
dicate the most extraordinary values. This particular 
region is about two hundred and fifty miles from the 
coast. 

“ One hundred miles nearer tidewater is the Kotsina- 
Chitina belt. These copper deposits are of the same 
general type as those of the Nebesna White belt on the 
286 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Chitina River. In them is situated the Bonanza mine 
which, although only partially developed, shows values 
that make it the greatest copper mine ever discovered. 
With the development of a two-hundred-foot tunnel 
and drifts, copper ores were uncovered which, in 1906, 
had a value estimated at twenty-two million dollars. 
The ledge of the Bonanza mine is one hundred and ten 
feet wide. The average value of the copper in this 
ledge is twenty-two per cent. Twenty-five feet of this 
ledge contains copper that has an assay of sixty-eight 
per cent. This mine is the first objective point of the 
twenty-million-dollar railroad that is now building 
from Cordova up to the Copper River.” 

It is an interesting fact that, like placer gold, there is 
sometimes found placer copper. I11 other words, there 
are small portions of native or metallic copper that 
are distributed through gravel or other divided rocks, 
from which the metal can be separated by the action of 
water in sluice-boxes. Such deposits of placer copper 
are found associated with the gold and silver deposits 
in gold placers. In certain regions the copper has to 
be removed in each clean-up of the sluice-boxes. In 
many cases the copper nuggets contain native silver. 


287 


CHAPTER XXI 


The Happy Copper Prospects 

The claims on the Happy copper prospects were now 
completed and ready for entry. They had satisfied 
themselves that no other claims had been filed on this 
land, since the most careful examination failed to find 
any permanent landmarks or monuments marking the 
exact boundaries of the lands claimed. 

Both Nicholas Dimitri and Clinton were greatly 
pleased at the liberal manner in which they had been 
treated by Happy. 

“ That nephew of yours is a splendid lad, Harry,” 
said Nicholas to him one day. “ You have a right to 
be proud of him.” 

“ I be proud of the lad fer a fact, Nicholas,” was 
the reply. “ Ralph is sartinly an all right chap. It 
beant only with guns that he’s quick. It seems ez ef 
whatever he puts his mind to he shows up great at. 
I notice one thing,” he continued, “ ez far ez I kin 
see, all the growed fellows what hev enything to 
do with the lad like him wery much.” 

“ All have become very much attached to him and 
are convinced that they have never met his equal,” re¬ 
marked Nicholas, laughing. 

“ That’s jest it,” said Clinton. “ Take eny of the 
men in this camp. They all be fond of Ralph and look 
288 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

on him as a wonder. Thar's Zeke, he be blathering 
about the lad pretty nearly all the time. Then thar’s 
Scipio, he is sure thar never war and thar never will 
be another sich; and as to Blavinski and your father, 
they hev the highest respect for him.” 

“ Then he is so liberal,” said Nicholas. “ There’s 
not a mean bone in his body. He insists that an entire 
claim be assigned to each of us. I say, Harry, have 
you any idea of the probable value of such a claim when 
the property is capitalized and put in the form of a 
company ? ” 

“ I hev never thought of it, Nicholas,” was the 
reply. “ But I reckon it be big.” 

“ If, when we start to sinking shafts and driving 
tunnels, a good body of ore is shown up, like one of 
the mines to the east of us, the Bonanza, which, al¬ 
though only partially opened, showed several years 
ago a money value in copper estimated at twenty mil¬ 
lion dollars, you can see then how very valuable a 
single claim in such a company might be.” 

“ Ef that be so,” said Clinton, “ I reckon the best 
thing we kin do will be for you and me to take the 
Copper River Railroad for Cordova, enter those claims, 
and return. It won’t take us but a few days to do this.” 

“ Let's speak to the others about it, Harry,” replied 
Nicholas. “ What you propose is very sensible.” 

“ Go, by all means, gentlemen,” said Blavinski. 
“ Until we get claims legally entered on our prospects 
we can do nothing safely. As soon as this is done, we 
can take steps to have work done—shafts sunk and 
T 289 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


tunnels driven. As soon as a more complete report is 
obtained, if you all so wish, I will undertake financing 
a company to be formed to work the prospect, to be 
called, say, the ‘ Happy Copper Mining Company.’ ” 

They all agreed with Blavinski, so that Nicholas 
Dimitri and Clinton took the cars at the nearest sta¬ 
tion and were soon on their way to Cordova to file 
the claims. 

“ Bill,” said Happy, “ I want to make a collection of 
the copper minerals that are to be found in our pros¬ 
pects. Come and help me, please. I wish to get speci¬ 
mens for Rob and Emil and all the rest of our friends 
in the Gordon mine, as well as for Norman and Fred 
in Philadelphia. Besides copper minerals or ores, I 
want to get specimens of the more important minerals 
that are found, either in the gangue or matter of the 
fissure-veins, or in contact with the copper minerals of 
the bunch deposits.” 

“ Ef thar be many different kinds of minerals, and 
ye send several specimens to each of your friends, Hap, 
it will take a big box to hold em.” 

“ Perhaps not quite so big as you think, Bill,” was 
the reply, “ and yet certainly not small. But I am sure 
such minerals will please our friends. I especially wish 
to get some very good specimens for Professor Engle- 
man, for it was he who first started me to studying 
mineralogy.” 

<f Tell Bill what ye want him to do, Hap, and he’ll 
be wery glad to do it.” 


290 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


They made a visit to the Kotsina-Chitina copper 
region. When Professor and Nicholas Dimitri in¬ 
troduced themselves to the engineers at the great 
Bonanza mine, they were given every opportunity for 
examining the more important parts of the mines, al¬ 
though some parts they did not wish them to see for 
a while. It was not long before Happy, making 
friends with the mining superintendent, had opportu¬ 
nities for selecting specimens from the copper ores 
they had mined, or that they had exposed for mining, 
now that the railroad connections had been completed 
to Kennecott. He, therefore, had no difficulty in get¬ 
ting a very excellent collection of minerals. 

The minerals consisting of copper ores, i. e., 
minerals suitable for the recovery of the copper they 
contained, were the same as those they had either 
already seen, or afterward saw, in the Happy copper 
prospects. There were native, or metallic copper; cu¬ 
prite, or the dark-red oxide of copper; tenorite, or the 
black oxide of copper; chalcocite, bornite, and chalco- 
pyrite, sulphides of copper; malachite, a green carbon¬ 
ate of copper; azurite, the blue carbonate of copper; 
and chalcanthite, or blue sulphate of copper. 

Some of the minerals found in the gangue of the 
fissure-vein, or in the minerals at the bunch deposits, 
were pyrite, garnets, epidote, calcite, quartz, and 
pyrrhotite. 

Like all the others, Bill was greatly impressed with 
the enormous quantity of copper ore in sight in the 
291 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Bonanza mine, as well as the evident richness of the 
prospects in the neighborhood that had only been 
partially opened. He had heard of the estimates made 
of these properties, as referred to in the last chapter, 
but the mere figures did not impress him as did an 
actual sight of them. Blavinski, a highly educated 
man, acknowledged the same, so that Bill might be 
excused for his surprise. 

The following conversation occurred one day later 
between Happy, Bill, and Blavinski. 

“ There be sech a tarnation lot of copper ores in 
these regions, Hap,” said Bill, “ that it seems to me 
that when all the stuff is put on the market thar'll be 
more copper than kin be sold. What do ye think about 
that, Hap? Be I right, or hev I made a mistake? ” 

“ There are so many things for which copper is 
needed, Bill,” said Happy, “ that I don’t think there 
will be any difficulty in finding a market for all the 
metal that can be produced. What do you think, Mr. 
Blavinski ? ” he inquired. 

“ I think you are undoubtedly correct, my lad,” was 
the reply. “ In my opinion, it will be a long time be¬ 
fore the world gets all the copper it can use, and there¬ 
fore refuses to buy any more. Suppose you let Bill 
know some of the many uses for copper. Then, if you 
do not mention all I know of, I will tell you.” 

“ I’ll do my best,” said Happy. “ Have you thought, 
Bill,” he said, “ of the great quantity of copper that 
is employed in the form of wires for the dynamos that 
produce the electricity for electric lights that are used 
292 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


in the streets and outside areas, as well as in houses 
and other buildings ? The copper wire so used is very 
great in amount, and is increasing rather than de¬ 
creasing every year. Another use for copper wire is 
for the electric motors, employed for running the street¬ 
cars, for driving machinery, for the electric locomo¬ 
tives that drive freight and passenger trains.” 

“ Bill hez not traveled much, Hap, except lately 
with you gents; but from what he hez seed and heerd 
tell about, he kin understand that a powerful sight of 
copper will likely be needed.” 

“ There is another use for copper wire,” continued 
Happy, “ for the feeder-wires, or the heavy copper 
conductors employed either overhead or underground 
for the trolley cars. Then you must not forget that 
telephone lines need copper wire, as do also all kinds 
of electro-magnetic telegraphs, telephones, alarm-bells, 
burglar alarms, and signaling apparatus, so that I do 
not believe, Bill, there is any immediate danger of so 
much copper being produced that no market can be 
found for all of it. Now, Mr. Blavinski, please tell 
both Bill and me the many uses I have omitted.” 

“ There are not so many as you seem to believe, my 
lad,” was the reply. “ In electricity you have not 
mentioned transformers, or apparatus that are em¬ 
ployed when electricity is used for the transmission of 
power. These call for large quantities of copper wire. 

“ Besides what have been mentioned,” continued 
Blavinski, “ there are many miscellaneous electric ap¬ 
paratus, such as electric heaters, electric furnaces, and 
293 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the electric signs which require a considerable quantity 
of copper wire. ,, 

“ Well, Bill,” said Happy, as Mr. Blavinski paused 
a moment after calling attention to the uses of copper 
contained in the last paragraph, “ are you satisfied that 
you need not fear to find a market for our copper ? ” 

“ Bill don’t pertend to be able to understand all the 
many queer things what ye and Mr. Blavinski hev told 
about. Ef ye say ye think thar’ll always be a good 
market fer all the copper we kin git out of our pros¬ 
pects, he is satisfied.” 

“ But,” said Blavinski, “ I am by no means through 
with the uses of copper. This metal is also employed 
in large quantities in the form of plates for covering 
roofs; as an important ingredient in the production of 
various alloys that are employed in enormous quanti¬ 
ties, such as the different kinds of brass, gun metals, 
bronzes, aluminium bronze; it is also employed in the 
form of various chemicals, such as blue vitriol, large 
quantities of which are necessary for the maintenance 
of the voltaic batteries employed in telegraphy, as well 
as for the electroplating of ordinary metals with met¬ 
allic copper. I might mention other uses,” said Bla¬ 
vinski, “ but I think these will be sufficient.” 

Three days after the departure of Clinton and Dimi¬ 
tri for Cordova, the following telegram was received 
from them by Blavinski: 

All our claims on the Happy copper prospects have been 
duly entered. A careful examination shows no other claims 
294 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


in the neighborhood. We are returning by rail and will be 
with you in a day or two. 

Blavinski was enthusiastic over the telegram. 

“ I am delighted with the news, Dimitri,” he said. 
“ We are now certain of holding claims on a number 
of very valuable copper prospects; not that I had any 
doubt that everything was right, for no signs what¬ 
ever of monuments or landmarks have been found on 
the property. Indeed, so convinced was I of this that 
I have asked one of the best mining engineers I could 
find in this region, outside of Professor-and Nicholas 
Dimitri, for a general opinion as to the value of our 
prospects. I have authorized him, as soon as our claims 
were filed, to take with him twenty miners accustomed 
to working in the copper mines and prospects in the 
neighborhood, so as to enable him to give me a prelimi¬ 
nary report on the property. He is already at work, 
and is to send me telegraphic reports every day as to 
the results that have been reached, if any.” 

“ Why are you in such a hurry, Blavinski ? ” in¬ 
quired Professor Dimitri. 

“ Because I am desirous of financing the prospects. 
You do not feel provoked, do you, Nicola,” he said 
to Dimitri, “because I have done this? It is not be¬ 
cause I doubt the correctness of the reports of your¬ 
self and your son, but because I wish to place myself 
in a position in which I can safely recommend the in¬ 
vestment to my friends in Russia.” 

“ Don’t worry yourself, Petrof,” replied Professor 
Dimitri. “ I have no foolish professional jealousies 
295 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


that would make me object to your getting all the 
opinions you wish as to the value of the prospects. 
Don’t forget that my son and I each have an entire 
claim, made out in our names. I am so convinced as 
to the value of our prospects that I feel certain the 
more thorough the examination the greater will be the 
evidence of their great value. And if this were not 
the case, I, like yourself and all the others interested, 
want to know it now if they have no value.” 

The next day Blavinski received the following tele¬ 
gram: 

Commenced sinking several shafts on the property. Signs 
most promising. Am sure you can develop a great mine, 
equal to any in Alaska. Don’t entertain any offers for the 
sale of this property as mere prospects. 

“That sounds well, Nicola, doesn’t it?” said Bla¬ 
vinski. 

The next day as Clinton and Nicholas Dimitri re¬ 
turned, another telegram received by Blavinski read 
as follows: 

Have gone on rapidly with work on shafts and have com¬ 
menced tunnelings. Copper values most extraordinary. If 
properly developed, property sure to make a great mine. 
Be sure to pool your claims. Don’t entertain any offer for 
the sale of claims as mere prospects. 

“ Why do you suppose he advises that we pool the 
claims? ” inquired Blavinski. 

296 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Because he fears some of the holders will sell and 
thus make trouble for working properly the other 
claims.” 

“ I think I understand what he fears,” said Nicholas 
Dimitri. ‘ k While in Cordova I heard of some of the 
difficulties that arose in the case of the great Bonanza 
copper mine. The prospects on which this mine were 
established were discovered late in July, 1900, by two 
prospectors, Clarence Warner and Jack Smith, who 
staked the property. Two or three weeks afterward 
it was independently discovered by A. C. Spencer, of 
the United States Geological Survey, while tracing the 
contact of the limestones and greenstones backward 
from the Kennecott Glacier. 

“ It unfortunately happened,” continued Dimitri, 
“ that Warner and Smith were members of a party 
who had agreed to share whatever mineral rights might 
be discovered. Some of the men too were bound to 
divide their interests with others, not members of the 
party who had ‘ grubstaked ’ them. Consequently, the 
ownership, thus complicated, fell into litigation that 
was not settled until several years afterward.” 

An agreement was soon reached among the holders 
of the Happy copper prospects to pool their holdings 
with the intention of placing them in one great com¬ 
pany, and Blavinski was requested to put the agree¬ 
ment in proper shape. 

“ We must get the others to agree to pool their 
claims,” said Blavinski. “ These are Zeke, Scipio, 
Awake-in-the-Night, and the gentlemen at Gordon.” 

297 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Let me arrange that,” said Happy. “ I had the 
combined claims of Zeke and Scipio made out in my 
name, just as I have the claims to Professor Engleman, 
Mr. Christian, Rob, and Emil. I remember hearing 
Professor Engleman and Mr. Christian speaking about 
troubles arising from having neighboring claims held 
by parties adverse to one another. These difficulties 
prevented the work from being properly carried on; 
for example, one party refusing to permit a tunnel to 
run through his property or to grant the necessary 
right of way across it.” 

“ Nicholas and I were a wondering why ye hed done 
thet, Ralph,” said Clinton. “ Now, I kin understand 
how durned bright it war in ye.” 

“ We can always count on Happy doing such 
things,” remarked Blavinski. 

11 1 have concluded to make out one of the copper 
prospect claims jointly in your names,” said Happy to 
Scipio, Zeke, and Awake-in-the-Night, whom he had 
called together and told of what he had done. “ This 
gift, however, is only to be made provided you are 
willing to put your holdings in with the others on this 
property. I am sure you will feel that we will treat 
you squarely in the matter.” 

“ Ye be very liberal, kid,” remarked Zeke. “ What 
ye hev did to Scipio, the Indian, and me is wery on- 
usual. We hev no right to eny claim. Ye hev given 
this to us uv yer own free will. Now ye ask me to 
place my part uv the claim in with the other claims. 

298 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


My answer is, I will fer sure. Ef I could not trust 
sech a square white gent ez I hev found ye to be, I 
ought to be strung up immediate.” 

“ And what do you say, Scipio? ” inquired Happy. 

“ I beant sure, Marse Hap,” replied the Negro, 
“ that I puffectly understand what ye mean when ye 
talk about Scipio’s copper share. What does ye mean 
when ye say ye hev concluded to make out One of the 
prospect claims jintly in my name and in that of Zeke 
and Awake-in-the-Night? ” 

“ It means that I have made you a present of a part 
of a claim, because I want to show how much I like 
you.” 

“ Lordy, now, Marse Hap,” exclaimed Scipio, “ ye 
jess take my breff away. Ye mean ye gives to Scipio 
this here thing fer nothing. Why, I s’pect it may be 
worth money.” 

“ Yes, Scipio,” said Blavinski, “ probably as much as 
one hundred thousand dollars when the mine is es¬ 
tablished here.” 

“ One hundred thousand dollars, Massa Blavinski. 
You done take poor Scipio’s breff completely. Be ye 
in arnest? ” 

“ I am indeed, Scipio,” was the reply. 

“ Den, Marse Hap,” replied the Negro, “ Scipio 
kain’t allow ye to give him so much. Kain’t ye make 
it smaller? Scipio will be jest as much pleased.” 

“ No,” said Happy. “ It must be what I have told 
you. But tell me, are you willing to place this claim 
in with the others that have been taken out on the 
299 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


property, and will promise not to sell your rights with¬ 
out first telling me ? ” 

“ I’ll put it in yer keeping to take care of it fer me, 
Marse Hap, and say thank you,” was the reply. 
“ Lordy,” he said to them as the idea of having the 
chance of being a wealthy man gradually soaked into 
his head. “ I specs I kin go back to Virginy and buy 
ez much ez ten acres of land and build a house on it.” 

“Ye kin even buy many hundred acres of land and 
marry a good-looking colored gal to take kere of ye 
fer the rest of yer life,” said Bill. 

“ Oh, you go away, Bill,” cried Scipio. “ Stop 
laughing in your sleeve at Scipio.” 

As to Awake-in-the-Night, he had little to say, con¬ 
tenting himself with the general statement: 

“ Smile-on-his-Face always heap liberal and kind to 
Awake-in-the-Night.” 

Another telegram received by Blavinski was to the 
following effect: 

Tunnels in wonderfully rich ore. Parties here connected 
with other companies, anxious to buy. Are bidding against 
one another. Take my advice and don’t sell. Every day’s 
work is adding great values to the property. 

“ I will draw up an agreement, gentlemen,” said 
Blavinski, “ to be signed by all the owners of the 
claims, agreeing to pool their interests.” 

“ You can’t do that too soon, Petrof,” exclaimed 
Professor Dimitri. “ From what the telegram says, I 
think it possible we will all be approached by parties 
3 00 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

anxious to buy or to enter into some understanding 
with us.” 

“I have the rough draft of such an agreement,” 
said Blavinski. “ Let me read. If satisfied you had 
better all sign it.” 

The paper being satisfactory was made out, one copy 
for each, and was signed by all present and by Happy 
for the parties at the Gordon mine, and placed in the 
hands of Blavinski for safe-keeping. 

No one could say how soon the various claims might 
have changed hands had not some such agreement to 
hold jointly been reached. Bright men approached the 
different owners of the claims, offering big sums of 
money in cash for the sale of their rights. Bill was 
the first who was approached. One man offered five 
thousand dollars cash for all his rights in the two 
claims, and the bidding ran up until twenty thousand 
dollars was offered. 

“ You had better take it,” said the highest bidder. 
“ Twenty thousand dollars is a big sight of money, 
and I will pay it to you in cash. Don’t forget the 
property is only a prospect. I acknowledge it looks 
all right now, but as you go farther down and tunnel 
it farther, it may suddenly peter out and you might be 
unable to sell your claim for even one thousand dol¬ 
lars.” 

“ I be much obliged to you, gents,” said Bill; “ but 
I rather think I’ll take the resks and hold my claims 
with the other gents.” 


3 or 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Happy was so young looking that the would-be pur¬ 
chasers thought they would have no trouble in pur¬ 
chasing all his claims for a mere trifle. 

“ Come, youngster,” said one of them, “ sign this 
paper and I’ll hand you more cash than you have ever 
seen,” offering what he felt sure would clinch the bar¬ 
gain. “ Think of the jolly times you could have with 
so much money in your pockets to burn.” 

“ I am not in the market for selling, gentlemen,” was 
the reply the lad made to this and to the much higher 
offers that rapidly followed one another. “ I in¬ 
tend holding my shares for the development of the 
property.” 

When they heard that Zeke, Scipio, and Awake-in- 
the-Night had a claim between them, an effort was 
made to purchase it. As to Zeke, they soon gave him 
up, since he refused even to consider their offer. Poor 
Scipio would probably have sold them his share, but 
when they heard him say: “ I tell ye, gents, I kain’t 
sell ye that yer thing; I hev given it to Marse Hap and 
agreed to let him take kere of it fer me,” they 
gave up. 

Awake-in-the-Night only smiled when they offered 
to buy his rights, and said, “ Smile-on-his-Face says 
4 Don’t sell,’ so Awake-in-the-Night says 4 No.’ ” 

But a still bigger offer was made when it was as¬ 
certained that all the claims had been pooled, and that 
it was the intention of the owners immediately to de- 
302 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


velop the mine. A pool was formed by a number of 
rich capitalists interested in the near copper property, 
who were willing* to pay five hundred thousand dollars 
cash for the sale of all these holdings. 

The offer was very tempting, but after a careful con¬ 
sideration they decided to refuse it. The telegrams 
from the prospect were more and more favorable. 

“ Gentlemen,” said Clinton, “ Nicholas Dimitri, my 
pard, agrees with me thet after we hev examined our 
claims over here in the McKinley Lake region for 
quartz-gold prospects, to return to the Happy copper 
prospect and look arter its development.” 

“ And I will go back there at once,” said Blavinski. 
“ I can now see my way to the formation of a company 
to be known as the Happy Copper Mining Company. 
As you know, I represent the interests of a number of 
rich Russians in the Gordon mine, and can, I believe, 
get all the money needed for the rapid and thorough 
development of our prospect.” 

The question then arose as to whether Professor 
Dimitri, Happy, and Bill should proceed to Cordova, 
or should, at least for a while, accompany Blavinski to 
the Happy copper prospect. 

As they were comparatively near the copper prop¬ 
erty, they determined at least for a short time to re¬ 
turn to it with Blavinski. 


303 


CHAPTER XXII 


Some Birds of Alaska 

All the owners of shares in the Happy copper mine 
were again assembled on the property with the excep¬ 
tion of those at the Gordon mine. The working force 
on the shafts and tunnelings had again been increased, 
and a number of white tents in the immediate neigh¬ 
borhood marked the beginning of a town. The usual 
claims for a town site, as well as for roads, mills, fur¬ 
naces, etc., had been taken out at the time the claims 
on the prospects were filed. 

A more careful geological examination of the prop¬ 
erty showed that the copper ores were found in con¬ 
nection with beds of greenstones and limestones. 
While some ores were found distributed through the 
greenstones, yet they were greater in quantity and of 
higher copper values in the limestones, though these 
limestones were in most cases near the greenstones. 

By carrying the tunnelings across, as well as in the 
direction of the contacts between the limestones and 
the greenstones, a second set of richly mineralized con¬ 
tacts between the limestones and the greenstones were 
discovered. This resulted in the location of six addi¬ 
tional claims that were made out in the names of Bla- 
vinski, Professor and Nicholas Dimitri, Happy, and 
Bill. These claims were assigned as follows: two 
304 


[ he Land of Ice and Snow 

claims to Happy and one to each of the above-named 
parties. 

It was necessary to exercise no little care in sta¬ 
king out the additional claims. They were first de¬ 
scribed and the description given to Nicholas Dimitri 
and Clinton to file at Cordova on the same day that 
they were staked out on the new prospects. As soon as 
they began staking out the extra claims, prospectors 
at once began staking claims in all directions, and 
hurried to Cordova to enter them, only to find that 
they had been forestalled by Clinton and Nicholas 
Dimitri. 

Every day the sinking of shafts and extensive tun¬ 
nelings showed that the property gave promise of 
equaling, if not exceeding in value, the great Bonanza 
mine. Thoroughly convinced that the Happy pros¬ 
pects could readily be developed into a great mine, 
Blavinski had organized a company called the Happy 
Mining Company. 

The pooled claims were given in exchange for fifty- 
one per cent of all the full-paid shares of the stock of 
the company, the remaining shares being placed in the 
treasury for sale, in order to provide the cash neces¬ 
sary for development. 

A large amount of cash was obtained in this way, 
Blavinski and his Russian associates subscribing to 
large blocks of the stock. This cash made it possible 
to push the work on the sinking of shafts and running 
of tunnels. 


u 


305 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


It was not their intention actually to begin mining 
the ore, but rather to block it out, and so definitely 
know the amount in sight. The expense of transport¬ 
ing ore to tide-water, and to obtain their necessary 
supplies, would have been too great to permit any 
commercial work, had not the great Copper River & 
Northwestern Railroad been completed to Kennecott. 
It came nearest to their prospects at Copper Center. 
As there was a fairly good wagon-road to Chitina, 
they did not expect to meet any insurmountable obsta¬ 
cle for transportation, since the construction of a 
branch railroad from Copper Center to Chitina might 
probably be arranged for. 

As an example of the difficulty of transporting even 
the richest copper ore by wagon or sledge to tide¬ 
water, it may be mentioned that, before the construc¬ 
tion of the Copper River Railroad, some prospectors 
who found exceedingly rich deposits of native cop¬ 
per between the Wrangel Mountains and the Chitina 
River, had collected about twenty tons of native 
copper and piled it in a heap, just as a farmer would 
potatoes. 

“ Surely,” they thought, “ there will be a handsome 
profit left after paying to have this valuable metal 
transported by sleds or otherwise to some port on the 
coast.” 

To their great surprise, however, they found it 
would cost them more to transport the copper to the 
coast than they could obtain for it in the nearest 
market. 


306 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Frequent references have been made to some of the 
birds of Alaska. As there are a great variety of them 
in this country, it will be advisable briefly to describe 
some of the more important that are to be found, not 
only in the region visited by our party, but also else¬ 
where in this part of the world. 

It is not our intention to describe these birds in 
classes, such as those which live in Alaska more or less 
throughout the year, and those that migrate to and 
from the shores of Alaska for various parts of Asia or 
of North and South America. We shall rather select 
such birds as we think will be of greatest general 
interest. 

The arctic grouse, or ptarmigan, is probably the 
most important of the small game-birds of Alaska. It 
is found on the tundras, moorlands, and mountain 
slopes, from southern Alaska to the Arctic Ocean. 

There are several varieties of arctic grouse. That 
known as the willow-grouse, varies in size from that of 
an ordinary pigeon to a much larger variety. 

The plumage of the arctic grouse affords an excel¬ 
lent example of the manner in which the color of an 
animal is able to protect it from enemies by the close 
resemblance of the color of its body to that of the back¬ 
ground. In winter, the plumage of the arctic grouse 
is white, making it difficult to see the animal against a 
background of snow. During the summer, however, 
the plumage is almost the exact color of the moss on 
the tundras. While the changes in color are taking 
307 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

place, the birds are variously mottled and might readily 
be taken for entirely different species. 

Coues, in his “ Key to North American Birds/' quo¬ 
ting Turner, describes the change in color of the wil¬ 
low-ptarmigan’s plumage from the summer to the 
winter as follows: 

“ The summer plumage is assumed at variable 
periods of the months of April and May, and even 
early in June, according to the locality. The molt for 
the summer is usually shown first on the head and 
neck, followed on the lower back, sides, breast, mid¬ 
dle back, flanks, and abdomen, in the order named. 
The abdomen and chin are the best areas to show the 
complete molt. During the time of the summer plu¬ 
mage, scarcely a single day passes that the general 
color of the feathers is not modified by the appearance 
or loss of some feathers.” 

The spruce-grouse is a most stupid bird, apparently 
not possessing sense enough to induce it to fly away 
from the hunter. A flock of these birds, taking refuge 
on a tree, will remain there and be shot one after 
another, without any signs of fear. The name “ fool 
hen ” commonly given to them is, therefore, descrip¬ 
tive. The spruce-grouse is the size of an ordinary 
chicken. Its flesh affords excellent eating. 

There are a great variety of arctic water-fowl that 
are seldom if ever seen south of the Alaskan Pen¬ 
insula, or the Aleutian Archipelago. The most im- 
308 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

portant of these are the eider-duck and the emperor- 
goose. 

The flesh of the eider-duck is unpalatable, since the 
bird lives on fish. This duck, however, is highly prized 
owing to the exceedingly soft and light down it plucks 
from its breast for covering its eggs during incubation. 

Eider-down is greatly prized by reason of its high 
non-conducting power for heat. It is employed for 
lining comfortables, stuffing pillows, etc. 

Eider-down is collected from the nests as a regular 
business. This is a livelihood of great danger, owing 
to the fact that the birds build their nests on the tops 
of precipitous rocks, or on projections on the sides of 
precipices. Wood thus describes the method employed 
in the collection of eider-down: 

“ The plan usually adopted is to remove both eggs 
and down, when the female lays another set of eggs 
and covers them with fresh down. These are again 
taken and then the male is obliged to give his help by 
taking down from his own breast and supplying the 
place of that which was stolen. The down of the male 
bird is pale colored, and as soon as it is seen in the nest, 
the eggs and down are left untouched, in order to keep 
up the breed. Mr. Yarrell mentions that the eider- 
ducks on one of the northern coasts of England had 
been nearly exterminated by foolish persons who 
robbed their nests and sold the eggs for consumption. 
An officer, however, who was employed in building a 
lighthouse on the rocks, prohibited any such robberies 
309 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


while he was in authority. In consequence of his 
judicious management the eider-ducks became plentiful 
again.” 

The eider-duck is a very retiring bird, placing its 
nest on islands and on rocks that project far out into 
the sea. It is a famous diver, obtaining most of its 
food from the water. It can lay from five to six eggs. 
These are of a pale-green color. 

The spectacled eider-duck is so called from tufts of 
feathers that, resembling spectacles, surround the eyes. 
It is a beautiful bird that is found in the polar regions 
of Alaska. 

The emperor-goose has plumage of a bluish gray 
with lavender or lilac tinting. It is abundant at the 
mouth of the Yukon, and winters chiefly in Alaska and 
on the Aleutian Islands. Its flesh is unfit for food 
owing to the rank taste. 

A great variety of different species of geese, ducks, 
swans, cranes, plover, snipe, and other kinds of water- 
fowl and nest-birds, are found in Alaska during the 
breeding season. 

The loon, or the great northern diver, migrates into 
Alaska from various parts of North and South 
America. This bird is able to remain under the water 
for a much longer time than any other bird except, 
perhaps, the penguin and the cormorant. So rapidly 
can it move while under water that it has no difficulty 
in catching fish for its food. 

310 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


It is very difficult to shoot a loon. To do this the 
hunter is obliged to conceal himself near the water's 
edge, until the bird comes near enough for a shot. 

Happy succeeded in obtaining several excellent speci¬ 
mens of loons for Blavinski, who wished to send them 
to some of his friends in Russia. He had considerable 
difficulty in shooting them, since they seldom approach 
within shooting distance, and are able to sink them¬ 
selves in the water so that the head disappears last. It 
was because of the lad’s ability to shoot quickly that 
he was able to send a rifle-ball through the bird’s head 
as it momentarily remained above the water after be¬ 
ginning to sink. 

Several species of loons are found in Alaska during 
the breeding season. 

The guillemots, or murres, are also excellent divers, 
and can remain under water for a much longer time 
than most other water-fowl. This bird lays one egg 
only, differing in color from pure white through 
various shades of intense red or green, with spots and 
splashes of bluish green and streaks of reddish brown. 
The eggs are laid on projections on the sides of inac¬ 
cessible precipices, down which those hunting for eggs 
are lowered by means of ropes from above. 

The great auk is a water-bird that was at one time 
common in northern Europe, Labrador, and the Scot¬ 
tish Isles. It is sometimes seen in parts of Alaska, but 
is now rare. It has the power of moving through the 
water so rapidly that it is difficult to shoot. 

3 11 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


According to Mr. Lloyd, the auk was once common 
on the almost inaccessible cliffs in Iceland, especially 
on one which on account of the heavy surf was very 
dangerous to approach. 

The great auk is so rare a bird that high prices have 
been offered either for the bird itself or for its eggs. 
In the case of the eggs, this has resulted in the pro¬ 
duction of counterfeits, that were so well done as 
closely to imitate the real articles. 

The puffin is one of the migrating birds of Alaska. 
It is remarkable for the odd shape and enormous size 
of its beak. This peculiarity has given to the bird the 
name of “ sea-parrot.” 

The puffin can readily get its food from the waters 
of the ocean, since it can move so rapidly through them 
as to be able to overtake its prey. It breeds on the 
rocks near the sea, using for this purpose the rabbit- 
warrens. Sometimes its nest is attacked by the raven, 
but the mother bird fights its enemy bravely, and, seiz¬ 
ing it the best it can, tumbles with it into the ocean 
when the raven is drowned, and the mother returns 
victoriously to its home. 

On many of the precipitous sides of the different 
passages and fiords of the inner passage, a great num¬ 
ber of different kinds of birds are to be seen during 
certain seasons of the year. 

Generally speaking, the rivers of central Alaska have 
their head waters in moderately high mountains, while 
3 12 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


a considerable extent of their lower courses are through 
regions that have short, hot summers. Even during 
the hottest months, their sources in the higher regions 
remain frozen while the lower parts are completely 
melted. 

It happens, therefore, that the head waters of most 
of these rivers consist of masses of glacial ice. As the 
snow, falling on the upper courses, slowly descends the 
valleys, it becomes gradually changed into solid ice. A 
fairly large portion of the river channel consists of a 
mass of slowly moving ice. It is the melting of this 
mass in the summer that fills the springs in the neigh¬ 
borhood, or empties directly into the river channel. 

Our party found so much to do at the Happy copper 
prospect that they all spent an additional week there. 
They might have spent a longer time had not a tele¬ 
gram been received from the Gordon mine from Pro¬ 
fessor Engleman, Mr. Christian, and Rob and Emil, 
thanking Happy for the copper claims he had so gener¬ 
ously assigned to them. Although they were not actu¬ 
ally requested in the telegram to return, yet it was easy 
to read in between the lines that their presence was very 
desirable. The telegram ran as follows: 

Congratulations for your success as regards Mashinsky, 
Clinton, and Dimitri, as well as for the copper prospects. 
Many thanks for your generous assignment of copper claims. 
We are uncertain whether we should accept them. Work on 
the Gordon Vein continues very favorably. We greatly miss 
you here, as there is much work to be done. Wire us about 
when we may expect you. 


3 r 3 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


u We ought to return to the Gordon mine as soon as 
possible, Blavinski,” remarked Professor Dimitri, 
when Happy had read the above telegram. “ It is not 
fair to our colleagues to let them do our share of the 
work there any longer than is necessary.” 

“ While I shall return as quickly as possible, gentle¬ 
men,” said Blavinski, “ yet you can understand that I 
must remain here, and at Chitina and Cordova, in 
order to complete the sale of the treasury stock of our 
copper company. I am sure I can be of greater value 
to all of you if here, than if I returned at once to the 
Gordon mine.” 

“ Since Nicholas and Clinton have decided to re¬ 
main,” continued Professor Dimitri, “ our return party 
will consist only of Happy, Bill, Scipio, Awake-in-the- 
Night, and myself. I understand that Zeke is taking 
so much interest in the mine in which he now holds a 
fairly large amount of stock that he has obtained regu¬ 
lar employment from the company, and will start at 
work as soon as he has prepared the specimens for 
Blavinski.” 

The above-named party left Chitina the next day for 
Cordova. They planned to leave Cordova in about a 
week or ten days by steamship to Seattle, and then 
proceed by rail to the Gordon mine. 

As we shall see, by reason of a valuable coal pros¬ 
pect discovered by Happy, it was much later before 
they actually left Cordova. 


314 


CHAPTER XXIII 


A Study of an Alaskan Glacier. The Ice-worm 

They boarded the cars of the Copper River & North¬ 
western Railroad at Chitina, where the stages from 
Fairbanks and intermediate points meet the rails. 
They found the road first-class in all respects and pro¬ 
vided with comfortable cars. 

The river view from the car-windows was exceed¬ 
ingly beautiful, so they took seats on that side. 

“ Sit down in the seat next to us, Bill,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri as they took their seats in the car, “ and 
help us to entertain one another. Now that Blavinski 
has left us for a while, Happy and I may get lonely if 
you go to some other part of the car.” 

“ Sit right here, Bill,” said Happy, getting the con¬ 
ductor to turn the seat next to them so that the two 
seats faced each other. 

“Thanks,” said Bill; “it will do me proud to set 
here with you gents.” 

“ As a stockholder of the Happy Copper Mining 
Company, I am pleased to tell you, Bill, that I have 
word from Blavinski that large subscriptions have been 
made to its treasury stock, and that all the shares have 
been disposed of for cash. This purchase has been 
made by the very rich capitalists connected with the 
315 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

railroad, and with the Bonanza and other mines. Since 
these men and their associates subscribed over twenty 
million dollars for the construction of the railroad, you 
can understand that they could afford to pay a good 
price for the stock of our company, especially if they 
could in this way get the control.” 

“ But they cannot do this,” said Happy with a 
smile. “ As you know, the stockholders have pooled 
their stock and placed it in the hands of Mr. Blavinski 
for voting purposes. Even if they succeeded in pur¬ 
chasing a majority of the stock, which they cannot do, 
the right to vote the stock will remain with him for a 
year from date. Those gentlemen will have to get up 
early if they try to get the start on Mr. Blavinski.” 

“ Tell me, Hap,” inquired Bill, “ what would they 
do when the year passes ef they got more than half of 
the shares of our company? ” 

“ Having a majority of the shares, they could pass 
any resolution at the stockholders’ meeting they wished, 
elect themselves members of the Board of Directors, 
and see that our company does not become a dangerous 
rival.” 

“ That would be wery bad, Hap,” remarked Bill. 
“ I hope they kain’t do it.” 

“ Don’t worry, Bill; our friend Blavinski has a 
majority vote in his hands until next year.” 

“ They are trying to buy all the shares they can and 
are offering twice the par value for them. I should 
not be surprised if we met some of them on the cars 
to-day, as well as when we get to Cordova.” 

3 t 6 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


The correctness of Professor Dimitri’s statement 
was soon demonstrated. Shortly afterward a man ap¬ 
proached them and said to Bill: 

“ May I speak to you privately for a few moments, 
sir?” 

“ Ye kin, fer sure,” remarked Bill, rising and going 
with the man to another part of the train. 

“ I hear you are a holder of stock of the Happy 
Copper Mining Company. Is that correct? ” 

“ I be,” remarked Bill with a grin. “ I hold a tidy 
bit of thet ere stock.” 

“ What will you sell it for? ” inquired the man. 

“ What be ye willing to give? ” replied Bill. 

“ I’ll give you twice its face value in cash.” 

“ Thet price will not do,” replied Bill. 

The man then advanced his offer from two and one- 
half to three times its face value. 

“ I don’t kere to sell,” said Bill; “ but I’ll go back 
to my party and tell them what ye offer.” 

When Bill and the man rejoined his friends, they 
found Scipio occupying the remaining seat alongside 
of that he had been occupying, for as soon as Bill had 
left, Professor Dimitri had said to Happy: 

“ Please go at once and bring Scipio here, my lad. 
If that man gets hold of him he’ll buy all that poor 
fellow’s stock for a mere song.” 

“ This here gent,” remarked Bill as he approached 
them, “ wants to buy the hull of my stock in our 
copper company for three times the price what be 
printed on the certificate.” 

3 T 7 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ And what did you tell him, Bill ? ” 

“ I telled how I didn’t kere to sell, but that I’d 
see what ye thought about it,” replied Bill. 

“ Then, Bill,” said Dimitri, “ I will say, don’t 
sell. If you wish to sell, I think Mr. Blavinski will 
give you more than this gentleman offers.” 

“ What! more than three times its face value? ” ex¬ 
claimed the man in affected surprise. 

“Yes,” was the reply; “more than three times its 
face value.” 

Seeing that Bill would not sell, the man began to 
try to persuade the others to sell. 

“ Have you any of the stock of this company, kid ? ” 
he inquired of Happy. 

“ Yes,” was the reply; “ I have some of this stock.” 

“ The lad to whom you are talking,” said Dimitri, 
“ owns more stock than all of us put together. He is 
the discoverer of the prospect on which the company 
was formed.” 

The man endeavored to conceal his surprise, but 
was unable to do so. 

“ I will have a talk with you some other time,” he 
said as he walked away. 

“ Scipio,” said Bill to his companion, “ come this 
way a piece, Bill wants to tell you something.” 

“ Here comes one of our friends,” said Happy to 
Professor Dimitri, as the train stopped at a station to 
let some passengers on. “ It’s Mr. J. M. Justice, the 
pleasant gentleman we met on the inner passage from 
Seattle.” 


318 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I’m very glad to see you again, gentlemen,” said 
Mr. Justice, approaching them. 

“ Sit down with us here, Mr. Justice,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, pointing to the seat Bill and Scipio had 
just left. “ What are you doing here? Are you going 
back to Seattle by the inner passage ? ” 

“ I think not,” was the reply. “ I am on my way to 
Cordova, but intend stopping off at the Miles Glacier, 
forty-nine miles this side of Cordova. I met a friend 
who is showing the sights of Alaska to an acquaint¬ 
ance who has more money than brains. His acquaint¬ 
ance is a good-natured fellow, but is exceedingly green, 
so green that my friend who is traveling with him 
takes delight in fooling him. He swallows all that is 
told him as he would spring water.” 

“ Studying a glacier is one of the things you prom¬ 
ised yourself on your return to Gordon, Professor 
Dimitri,” said Happy. “ Now our time has been 
shortened, and I fear that you will not be able to visit 
any of the glaciers during this trip.” 

“ I am afraid you are right, Happy,” replied Dimitri. 

“ Why not come with me and my party? ” said Mr. 
Justice. “ It will only require one additional day. The 
conductor will give you a stop-over ticket here. You 
will have plenty of time to take the train for Cordova 
the same time to-morrow morning.” 

“ Are you sure your party will not feel annoyed by 
our presence? ” inquired Dimitri. “ If not, I would be 
pleased to accept your invitation.” 

“ On the contrary, I am sure they would be pleased 
319 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

to have you join us. Besides, I am leading the party, 
and personally invite you to come with us.” 

“ What do you say, Happy?” inquired Dimitri; 
“ would you like to take a day off to examine this 
glacier ? ” 

“ I should very much like to do so, sir,” was the 
reply. 

“ Then find Bill, Scipio, and Awake-in-the-Night 
and tell them to get our things together; that we ex¬ 
pect to leave the cars soon and intend taking a day on 
a glacier.” 

“ Be ye going to look fer minerals, Hap,” inquired 
Bill; “ or be this only a kind of a picnic or excursion ? ” 

“ We will certainly find many minerals, Bill,” re¬ 
plied Happy, laughing, “ for ice and water are min¬ 
erals. But if you mean, do we expect to find minerals 
like gold, silver, copper, or coal, I will say no, al¬ 
though any of them might readily be found in this part 
of Alaska.” 

“ We will get out on the other side of the river,” 
said Mr. Justice after he had introduced them to his 
traveling companions. “ Before we reach the Childs 
Glacier we pass a somewhat larger glacier, similar in 
appearance, called the Miles Glacier. The railroad 
crosses the river between these glacial masses that are 
on opposite sides of the river.” 

“ Then both the Childs and the Miles glaciers dis¬ 
charge into the Copper River, do they, Mr. Justice? ” 
inquired Dimitri. 


3 20 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Yes, they are both tributaries of the river. The 
Miles Glacier, however, discharges into the river at a 
portion of the channel where it broadens into a lake, 
while the Childs Glacier discharges where the waters 
pour rapidly through a channel that is only twelve 
hundred feet in width.” 

“ We get out here,” said Mr. Justice as the train 
stopped after crossing a magnificent five-arched steel 
bridge. 

They had expected to see the Childs Glacier on the 
opposite side of the river when they left the cars, but 
there was nothing much to be seen. 

“ There is a brisk five-minutes’ walk before the Miles 
Glacier can be seen,” said Mr. Justice, “ but you will 
not find it tiresome.” 

What are those dreadful sounds like the booming of 
big guns or volleys of rifle fire? These are truly ter¬ 
rifying. One can hardly escape the conviction that at 
the next turn he will be in the midst of some awful 
carnage. It is not surprising, therefore, that Scipio 
draws near Happy as if for protection, while Bill holds 
himself in readiness to fight, if necessary, in order to 
protect the youngster he so dearly loves. 

“ I specs there be a big battle going on, Marse Hap,” 
exclaimed Scipio. “ Don’t ye think we’d better go 
back afore some big balls cut us uns in twos ? ” 

“ There is no danger, Scipio,” exclaimed Happy. 
“ You will soon see for yourself what makes the noise. 
We are perfectly safe here.” 

3 21 


v 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“What makes these noises, Hap?” exclaimed Bill. 
“ Kin ye explain so ez Bill kin understand ? ” 

“ They are made by the breaking off of huge 
masses of ice from the end of the glacier. Bill,” 
replied Happy. 

After a walk of about five minutes, they reached the 
top of the river’s bank at a place covered with huge 
boulders. Right across the twelve hundred feet that 
separated the two banks of the river, between which a 
mighty torrent was rushing, was to be seen a huge cliff 
of ice, three miles wide and three hundred feet in 
height, of a beautiful turquoise blue below and a 
whitish blue above. 

As the ice mass slowly moved down toward the river, 
huge blocks of ice were broken off at irregular inter¬ 
vals, producing the terrific sounds that resembled the 
guns and rifles above alluded to. As the masses fell 
into the waters of the river they plunged out of sight 
for a moment, but reappearing floated off majestically 
down the river. 

It can easily be understood that, since the masses 
that thus drifted from the end of a slowly moving ice 
cliff often weighed thousands of tons, the waves they 
raised when falling into the river were great, in some 
cases throwing up columns of spray a hundred feet or 
more into the air, often raising waves twenty feet high 
in the water that washed up on the slope of the bank on 
which they were standing. 

“ Look at dem lovely salmon, Marse Hap,” said 

3 22 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Scipio, when at one time these waves left a number of 
magnificent king salmon stranded on the river’s bank 
nearly at their feet. “ Does ye think, Marse Hap, dat 
Scipio could get two or three of dem en case ye might 
like something to eat arter a while ? ” 

“ What do you think, Bill? ” inquired Happy. “ If 
we are careful we should be able safely to get a few 
fish.” 

“ Thar be no danger, Hap,” was the reply, “ ef a 
feller keep his eyes wide open. Suppose you and I 
try.” 

This was done, and three magnificent fish were taken 
in this way from parts of the bank on which they had 
been stranded. 

“ I know that higher up the river, especially in some 
of its small branches, the water is at times so danger¬ 
ous from the copper salt it contains that fish cannot live 
in it. Here, however, the water is evidently quite pure, 
since these are magnificent fish.” 

“ Quite right,” was the reply. “ The river here is 
of large volume and receives through its tributaries, 
some of which are fairly large, the clear, pure water of 
many glaciers. Then too, as of course you know, the 
salmon enter the river from the ocean at its mouth, and 
have not come here from the upper portions.” 

It was a great fascination standing where they 
were and looking across the river at the gradual break¬ 
ing up of the glacier. As a fragment broke off from 
the mass there was heard the report due to the splitting 
of the mass, then the splash and plunge that attended 
323 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the birth of a small iceberg, that floated on its way 
down the river toward its mouth. 

“ Professor Dimitri,” remarked Happy, “ the gla¬ 
cier here reminds me of our gold-quartz vein at the 
Gordon mine, where the water has cut down the mass 
of the quartz-vein for twelve hundred feet or more.” 

“ It is something like it,” was the reply, “ only, of 
course, the quartz mass does not move, while the ice 
mass does.” 

“ The time is passing, gentlemen,” remarked Mr. 
Justice, “ let’s examine the glacier at close range by 
getting on it. It will be more convenient to examine 
the Miles Glacier, since it is on this side of the river. 
I suppose,” he inquired of Professor Dimitri, “ that it 
will make no difference which glacier we examine ? ” 

“ It is the same thing to me whether we study this 
glacier, or that on the opposite side of the river.” 

Before going on the glacier, Happy got his rifle and 
rope, or lasso. 

“ What are you taking that for, Happy ? ” inquired 
Professor Dimitri, pointing to the rope. 

“ It is not much in the road, sir,” he replied. “ I 
might want to use it.” 

It required some time to reach the surface of the 
glacier a few miles above its lower end. Walking 
slowly down the ice mass toward the river, they studied 
its many peculiarities, such as the moraines, or masses 
of rocks and finely ground mineral matter, that in some 
3 2 4 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


places had collected on the top of the moving ice mass 
near its sides. They had excellent chances for study¬ 
ing various other features of glaciers, especially the 
crevasses or fissures in the ice. These varied in width 
from places where the opposite walls were so near to¬ 
gether that a sheet of ordinary writing-paper could 
hardly be placed between them, to crevasses so great 
that it was impossible to cross them. 

In some places the water formed by the melting of 
the surface ice flowed along the surface, plunged into 
some of these crevasses and, melting the ice, formed a 
well into which it poured with a roaring sound. 

It was interesting standing on the edge of some 
great crevasse to look down on the almost vertical 
walls. Near the top the color was white, or that of 
only partially melted or refrozen snow. Farther down 
they could see the wonderfully clear blue ice, from 
which all the air-bubbles had been squeezed out. 

“ There, Happy,” remarked the professor, pointing 
to the different colors on the sides of the crevasse on 
which they were standing, “ one can see the same 
differences in color as those which are to be seen at 
the end of the Childs Glacier.” 

“ I see you have your rifle with you,” remarked the 
younger of the two men, whom Mr. Justice was show¬ 
ing the glacier. “ I am very anxious to obtain a va¬ 
riety of bird known as the ‘ glacier bird.’ It is ex¬ 
tremely rare, and as I have a friend who is anxious to 
obtain a specimen, I should be much obliged if you 
could kill one for me.” 


3 2 5 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I never heard of such a bird, sir,” replied Happy. 
“ Give me a description so that I may know it should 
it come here.” 

The man now entered into a somewhat full but 
thoroughly ridiculous description of the bird. Happy, 
seeing he was trying to fool him, only laughed and 
said: 

“ What is the principal food of the glacier bird, sir? 
I should think it would have difficulty in obtaining its 
food in the ice wilderness.” 

“ That’s just what makes the bird so rare,” was the 
reply. “ It feeds entirely on worms, called ice-worms, 
that on rare occasions come out of the ice mass below 
and appear on the surface.” 

“ I should think,” remarked Happy, laughing, “ that 
both of the animals to which you refer were equally 
rare. Say,” he continued, “ what do you take me for, 
anyhow ? Do you think I’m that easy ? ” 

“ I see I have picked up the wrong party,” replied 
the man. “ I beg your pardon. Don’t say anything, 
please; here comes the old man. He has been hunting 
for ice-worms. Let us hear what he has to say.” 

The gentleman, who was much excited, was carry¬ 
ing something in one of his hands that he examined 
every now and then. 

“ Look,” he remarked to the young man, “ I have 
found the ice-worms you were telling me about. I 
thought you were fooling me, but now I see you were 
right, for here they are.” 

“ Let me examine them, sir,” remarked Happy. “ If 
326 


rhe Land of Ice and Snow 


there are such things as ice-worms, which I doubt, they 
should be well worth looking at.” 

A mere glance at the so-called ice-worm caused 
Happy to laugh long and heartily. He saw at a glance 
that the young man had brought with him a pound or 
so of vermicelli and, breaking it into pieces about an 
inch or so in length had scattered it over the surface 
of the glacier. As soon as the fragments were wetted 
by the water from the melting ice they swelled up so 
as somewhat to resemble a yellowish-white worm. 

“ What are you laughing at ? ” exclaimed the man, 
beginning to fear he had been again fooled. 

“ Scipio,” said Happy to the Negro who was stand¬ 
ing near him, “ tell this gentleman what these things 
are he calls ‘ ice-worms.’ ” 

“ So ye wants Scipio to done tell ye what dem things 
be. They be vermicelli, what Scipio puts in soup. 
What did de gentleman think he find ? ” inquired 
Scipio. 

“ He thought they were ice-worms.” 

This set Scipio in a long, hearty laugh. He then 
remarked: 

“ Ef de gentleman thought dem things be worms 
den he is sure wrong.” 


3^7 


CHAPTER XXIV 


A New Use for a Lasso or Rope 

Though naturally provoked at being caught by so 
evident a trick as vermicelli masquerading as ice- 
worms, the elderly gentleman soon seemed to forget 
all about the matter and followed them in their ex¬ 
amination of the glacier. 

“ Where have you been all the morning, Scipio?” 
inquired Professor Dimitri, as he chanced to see the 
Negro for a few minutes, long after they had been ex¬ 
amining the ice mass. “ Don’t you care to look at the 
glacier ? ” 

“ Scipio had no time to inspectionate de ice, sah,” 
he replied. “ Ef he did, how would de gemmen what 
Scipio looks arter do fer eating? No, sah; ez soon ez 
dis colored individual see whar we intended to be, he 
makes a fire and begins to get ready a little bite to 
eat. Ef ye get hungry by and by, and kin run over 
dere,” he said, pointing to a fire he had kindled on a 
bare slope on one side of the glacier, “ Scipio will hev 
something fer ye to eat. Ye’ll not find it much, sence 
I hevn’t mah cooking things here, but I reckon ye will 
come and kin manage to eat it.” 

“ Will we come, Scipio ? ” inquired Dimitri laughing. 
“ Of course we’ll come, Scipio. How did you manage 
to get anything to eat here ? ” 

328 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ When Marse Hap sent word to Scipio dat ye’d 
get out de cars and hev a kind of picknick on de ice, he 
jess scrambled some things inter a basket so he might 
give ye a leetle lunch. Ye’ll not forget to come over 
dar, will ye ? ” he continued, pointing to the smoke. 

“ Don’t worry, Scipio,” said Happy. “ Bill and I 
will certainly be able to find your tracks. If I keep on 
getting much hungrier than I am, I’ll be looking you 
up before the others get there. Are you feeling 
hungry, Bill?” 

“ Wall, Hap,” said Bill, “ I acknowledge that I sar- 
tinly be hungry now, and will be glad to jine ye arter 
a while in hunting up Scipio.” 

While on the glacier the noises due to the splitting 
and breaking of the ice mass continued, producing 
rumbling sounds not unlike those attending earthquake 
shocks. To make the resemblance still closer, the 
loudest of these rumblings were attended by a shaking 
of the ice mass under their feet. 

There is a marked difference between the appear¬ 
ance of glacial ice and that formed in lakes or rivers, 
or over quiet portions of the ocean. In glacial ice 
there is a marked absence of air-bubbles, and conse¬ 
quently an absence of the whitish color caused by such 
bubbles. After being freed from them, the ice ac¬ 
quires the deep turquoise blue color they had noted in 
the lower portion of the Childs Glacier from the op¬ 
posite side of the river. 

Happy had observed the same peculiarity about the 

3 2 9 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ice of the glacier a short distance below its surface. 
In accordance with his custom, he had been trying 
to reason out for himself the cause of the differences in 
color, etc. He took advantage, therefore, of the op¬ 
portunities afforded by wide and deep crevasses, of 
noting the color and appearance of the deeper ice. 
In one or two instances he obtained specimens of this 
ice for examination, and noting how remarkably free 
it was from air-bubbles, correctly inferred that the 
difference between it and the surface ice was due to 
the absence of these bubbles. 

“ Am I correct, professor,” he inquired of Dimitri, 
“ in thinking that the blue color of the deep ice is due 
to the absence of bubbles ? ” 

“ You are, Happy,” was the reply. “ I am glad you 
are reasoning this out for yourself. That is the best 
way in which one can get correct ideas about glaciers. 
But if you have commenced thinking about these 
things, I am sure some of them will have troubled you. 
If this is so, tell me what they are and we will talk 
them over together.” 

“Thank you, professor,” replied Happy; “among 
other things that puzzle me is this: Since the ice is 
constantly being broken or cracked, why is it not more 
cracked at the end nearest the river than elsewhere? 
There must be some mending process at work. I 
thought at first that, perhaps, the water from the 
melting of the ice filled up the fissures and, freezing, 
mended the cracks. But if this is so, there should be 
places where the ice has been formed that would cer- 
330 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


tainly be different in appearance from the regular gla¬ 
cial ice. Now, since I find no such places, I must 
look for some other explanation. This I have been 
unable to find. Is it known why this is so ? ” 

“ You are a close observer, Happy,” replied Dimitri. 
“ The question you have been asking yourself has 
occurred to many others. I am sure it will interest 
you to learn that there has been no little difference of 
opinion concerning this matter. Some scientific men, 
like Professor Forbes, believe that ice, though quite 
brittle, can, like other brittle substances, be caused to 
flow like fluids, provided the increase in pressure is 
sufficiently gradual. According to this view, it would 
be possible for the glacial ice to flow through the gla¬ 
cier valleys and make changes in its direction without 
much splitting, Assuring, or breaking up. 

“ Another view,” continued the professor, “ first 
proposed by Professor Tyndall, declares that a break¬ 
ing up of the ice mass actually occurs, and that the 
cracks or fissures are mended by a process called 
regelation. It can be shown by experiment that if a 
number of fragments of clean lake ice be subjected to 
a strong pressure, they will be pressed together so as 
to form a solid mass, entirely free from cracks or 
fissures.” 

“ Which is the correct view, professor?” inquired 
Happy. 

“ They are both believed to be correct,” was the 
reply. “ It is certain that a brittle solid, like ice, is 
able to flow like a liquid, so there can be no doubt that 
331 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the greater part of the ice of the glacier does flow very 
slowly under the great pressure to which it is sub¬ 
jected. But at the same time there are, as you have 
seen, continual cracking and splitting and Assuring of 
the ice, and if there were no means for refreezing or 
mending the cracks, the ice mass would, as you have 
imagined, soon be broken throughout much of its 
mass.” 

“ Then ice is not unlike pitch or molasses candy, 
professor,” remarked Happy, after thinking over Pro¬ 
fessor Forbes’ theory of ice yielding under a gradually 
increasing pressure, “ in that it is capable of being 
pulled out or stretched, if only the pulling or stretching 
force is not applied too rapidly. Are these the only 
solids that are capable of doing this, sir? ” he inquired. 

“ By no means,” was the reply. “ Many metals and 
alloys, such as iron, steel, copper, brass, and silver 
have the property of being drawn out into long wires 
to a far greater extent than ice. Do you follow me, 
Happy?” inquired the professor. 

“ Yes, professor, I see it now,” replied Happy. And 
then, rather to himself than to Professor Dimitri, he 
remarked: “ What wonderful things are going on 
around one that are never seen unless a fellow 
does a lot of thinking. But I like it—I certainly 
like thinking.” 

During the conversation the two gentlemen to whom 
Mr. Justice had been showing the glacier, not finding, 
in the scientific discussion between the professor and 
332 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


the lad anything nearly so interesting as either ice- 
worms or glacier birds, had wandered off. Mr. Jus¬ 
tice, who would have much preferred to remain and 
listen to the discussion, went with them, correctly con¬ 
cluding that they could not be trusted to take care of 
themselves. 

In portions of most glaciers during certain sea¬ 
sons of the year, the crevasses are of such frequent 
occurrence that unless great care is exercised, people 
examining them may fall into them and be injured or 
killed. This is especially the case when a fresh fall 
of snow hides the crevasses. Cases are on record 
where lives have been lost by people falling down the 
fissures. Even if not killed outright by the fall, they 
are soon frozen to death by the ice mass that almost 
completely surrounds them. 

When the hidden, snow-covered crevasses are nu¬ 
merous, it is customary to insure protection by se¬ 
curing a long rope, at convenient distances, to the 
bodies of the travelers, so that should one fall into a 
crevasse the others could pull him out. 

Knowing the dangers from crevasses, our party had 
cautioned one another to keep on the outlook for them. 
Nothing occurred until, about half an hour before the 
time they had told Scipio he might expect them to 
lunch, Professor Dimitri, who had gone on ahead of 
Happy and Bill, suddenly disappeared down the sides 
of a deep crevasse, into which he had slipped. 

Happy and Bill, who were close behind him, running 
toward the place, could see their friend resting 
333 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


against an ice wall on one of the sides about thirty feet 
from the top. Fortunately, in falling, his rifle had 
caught between the opposite walls and firmly held him 
in place. 

“ Keep still, professor,” cried Happy. “ Bill and I 
will manage to pull you up.” 

Dimitri made no reply to what Happy had said. 

“ I reckon, Hap,” cried Bill, “ the professor be hurt 
a striking agin the wall. As ye kin see,” he added, 
“ ef it had not been fer his rifle stopping him, he would 
hev fallen much furder down and hev been killed by 
striking the bottom or by being fruz to death.” 

“ It is fortunate I have my rope,” said Happy, re¬ 
ferring to the rope or lasso he had purchased at Seat¬ 
tle on starting by the inner passage, “ I will throw it 
over the man, then you and I can haul him up.” 

“ Thet’s the thing, Hap,” said Bill. “ I know ye 
kin make that ere loop on the rope go war ye wish. 
Throw it over the man’s head and the arm thet be not 
holding the rifle, so we kin draw him up easy like.” 

It was by no means easy to pass the loop of the rope 
where Bill had indicated. But the man had now re¬ 
gained consciousness, and looking up to where Bill 
and Happy were standing seemed to understand just 
what they wished. As Dimitri held his arm out from 
his body as far as the ice wall would permit, Happy 
swung the noose end of the rope around his head. 
When he suddenly let go it moved rapidly toward 
Professor Dimitri, and slipping down over his head 
and his left arm was securely fixed to his body. 

334 



“ Happy swung the . . . 
head ” 


rope around his 
Page 334 























































































































































f 
































































I 













The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ That be a bully cast, Hap,” said Bill. “ It will be 
a pretty hard pull fer the man be wery heavy, but now 
ef we pull graderlly we’ll soon hev the professor safe 
on the ice here.” 

As they pulled, the man, desiring to save his rifle, 
coolly gripped it in his right hand and was safely 
hauled over the top of the crevasse, when Happy and 
Bill drew him to a position of safety. 

“ Now I know,” remarked Dimitri, “ why you 
brought your rope with you, Happy. You have saved 
me from an awful death by your forethought and skill. 
I won’t attempt to thank you, since I know you do 
not like to be thanked. I’ll simply say nothing, but 
shall certainly never forget what you have done.” 

“ Please don’t say anything more about it, Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri,” said Happy. “ I have not done any¬ 
thing remarkable. I only threw the rope over your 
shoulders and, aided by Bill, drew you out of the fis¬ 
sure.” 

“ I understand, Happy,” said Dimitri. “ You have 
only saved me from an awful death. If the Dimitri 
family ever forget what you have done for them it 
will be unlike them. You have not only saved the life 
of my son from certain death by a raging grizzly, but 
now you have drawn me out of this crevasse. As 
you probably remember, Prince Dimitri, my near rela¬ 
tion, is a relative of the Czar of Russia, who I shall see 
hears about what you have done for him.” 

Happy was greatly pleased when he heard Bill say: 

“ Here come Mr. Justice and his crowd. I reckon 

335 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


they intend inviting us to lunch. As ye kin see, they 
hev a big lunch-basket.” 

Glad of the opportunity thus afforded him of es¬ 
caping the further thanks of Dimitri, Happy hastened 
toward the party. 

“Has an accident occurred?” inquired Mr. Jus¬ 
tice, seeing Professor Dimitri lying on the ground 
‘while Bill was unfastening the lasso from his head 
and shoulder. 

“ Professor Dimitri fell into a crevasse,” replied 
Happy; “but nothing serious happened, since Bill 
and I managed to draw him up again by a lasso I had 
with me.” 

Dimitri, hearing what Happy said, gave a correct 
account of what had happened. 

“ It seems to me,” said Mr. Justice to Dimitri, “ that 
the lad has saved you from a terrible death.” 

“ I am fully aware of that,” said Professor Dimitri, 
“ as I have already assured him.” 

“We have come to ask your party to lunch with 
us,” said Mr. Justice. “We have brought an abun¬ 
dance of food, so that you need have no hesitancy in 
accepting the invitation.” 

“ We are much obliged, gentlemen,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, “ but our cook has told us that he will 
have a hot lunch ready for us a short distance from 
here on the glacier, where I think he has managed to 
cook the king salmon you saw washed up from the 
river by the waves caused by the falling of a big mass 
of ice. If this is so, you will understand that there is 

336 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


more fish ready for eating than all of us would be able 
to eat, so let us lunch together.” 

“We have brought some guests, Scipio,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, as they reached the improvised kitchen 
that had been constructed on the bare rocks near the 
glacier. “ I hope you have something to offer them. 
As you see,” he added, “ our guests have brought lunch 
with them. Judging from the size of the basket, I 
think you will find it contains much food.” 

Scipio had been somewhat doubtful whether he 
could properly bake the three magnificent salmon that 
had been washed to him out of the river that morning. 
But his efforts had been crowned with such success 
that he had been bewailing the fact that his skill as a 
cook could not be witnessed by others. He was, there¬ 
fore, in a very good humor when guests were men¬ 
tioned. 

“ Do ye ask Scipio hez he anything fer yer guests 
to eat? ” he inquired. “ Dis here nigger be happy to 
say thet he hez more fer all of ye than kin be eaten. 
Tharfore, sit right down here on the rocks and Scipio 
will help ye to some of the bestest baked salmon he 
hez ever got ready fer eating. But first,” he said, 
“ let’s see what we have here,” and opened the lunch- 
basket so as to spread the food on the rock. It con¬ 
tained such an abundance of excellent food that he 
grinned as he said: 

“ De fellah what packed dis yer basket knowed how 
to put up lunch.” 


w 


337 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


That lunch on the glacier was something none of 
them ever forgot. The baked salmon was especially 
good. The visitors were much surprised at the in¬ 
genuity the Negro had displayed in the construction of 
his stone oven, and did not stint the praise they hon¬ 
estly believed to be the man’s due. 

“Do ye see that, professor?” inquired Bill shortly 
after they had finished eating and while the others 
were sitting talking about the events of the day. 

“ See what, Bill ? ” inquired the professor, rising 
and looking in the direction in which Bill was point¬ 
ing. “ I cannot see anything; is it still in sight? ” 

“ Bill means the bear that is coming down the gla¬ 
cier toward us,” remarked Happy, who had risen and 
was looking in the direction to which Bill had been 
pointing. 

“ Do ye think ye kin hit the critter with yer rifle, 
Hap? ” inquired Bill, as Happy unstrung his rifle so as 
to be in readiness should the opportunity for a shot 
present itself. 

“ Not at this distance, Bill,” said Happy; “ it's too 
far off. What do you think it is, professor ? ” in¬ 
quired Happy, as that gentleman was examining the 
animal through a pair of field-glasses. “ I left my 
field-glasses so as to bring my rifle and rope with me.” 

“ I think it is a rare species of bear, called a glacier 
bear, that lives in the neighborhood of glaciers,” re¬ 
plied the professor. “ I heard Blavinski speaking about 
this bear only a few days before we left our copper 
prospect. He had received a letter from the Czar of 

338 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Russia, who asked him, if possible, to obtain a speci¬ 
men of the animal for his museum. You must, there¬ 
fore, if possible, bag this animal, Happy. Take my 
glass and look at the animal.” 

As Happy did this, he said: 

“ It is a bear all right, but much smaller than the 
ordinary black bear. It has no hump on its shoulders, 
which are on a level with its hips.” 

if What be the color of the fur, Hap? ” inquired Bill. 

“ As nearly as I can see, it is the blue color of the 
silver fox.” 

“ I think it is a glacier bear,” said Dimitri. “ It is 
a very difficult animal to kill, since to chase it over the 
surface of a glacier would be very dangerous. For my 
part, one slip into a crevasse is enough for me. If you 
can kill the animal, please do so, but take no risks by 
attempting to follow it over the glacier.” 

“ All right,” replied Happy. 

They watched the bear as it slowly approached them. 
But the wind, blowing as it was up the glacier, carried 
their scent to the animal who, leaving the glacier on 
its southern border, proceeded leisurely up the moun¬ 
tain slopes as if it had no fear of being pursued. 

“ Ef ye gents will wait fer us,” said Bill, “ Hap 
and me will go arter the critter and see ef we kin 
shoot it.” 

“ I’ll wait for you here,” said Professor Dimitri. 
“ I have bruised one of my legs in the fall, so I had 
better not attempt to use it much, although I could 
walk if necessary.” 


339 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ We’ll ask you to excuse us,” said Mr. Justice. 
“ The gentlemen wish to go back and look again at 
the Childs Glacier. There is a road-house near the 
station at which the cars stopped, where you can get 
accommodations for the night. We will look for you 
there.” And with that they left. 

Bill and Happy followed the bear for nearly four 
miles, until the animal had almost disappeared in a 
small cave that had been formed by the gradual erosion 
of the rock. 

They were now sufficiently near the animal for 
Happy to venture a shot, by which he succeeded in 
bringing it down just as it was disappearing into the 
cave. 

Running to where the animal had dropped dead, 
Bill began examining it. 

“ The critter hez a wery beautiful fur, Hap, but be 
small. I reckon it weighs about one hundred and fifty 
pounds.” 

Not hearing Happy say anything, Bill looked around 
and was surprised to see that instead of listening to 
what he was saying, the boy was examining one of the 
walls of the cave with great care. 

“ What hez struck ye all of a sudden, Hap?” he 
inquired. “ Hev ye diskivered some mineral ? Ef 
so, tell Bill what it be.” 

“ Look for yourself, Bill,” exclaimed the boy. “ The 
cave in which the bear lived is in an excellent seam of 
coal that has been gullied out by the ice and water. 

340 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


As you can see, the seam is of good size, and probably 
extends for a great distance toward the south and east, 
but is for the greater part covered by rock.” 

“ Ye be right, Hap,” said Bill, looking at what the 
lad had described. “ And do ye think, ef this hez not 
been claimed, it be of value as a prospect? ” 

“ If the coal is good this prospect should be of the 
greatest value. Why, think of it, Bill, a good seam of 
coal in this part of Alaska, so near tide-water, and es¬ 
pecially near such a railroad center as Cordova, with 
so excellent a harbor as Cordova Bay! I should not be 
surprised if prospects here may not be of even greater 
value than those of our copper property.” 

“ Then, of course, we will be obliged to stay here fer 
a while until Professor Dimitri kin make an examina¬ 
tion of the place, draw claims fer the same, and have 
them entered regularly at Cordova.” 

“ Of course we will wait, Bill. I say,” he con¬ 
tinued, “ you and I will be very rich if we go on 
finding rich mineral prospects in this way.” 

“ It’s lucky fer me, Hap,” replied Bill, “ that I be 
traveling with sech a generous chap as ye be. Ye must 
stop giving to Bill so much of what ye find.” 

“ When I stop, Bill,” was the reply, “ you can tell 
me about it.” 

“ It is undoubtedly another great find,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri when he had succeeded, in spite of his 
bruised leg, in reaching the prospect. “ We must take 
a day or two here while I examine the place and lay 
34i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


out the claims. This find, I believe, will prove even 
more valuable than that Of the copper ore.” 

“ Of course,” said Happy, “ we will say nothing to 
Justice or his companions about the find.” 

“ Most certainly not,” was the reply. “ I will send 
Blavinski a carefully worded telegram,” said Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri, “ asking him to come here. I should 
like him to see the place, since, if he is willing to be¬ 
come interested in the prospect, it would be to our ad¬ 
vantage. We dare not, however, tell him outright in 
the telegram that we have found another coal-field. 
That would soon crowd the neighborhood with pros¬ 
pectors, and we should be able to get little or nothing 
in the way of prospects for ourselves.” 


342 


CHAPTER XXV 


The New Coal-field 

“ Shall I send only the head and skin or the entire 
animal to Mr. Blavinski ? ” inquired Happy of Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri when, having completed a limited ex¬ 
amination of the seam of coal that was exposed in the 
cave, they were getting ready to go to the station-house 
on the railroad where they had left the train. 

“ Send him the entire animal,” was the reply. “ Let 
him and Zeke determine how they will prepare it. It 
is not very heavy, is it, Bill ? ” 

“ I kin tote the hull critter easy, sir,” remarked Bill, 
picking it up and throwing it over his shoulders. 

“ Then, we’ll send it to Blavinski in the care of 
Zeke, since Petrof will probably leave for this place 
before the animal reaches him,” remarked Professor 
Dimitri. “ I will send him another telegram telling 
him that we are shipping him a glacier bear so he can 
tell Zeke to get it.” 

“ So you are not going on to Cordova as you in¬ 
tended! ” exclaimed Mr. Justice when they met at the 
road-house. 

“ No,” replied Dimitri; “ we saw something near 
the glacier that we wish to look at again. I believe 
you told me you were going directly there ? ” 

“Yes,” was the reply; “my companions take the 

343 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


steamer from Cordova to Juneau and there by the in¬ 
side passage to Seattle. I shall remain in Cordova for 
a while, where I shall probably see you.” 

“ Then we may have the pleasure of your company 
on the steamer that takes the outside passage from 
Cordova to Seattle,” remarked Dimitri. 

“*I hope so, but cannot say until I have seen some 
parties in Cordova. I may go by steamer to Nome. 
If not, I will go to Seattle. But tell me about the 
bear, where did you kill it? The fur is exceedingly 
beautiful, even though this is warm weather.” 

“ The lad shot it on the land several miles southeast 
of the glacier,” replied Professor Dimitri. 

“ Well, good-bye,” said Mr. Justice. “ Here comes 
our train. I’ll hope to see you in Cordova.” 

“Are you good at reading riddles, Nicholas?” in¬ 
quired Blavinski, when he had received Professor 
Dimitri’s telegram. 

“ Not especially so,” was the reply. 

“Are you, Clinton?” he inquired of that gentle¬ 
man. 

“ Trot out your riddle and I’ll do my best to read it 
fer ye,” was the reply. 

“ Then listen,” said Blavinski as he read the fol¬ 
lowing : 

“ Something of great importance remains to be done 
promptly before we leave for the Gordon mine. Meet us 
without fail on the morning train at Miles Glacier. Be sure 
to bring Nicholas and Clinton, especially Nicholas, as we 
may need his professional advice.” 

344 


I he Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Thet be a regular corker, sure,” remarked Clinton. 
“ I ll hev to think a lot afore I kin tumble to it. Kin 
ye help me, Nicholas? ” he added. 

“ Whatever it is,” replied Nicholas, “ it evidently re¬ 
fers to something that occurred unexpectedly and, 
moreover, something that needs to be done at once. 
They may have obtained an offer for the entire copper 
company’s stock, or they may have made discovery of 
a mineral deposit. I think the latter the more probable, 
since they say they may need my professional advice. 
I understand from the place from which the telegram 
is sent that they have left the train to see the Childs 
Glacier. If they have done this, it is quite probable 
that my father would stay over a day to examine a 
glacier, possibly the Miles Glacier. If any mineral de¬ 
posit has been discovered, it may be gold or coal, but 
more probably coal.” 

“ And ef it be coal,” replied Clinton, “ they sartinly 
hev struck what’ll be handy fer our copper mine.” 

“ I think we’ll have to wait until we see them,” said 
Blavinski. “ But of this I am certain, Professor Dimi¬ 
tri would never have asked us to meet him unless he 
had good reasons for doing so. He knows how very 
busy we all are at the Happy copper prospect.” 

There was silence for a while, since the telegram 
had given them much food for thought. This silence 
was finally broken by Dimitri, who said to him: 

“ Let us hear your solution of the conundrum, Pe- 
trof; I am sure you have solved it more clearly than 
either Harry or myself.” 


345 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I am not sure of that,” was the reply; “ but I can 
only think of one thing that would induce Professor 
Dimitri to call us away from our work here and make 
him willing to remain over another day. That, as you 
see, would mean another day away from the Gordon 
mine.” 

“ Let’s have it, Petrof,” exclaimed Nicholas. “ Don’t 
keep us waiting.” 

“ Then I think it very probable that in some way or 
other they have discovered a new prospect near Cor¬ 
dova, and feel that it will be necessary to file claims 
promptly. This, as I understand it, is why they need 
the aid of Nicholas.” 

“ Of course you will go there immediately, Petrof ? ” 
remarked Nicholas. 

“ I most certainly will,” was the reply, “ and I trust 
you gentlemen will go with me.” 

“ Sure,” said Clinton. 

“ I will assuredly go,” said Nicholas. “ The more 
I think over what you have just said, the more prob¬ 
able it seems to me.” 

Happy and his companions carefully refrained from 
talking about the matter, fearing their conversation 
might be overheard. They especially warned Scipio 
not to say anything about the matter. That night, 
however, when they had retired, Professor Dimitri 
said in a low tone to Happy: 

“ It is fortunate that I have made a careful study of 
the Alaskan coal-fields by reading the various reports 
346 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of the United States Geological Society on these de¬ 
posits. Briefly, there are two things that can be said 
about them: viz., they are very extensive, and the coal 
some of them contain is fully equal in character to 
the best coal mined in any part of the world.” 

“ I am glad to see, Blavinski, that you have brought 
both Nicholas and Clinton with you,” remarked Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri the next morning on the arrival of the 
train. 

“ I have been puzzling over your telegram,” said 
Blavinski to Professor Dimitri, as soon as he and his 
companions had greeted them, and they had gone aside 
where they could speak freely. 

“ What did you make of it, Petrof ? ” inquired the 
professor. 

“ I am not certain,” was the reply, “ but the conclu¬ 
sion I have reached is that you have discovered a 
mineral prospect in the neighborhood that you think 
should be correctly described and promptly claimed. 
Am I correct ? ” 

“ Yes; and now for a guess at the character of the 
mineral.” 

“ It will only be a guess,” was the reply, “ but I sin¬ 
cerely trust I am correct when as I guess I say coal.” 

“ Quite right,” was the reply; “ but come with me. 
Bill and Scipio have gone on ahead. Let us leave our 
things at the station-house and get away from here 
where we might be heard.” 

As soon as this was done, they told of the discovery 

347 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


of the coal-seam and how it had been accomplished 
during the shooting of the bear. 

Blavinski was delighted at the news, especially when, 
after the cave had been reached, he saw that the vein 
was a large one and the coal an excellent anthracite. 

“ I wonder if you gentlemen fully understand how 
valuable claims will be on this prospect, if we can 
properly make claims ? ” he exclaimed. 

“ There are no monuments or other marks showing 
that the place has ever been visited,” exclaimed Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri. “ As to the difficulty of obtaining 
claims just now in coal lands in Alaska, I'feel sure that 
properly drawn and filed claims will be executed and 
eventually awarded to you.” 

“ Can you tell us what coal-fields have already been 
discovered in this part of Alaska, professor? ” inquired 
Blavinski of the older Dimitri. 

“ As far as I know, the only important extended 
coal-fields in this part of Alaska are the Bering River 
coal-fields, the Matanuska coal-fields, and the coal¬ 
fields of Cook Inlet in the Kenai Peninsula.” 

“ Then the new field you have discovered,” re¬ 
marked Blavinski, “ lies near the Bering River coal¬ 
fields. Is that correct ? ” 

“ Quite correct,” was the reply. 

“ And this field is much nearer the Copper River 
Railroad than any part of the Bering River coal¬ 
fields?” continued Blavinski. 

“ Our field is almost directly on the Copper River 
Railroad, Blavinski,” was the reply. 

348 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I think I need say nothing further,” remarked Bla- 
vinski, “ to convince you of the immense importance of 
the new coal-field, not only to the Happy copper pros¬ 
pect, but as a coal-field generally.” 

“ I think we understand its great importance,” re¬ 
marked Professor Dimitri. 

“ You can readily understand,” said Blavinski, 
“ what great excitement will be caused when it is 
learned that a new coal-field, so splendidly situated, 
has been discovered. Of course,” he added, “ you 
have been extremely careful to keep the matter a pro¬ 
found secret.” 

“ Don’t worry yourself, Petrof,” replied Professor 
Dimitri. “ We have, I believe, taken all possible pre¬ 
caution to avoid the matter becoming known before 
the claims have all been regularly made out and entered 
at Cordova.” 

The two mining engineers, father and son, began a 
careful examination of the new coal-field. As a re¬ 
sult of this examination they stated as their opinion 
that there could be no doubt but that a very consider¬ 
able area, probably including all the land between the 
Childs and the Miles glaciers, contained coal at no 
very great distance below the surface, and a coal of 
the same character as that of the Bering River coal¬ 
fields. 

The geological character of the strata in this district 
showed the probability of this. Moreover, the coal in 
sight was an excellent variety of anthracite. There 
349 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


was one indication they did not like; i. e., there was 
considerable faulting and breaking of the rocks, so 
that probably much of the coal would be found broken, 
or in the condition of slack. Fortunately, there was a 
marked absence of faulting toward the east. They 
began mapping out the land, but put up no monuments, 
only indicating their sites, while at the same time 
Clinton entered claims at Cordova. 

During the work, which required three days, they 
camped in the neighborhood, but in a place that was 
out of the line of travel. Meanwhile Happy and Bla- 
vinski learned much concerning the value of coal 
lands, both from Professor and Nicholas Dimitri. 

“ The value of a deposit of coal,” said Happy to 
Professor Dimitri one day, “ depends on many differ¬ 
ent things, does it not ? ” 

“ It does,” was the reply. “ Would you like me 
briefly to mention them?” 

“ If you please, sir,” was the reply. 

“ There are many circumstances that determine the 
money value of a coal-bed,” said the professor. “ I 
will endeavor to name them in the order of their im¬ 
portance, as they are mentioned by Alfred H. Brooks 
in a report to the United States Geological Society. 

“ The first circumstance that determines the value of 
a coal deposit is its geographical position. Unless the 
field can be readily reached under commercial condi¬ 
tions, by railway or water, the deposit will have no 
commercial value.” 


350 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Then in that respect,” remarked Blavinski, who 
heard the above conversation, “ our new coal-field is all 
right.” 

“ Quite correct,” was the reply; “the new field is 
more favorably situated than any of the other coal¬ 
fields in this locality.” 

“ In the next place,” continued Professor Dimitri, 
“ the coal-bed must not be too thin nor lie too far below 
the surface.” 

“ What would you call too thin or too far below the 
surface, Nicola ? ” inquired Blavinski. 

“ Generally speaking, no coal-bed should be less 
than two or three feet in thickness. The depth below 
the surface would depend on the character of the coal; 
the higher its quality and, of course, the price at 
which it can be sold, the farther below the surface it 
can be profitably worked.” 

“ Do you know about how far below the surface beds 
of coal can be profitably worked? ” inquired Blavinski. 

“ I believe,” replied Professor Dimitri, “ that the 
limit can be taken at three thousand feet for the best 
grades of anthracite and semi-anthracite coal; two 
thousand feet for the .best grades of semi-bituminous 
coal; and one thousand feet for the lignites and other 
lower grades of coal.” 

“ As to that,” remarked Blavinski, “ we are unable 
to speak definitely.” 

“ No,” replied Professor Dimitri, “ to answer that 
question many borings with diamond drills would be 
required. By thus obtaining the cores, we would know 
351 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


definitely the cost of mining. Of course, until our 
claims are properly filed it would be foolish to go 
to the expense of an exploration by means of dia¬ 
mond drills. 

“ Another important thing that determines the 
money value of coal is its quality. Now, as you all 
know, there are a variety of coals, such as anthracite, 
semi-anthracite, semi-bituminous, bituminous, and lig¬ 
nite. These are named in the order of their money 
value per ton, beginning with the most valuable. 
Since the coal in our deposits is anthracite, and prob¬ 
ably other high-grade coals, we are all right,” said the 
professor. 

“ Another thing is the cost of mining,” he con¬ 
tinued. <k It may cost as much to mine one ton of lig¬ 
nite as it does to- mine a ton of bituminous coal. In 
such a case it is a matter of simple computation what 
price the product would bring in the open market. 
The cost of mining must, therefore, be carefully con¬ 
sidered in determining the money value of coal.” 

“ That too is something that remains to be deter¬ 
mined in the case of our new field,” said Blavinski. 

“ Another very important thing that determines the 
money value of a coal deposit is the market that is open 
to it.” 

“ As to that,” said Blavinski, “ our market would 
seem to be assured. Not only have we much of 
Alaska, but there are markets on the great ocean 
waterways. Fortunately, we have in Cordova Bay 
harbor a most excellent tide-water harbor.” 

352 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Let me read you something concerning the char¬ 
acter of Alaska coal,” said Professor Dimitri. “ It is 
from a report by Alfred H. Brooks, to whom I have 
already referred.” Pie then read the following: 

About one-half of the known tonnage of Alaska 
coal is lignite, a little over one-fifth is anthracite and 
high-grade bituminous coal, and the rest falls into the 
bituminous and sub-bituminous classes. It is fair to 
assume that these ratios will hold for the coals of the 
areas on which no tonnage estimates are possible. 

“ ‘ The anthracite of the Bering River and Mata- 
nuska fields is but little below that of Pennsylvania in 
composition. To judge from the amount of deforma¬ 
tion that the rocks in which the beds occur have under¬ 
gone, it seems probable that much of the anthracite will 
yield a large amount of slack. It is possible that some 
of the beds are so crushed as to make it necessary to 
defer their mining until some method of utilization of 
the fine coal has been devised. The coals classed as 
semi-anthracite are of about the same composition as 
the Loyalsock or Bernice Basin coals of Pennsylvania. 

“ 4 The higher-grade bituminous (semi-bituminous) 
coals of the Bering River and Matanuska fields are 
comparable in composition and heating power with the 
Georges Creek, New River, and Pocahontas coals of 
the East. Many of these beds also include a large 
amount of slack, which may, however, be utilized under 
boilers or for making coke. The lower-grade Alaska 
bituminous coals compare favorably in composition 
with the coals of Japan, Vancouver Island, Washing- 
353 


x 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


ton, and Australia. This is an important point, as 
these are the fuels with which the Alaskan coal must 
come in competition.’ ” 

“ It must not be forgotten,” said Professor’ Dimitri, 
“ that we will have many difficulties to overcome before 
we can get the new coal-beds in actual commercial 
operation. The present coal-land laws render it prac¬ 
tically impossible for individuals to obtain title to coal 
lands. Indeed, I find a statement by Brooks to the 
effect that during the last decade not a single acre 
of coal land had gone to patent in Alaska prior to July 
i, 1910. 

“If the number of acres that can be patented by a 
single individual is limited to one hundred and sixty, 
and it is forbidden by law to work a number of sepa¬ 
rate claims under a single company or organization, 
then it will necessarily be impossible to open a coal¬ 
field on the basis of single one-hundred-and-sixty-acre 
tracts, since the cost is too great and the construction of 
new or of branch railroads would only be possible 
under a large capitalization.” 

The following, taken from reports to the United 
States Geological Report, is given in an article in 
the “ Alaskan Almanac ” concerning the Alaska coal¬ 
fields : 

“ The known areas of coal-bearing rocks in Alaska 
cover twelve thousand six hundred and forty-four 
square miles, and the unknown areas twelve hundred 
and thirty-eight square miles. 

354 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ The most important coal deposits in Alaska are the 
Matanuska coal-fields near the head of Kuik Arm of 
Cook Inlet, and the Bering River coal-fields near Ka- 
talla. These two coal-fields are similar in character, 
both fields containing extensive deposits of anthracite, 
semi-bituminous, and bituminous coal. The Mata¬ 
nuska coal-fields cover an area of about fifty square 
miles; the coal-fields of the Bering River cover an area 
of about the same size, but there is a larger area of 
anthracite coal in the Bering River field. 

“ As regards ports, the Matanuska field is twenty- 
five miles from tide-water; i. e., the Cook Inlet. Un¬ 
fortunately, the inlet freezes in the winter and the 
nearest open seaport, Resurrection Bay, is one hun¬ 
dred and fifty miles distant. 

“ The Bering River coal-fields are within twelve 
miles of Katalla. The heat value of this coal is higher 
than the Matanuska field. 

“ As to the coal-fields in northern Alaska, i. e., on 
the Arctic slopes, there are some two hundred and 
twenty square miles of beds, some fifty-five miles of 
this area have underlying strata of semi-bituminous 
coal of an excellent quality; the remainder is bitumi¬ 
nous coal, equal in quality to the best bituminous coal 
of the East.” 

The following extract taken from a review of the 
mineral products of Alaska by Alfred H. Brooks, will 
be interesting: 

“ The value of the high-grade fuels of the Pacific 

355 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


seaboards probably exceeds that of the gold deposits, 
and the exploitation of these coal-fields is of the great¬ 
est importance to the entire western seaboard of the 
continent. These coals will furnish not only the high- 
grade steam coals needed for various industries, but 
also the coke for metallurgical enterprises. If the iron 
ores of the territory prove valuable, the west coast 
may yet be supplied from this source with the raw ma¬ 
terials for the manufacture of iron and steel. In any 
event, the copper smelters can be provided with coke 
of a high grade.” 


356 


CHAPTER XXVI 


The Copper River & Northwestern Railroad 

Although the examination of the prospects by the 
two Dimitris was very brief, being limited to about 
three days, in their opinion there was a comparatively 
large area that was underlaid by valuable coal-beds. 
When they came to laying out claims, they were met 
by the difficulty that an exceedingly uncertain condi¬ 
tion of affairs existed as regards the coal-land laws. 
As well as they could then ascertain, the existing laws 
limited the amount of land that could be claimed by a 
single individual to one hundred and sixty acres. 
Moreover, the law had been interpreted that it was 
illegal for the owners of any of the one-hunclred-and- 
sixty-acre tracts to combine their tracts so as to make 
them sufficiently large to insure successful working 
conditions. In order to avoid this difficulty an act was 
passed making it legal to consolidate sixteen separate 
claims, or tracts of two thousand five hundred and sixty 
acres, if staked prior to March 12, 1906. But even 
this concession was rendered impracticable, since a 
clause in the law invalidated the title if any individual 
or corporation at any time in the future, owned any 
interest whatsoever, either directly or indirectly, in 
more than a single tract. Since under such a law land 
taken up might be forfeited to the general government 
357 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


through the action of an individual, either innocently 
or purposely, the large investment so necessary for 
successful coal mining was effectually barred. 

“ There is only one thing we can safely do, gentle¬ 
men,” said Blavinski, “ we must take expert advice. 
This is too important a matter for any of us to attempt 
to handle alone. I will go to Cordova with Nicholas 
Dimitri and take the professional advice of the best 
mining lawyer I can find. He will be able to tell us, 
if anyone can, how we can best safeguard the large 
interests we have in these prospects.” 

It may be said that this was done. The advice re¬ 
ceived was that they should cover a considerable tract 
of land by claims in the names of Happy, Bill, the 
Dimitris, Blavinski, Clinton, Zeke, and Scipio; that as 
soon as their rights were thus provisionally secured, 
they should thoroughly explore the lands by cores ob¬ 
tained by diamond drills. 

It was during the negotiations that they were com¬ 
pelled to consider carefully the question of means for 
transporting the product to tide-water, as well as to 
find a suitable shipping-point, or a harbor large enough 
and open for a sufficient length of time during the year 
to make the commercial handling of coal possible. 

The highly mineralized district lying between the 
Gulf of Alaska on the Pacific Ocean on the south, and 
the valley of the Yukon on the north, owing to a num¬ 
ber of physical peculiarities, is very difficult of access 
from the coast. 


358 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


In the first place, about fifty miles from the coast the 
Chugach Mountains, with an altitude of from five thou¬ 
sand to eight thousand feet, and a culminating point in 
Mount St. Elias, with an altitude of about eighteen 
thousand feet, almost completely cut off communica¬ 
tion with the interior. Then too, a number of glaciers, 
the largest of which, the Malaspina, with a frontage of 
at least forty miles, discharges directly into the sea. 

The only practicable entrance to the interior is to be 
found in the valley of the Copper River that admits of 
a passage through the mountain barriers into the 
interior. 

There are, however, serious difficulties in the use of 
the valley of the Copper River as the road into the 
interior. In the first place, the river has a delta mouth 
of considerable size, nine thousand square miles in 
area, and discharges into the ocean through a net¬ 
work of small rivers, unnavigable by any but very 
small boats, and separated by deposits of sand and 
gravel. Moreover, there are two glaciers—the Childs 
and the Miles—that discharge directly into the river 
and are, therefore, hopeless barriers to the passage over 
them of the bed of a railroad. There are also danger¬ 
ous rapids in the main channel of the river at this point, 
although above this, the river is open to practicable 
navigation by steamboats. 

When the Copper River route was determined on, a 
place on the coast called Katalla was selected as the 
place for a terminal station, but this was abandoned 
owing to the lack of a suitable harbor. It is true 

359 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


that Controller Bay was selected, but after extended 
efforts to find on it a practicable harbor it was aban¬ 
doned. Valdez, at the head of Prince William Sound, 
was selected in its place, since here there is a good 
harbor that is open at all seasons of the year and in 
practically all kinds of weather. This terminus was, 
however, reluctantly abandoned by the presence of the 
Chugach mountain range, already referred to, and the 
lack of a suitable roadway into the interior. 

A suitable tide-water terminus was at last found in 
an arm of Prince William Sound, on a land-locked arm 
of the bay, of sufficient size to afford a safe and most 
commodious harbor. This remains open the year 
around, and is not affected by severe storms nor by 
changes in the tides. Near this place a town site was 
selected named Cordova, now a flourishing city, al¬ 
though only a few years old. The harbor is known as 
Cordova harbor. 

There were many difficulties in constructing the 
Copper River Railroad from Cordova over the Copper 
River Delta and past the rapids and glaciers and, as 
will be subsequently related, a considerable outlay of 
money was necessitated. 

The Copper River Railroad has recently been com¬ 
pleted to Chitina, about one hundred and thirty miles 
from Cordova, with an extension to Kennecott at the 
great copper mine known as the Bonanza, about one 
hundred and ninety-five miles by rail from Cordova. 

It is probable that branch lines will be eventually 

36° 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


constructed to the head waters of the Nebesna and 
White rivers where there is another rich copper belt, 
also toward Copper Center, and possibly beyond to 
Fairbanks. 

One day while at work on the coal claim Happy 
remarked to Nicholas Dimitri: 

“ Uncle Harry told me that owing to the mud-banks 
and sand-bars near the mouth of the Copper River, it 
was necessary to go a considerable distance to find a 
place at tide-water where the coal and copper could 
readily be placed on steamers; that is, where there was 
a harbor that was readily accessible from the ocean.” 

“ That is true,” was the reply; “ there are only three 
such places: at Katalla on the east, at Valdez on the 
west, and at Cordova in the west.” 

“ Which of these places was selected, sir? ” inquired 
Happy. 

“ After much money was spent in determining the 
advantages of these three places as compared with 
one another, Cordova was selected. What perhaps 
more than anything else,” continued Dimitri, “ de¬ 
termined the railroad people to select Cordova as 
the terminus of the road, was the better harbor fa¬ 
cilities afforded by Cordova Bay. At Valdez, al¬ 
though there was a good harbor, yet there were no 
means for readily passing through the Chugach Moun¬ 
tains and at the same time finding a suitable place for 
a roadbed for the rails through the interior. At Ka¬ 
talla, the only place that could be regarded as a harbor 

36 1 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


was Controller Bay; at Cordova, a harbor known as 
Cordova Bay harbor. The first was found to possess 
so many serious objections that Cordova was selected.” 

Blavinski obtained much information from the 
lawyer he had consulted as to the best means for safely 
filing their coal claims. 

“ There are,” remarked the lawyer, “ two very rich 
associations of capitalists in this part of Alaska: the 
copper people and the Bering River coal people. The 
copper people are practically the same as the Copper 
River Railroad people. While some of those inter¬ 
ested in the Bering River coal own stock in the Bo¬ 
nanza mines, yet most of them are interested solely in 
the coal deposits and in Katalla as a town site. In¬ 
stead of getting together or taking a common ground, 
these parties have bitterly fought each other. In doing 
this a controversy has arisen as to the relative merits 
of Controller Bay and Cordova Bay as harbors.” 

“ I have read much about that controversy,” said 
Blavinski. 

“To make the matter all the worse,” continued the 
lawyer, “ the newspapers have taken sides. In some 
instances instead of treating the matter as a matter of 
news, and therefore of fact, some have apparently per¬ 
mitted sentiment to influence their opinions and have 
made statements that do not appear to be based on 
actual facts.” 

“ What would you advise us to do? ” inquired Bla¬ 
vinski. 


362 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Do all you can to secure the greatest area of these 
new coal lands. As soon as this is done, spend suffi¬ 
cient money to explore them and determine their value 
by a study of the character of the coal deposits—of the 
thickness of the beds and of the distance below the 
surface. When this is done you can determine whether 
you will endeavor to hold all the land yourselves, or 
will be ready to share it with others should you re¬ 
ceive any proposition to that end.” 

“ But who would be apt to make such a proposi¬ 
tion?” inquired Blavinski. 

“ My dear sir,” replied the lawyer, “ I would not 
take the responsibility of saying just what parties 
would be apt to do this, but I think you can under¬ 
stand that a large coal-field would be of immense value 
to the owners of the Bonanza mines; it would also be 
to the interest of the railroad people to acquire an 
interest in these new coal lands.” 

“ And what kind of a proposition do you think they 
might possibly make? ” 

“ To buy outright for a handsome sum; to buy for a 
larger sum to be paid partly in their bonds and stocks; 
or a simple proposition for what will practically mean 
a kind of partnership, they aiding you in your secur¬ 
ing coal rights, as well as in making surveys themselves 
so as to acquire more extended rights, and agreeing to 
give you a certain proportion of interest in the whole 
property, say one-fifth, one-fourth, or some other frac¬ 
tional part to be mutually agreed on.” 

“ But would not such an agreement be practically of 

3^3 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


such a nature as would imperil the loss of all rights by 
the United States Government declaring all grants as 
forfeited? ” 

“ It would,” was the reply; “ but so far as I can see, 
that difficulty will probably exist whatever you do. Of 
course, you see that by agreeing to take a cash pay¬ 
ment down for all your rights you avoid all uncer¬ 
tainties of this character.” 

“ I certainly do,” replied Blavinski, “ and will con¬ 
sult with our people as to what will be our best steps.” 

The following description of the Copper River & 
Northwestern Railroad has been condensed from va¬ 
rious publications, including a folder of the railroad. 
It will be convenient to describe some of the more 
important features of the road from its terminal sta¬ 
tion at Cordova to the eastern terminus near Kenne- 
cott: 

For the first mile out of Cordova the road skirts 
Eyak Lake, remarkable for its splendid fishing. Then 
breaking through a narrow gap in the mountains, it 
begins crossing the delta of the Copper River, that con¬ 
sists here of twenty miles of silt-laden flats, bordered 
by mountain ranges and net-worked by glacial streams. 

The road effects a passage at the sea level of a coast 
spur of the Chugach Mountains, and affords the only 
point of easy penetration to the interior of Alaska from 
the south coast. 

Twenty-four miles out from Cordova is the old 
Russian fur-trading post, where the Copper River In- 

364 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


dians formerly met to sell their catches. It is now the 
railroad station for the McKinley Lake mining dis¬ 
trict, a center of the recent gold excitement. 

About fifty miles out from Cordova the engineers 
of the road were obliged to overcome great difficulties 
by crossing the Copper River between the Childs and 
the Miles glaciers by a bridge known as the Miles 
Glacier Bridge. Several miles beyond the road passes 
through the Allen Canon, formerly the Abercrombie 
Canon. From thence it continues toward the north¬ 
east on a part of the Baird Glacier, on through a pre¬ 
cipitous slit in the mountain, the Ward Canon, for a 
distance of some twenty-five miles, and thence on to 
Chitina. Here the road passes through a solid rock 
tunnel and makes a third crossing of the Copper River, 
immediately above the mouth of the Chitina River, and 
climbs the valley to the Kotsina River. The crossing 
of the Kaskulana Gorge requires another steel bridge, 
two hundred and fifty feet above the floor of the gorge. 
It then continues up the valley of the Chitina to the 
Bonanza mine at Kennecott. 

The four magnificent steel bridges above referred to 
weigh in all some twenty million three hundred thou¬ 
sand pounds, and cost in round figures two million five 
hundred thousand dollars, the bridge across the river 
at Miles Glacier alone costing one million five hun¬ 
dred thousand dollars. 

To people in the East, who have never seen the part 
of Alaska through which the road, as already con¬ 
structed, extends, or the parts through which its 

365 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


extension will eventually pass, it may seem that the 
expenditure of the twenty million dollars that the road 
cost is unwarranted for such a remote and sparsely 
scattered country. But this is because the wonderful 
products of the country are unknown to such people. 
When the advantages of the country are better under¬ 
stood it will be seen that these expenditures are thor¬ 
oughly warranted. Its valuable mineral deposits of 
copper, coal, and other minerals would undoubtedly 
amply warrant such expenditure. 

But these rich deposits of copper and coal are not 
the only sources of natural wealth. During the sum¬ 
mer months the temperature is so high that splendid 
agricultural crops are possible. In the valley of the 
Copper River, wheat, rye, oats, and barley can be suc¬ 
cessfully cultivated. Garden vegetables of the first 
quality can be raised. A market for these can be found 
in the mining population that is already considerable. 
The government of the United States is therefore 
offering homestead rights of three hundred and twenty 
acres to every American citizen who will settle in the 
district. Besides this there is stock-raising, and in 
some sections excellent timber. Then too, valuable 
deposits of iron ore have been found in the regions 
passed through by the railroad. 

In addition to the above, the beauties of the won¬ 
derful scenery are certain to attract many tourists, re¬ 
sulting in great profit from transportation. 


366 


CHAPTER XXVII 


Cordova, the Open Sesame to Central Alaska 

At last Blavinski had made all the arrangements pos¬ 
sible in Cordova, and Professor Dimitri, Happy, Bill, 
and the others had left the coal prospects and were on 
their way on the Copper River & Northwestern Rail¬ 
road to join him. 

There is a peculiarity about Cordova that is very 
striking to those who see it for the first time. While 
possessing all the peculiarities of a rapidly growing 
town, yet there is practically an entire absence of old 
buildings. Generally, in all towns or colonies, there 
are at least some remnants of an old town. But this 
is not so in Cordova. The town is too new. The site 
was deliberately selected only a few years ago, and 
then laid out by its founders and building operations 
begun. 

It was Bill who first referred to this peculiarity 
after he and Happy had strolled through the town 
when they had registered at one of its four modern 
hotels. 

“ This here town be tarnation queer, Hap,” he re¬ 
marked to his companion after a long silence. 

“ What makes you think it queer, Bill ? ” inquired 
Happy, who had been watching his companion’s face 
and had but little difficulty in guessing at his thoughts. 
367 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Why thet this here town-. I reckon,” he said, 

correcting himself, “ I ought to say city—hez sech 
beautiful buildings and streets, and yet it ain’t got any 
old buildings thet were here afore the railroad was 
built. Kin ye explain it, Hap ? ” he added. 

“ It’s simple enough, Bill,” replied Happy. “ It is 
because it is so young a town. I understand the rail¬ 
road that caused the town was built only a few years 
ago, and so everything is necessarily new. When the 
railroad needed a place at tide-water on the coast where 
there was a good harbor, open all the year round; 
where the boats and steamers could meet the cars and 
take their merchandise, it selected this place. Trees 
were cut down, streets laid out, and, when necessary, 
solid rocks were blasted out, and buildings begun. Of 
course there are no old houses to be seen in Cordova. 
You understand now, don’t you, Bill?” 

“ I kin alius understand when ye explain things, 
and I be much obliged to ye, Hap,” remarked Bill. 

“ If you see any store, Bill, that has books for sale, 
let me know. I am almost sure that in an enterprising 
town like this, they will have for sale something de¬ 
scribing the town and telling of its rapid growth from 
the time the town site was laid out until now.” 

“ Thar be a big store, Hap,” replied Bill, pointing 
to a department store, “ and thar be some books in 
one of the winders.” 

“ That looks promising, Bill,” said Happy. “ Let’s 
go in and inquire.” 

“ Have you any printed matter describing the town 

368 



The Land of Ice and Snow 


and its growth, sir ? ” inquired Happy when he and 
Bill had entered the store. 

“ I can give you just what I think will suit you,” re¬ 
plied the man, as he handed Happy a small book about 
the size of an ordinary magazine. “ As you will see,” 
he remarked, “ it is called ‘ Cordova, Gateway to the 
Interior of Alaska.’ ” 

“ Can one rely on the correctness of the statements 
it contains? ” inquired Happy. 

“ You certainly can, young man,” was the reply. 
“ This book has been prepared under the direction of 
the Cordova Chamber of Commerce, for the purpose 
of giving reliable information to inquirers from all 
parts of the country as to the advantages that are 
claimed for the place.” 

“ I am glad to hear that,” said Happy, “ for I do 
not believe sensible business men would foolishly boom 
a place more than the facts warrant. They want 
people to take up lots here who intend pushing 
their business and not simply to sell at a profit and 
clear out.” 

“ Young man,” said the man, “ I see you are a 
level-headed fellow.” 

Ye may give me one of them books too,” said Bill, 
putting down his money when Happy had taken a 
book for himself. 

“ Going to read the book through, Bill ? ” inquired 
Happy as they left the store. 

“ I be, Hap,” was the reply; “ thanks to ye, Bill kin 
read now. And sence he kain’t remember things ez 
y 369 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


well ez ye kin, he'll arsk ye to read the book out loud 
and then arterward he’ll read his by hisself.” 

“All right, Bill,” replied Happy; “let’s go back to 
the hotel and I’ll read the book. It’s not very long, so 
I think we can go through nearly all, from the first to 
the last page, in one reading.” 

“ In the first place, Bill,” said Happy on reaching 
their room, “let’s see just where Cordova is. It is 
twelve hundred and thirty-six miles southwest of Seat¬ 
tle, four hundred miles from Juneau, one hundred and 
fifty miles from Seward, and about four hundred miles 
from Fairbanks.” 

“That’s good fer a starter, Hap,” said Bill; “I 
don’t want to stop yer reading, but did ye notice that 
the feller what sold ye the book did not call ye, ‘ my 
lad ’ as some of our gents do ? I’ll be durned ef he 
didn’t call ye ‘ young man,’ ” said Bill, as if the name 
had greatly pleased him. “ But go on, please, I 
wanted to blow out about this thing. Now, I hev 
blowed out, I kin listen to ye straight on to the end.” 

“But I don’t want you to keep quiet, Bill,” said 
Happy. “ I would rather you’d speak out, ask ques¬ 
tions, and tell me just what you think about anything 
I read to you. Here is something that will answer the 
question you put to me, Bill, about the absence of old 
houses. As you will see, the city—I guess we’ll call 
it a city—is younger than I thought. Its site was 
surveyed and plotted, and the first lots placed on sale 
on May 19, 1908. During that year the town-site 
370 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


company expended one hundred thousand dollars for 
street improvements from money it obtained from the 
sale of lots. 

“ In 1909 there had been installed systems of electric 
light, telegraphs, telephones, and pure water supply 
under a pressure of eighty-nine pounds to the square 
inch.” 

“ These fellers laid out streets that be bully and 
wide, didn’t they, Hap ? ” remarked Bill. 

“ They did for a fact, Bill,” replied Happy. 
“ This books says the streets have a width of seventy 
feet, and that the alleys between them are twenty feet 
wide. 

“ Cordova was incorporated as a city July 8, 1909. 
We must therefore call it a city,” said Happy. 

“ Listen to this, Bill,” continued Happy, reading 
from the book: “ Cordova has now a population of 
two thousand. It has churches, a modern hospital, 
four modern hotels furnished with electric lights, hot 
and cold water, and steam heat. It has three drug¬ 
stores, two transfer companies, one of which is fur¬ 
nished with an automobile that runs from the dock to 
the town. Besides this, it has all the more important 
kinds of stores, restaurants, clothing houses, a moving- 
picture theater, several daily and weekly newspapers, 
meat-markets, fish-markets. There are a number of 
lawyers, doctors, dentists, and other professional men 
living here. But what we must not forget, it already 
has a schoolhouse that cost ten thousand dollars. 

37i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Besides the above,” continued Happy, “ Cordova 
has long-distance telephone wires connecting with 
Katalla. It also has a wireless apparatus that commu¬ 
nicates with Fairbanks, Eagle, Nome, Seattle, Hono¬ 
lulu, and points in California and elsewhere. 

“ The terminal yards of the railroad have been loca¬ 
ted just outside the incorporated limits of the city. 
They include round-houses, machine-shops, depots, 
office buildings, warehouses, as well as cottages for 
employees and officials.” 

“ It must hev cost a sight of money, Hap,” re¬ 
marked Bill, “ to build all them things,” when his 
companion had read about the other buildings that had 
been erected, as well as sites for reduction works and 
smelters near Cordova, including improvements on 
the tide flats that extend for miles south of the city as 
sites for the manufacturing concerns that can confi¬ 
dently be expected to be erected in the near future. 

“ It did cost a big sum, Bill,” replied Happy. “ In 
fact,” he added, “ it would have been impossible for 
the work on the railroad, the coal properties, or on the 
building of the city, to have been carried on had it 
not been for a combination of capitalists. There are 
some enterprises that are clearly impossible for in¬ 
dividual effort. There must be combination of capi¬ 
tal, and the work connected with the Copper River 
Railroad and the city of Cordova was undoubtedly of 
this character.” 

“ Then ye don’t think that the fellers what hev made 
a big lot of money be dangerous to the other fellers 
372 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


thet come into a country like Alaska, do ye, Hap?’ 
inquired Bill. 

“ I am too young to answer that question, Bill,” said 
Happy. “ Suppose we ask Professor Dimitri, or still 
better, Mr. Blavinski, what they think about it.” 

“ Do you think there is much danger to a country 
like Alaska for men like the Morgans or the Guggen- 
heims spending enormous sums of money for develop¬ 
ment, Mr. Blavinski ? ” inquired Happy. 

“ I certainly do not. I cannot see how else such a 
country could be developed unless the government un¬ 
dertook it,” replied Blavinski. “ And I believe it has 
generally been the experience that politics and ex¬ 
tended business operations do not mix in anything like 
a satisfactory manner. Don’t you agree with me, 
Dimitri ? ” he said to the professor. 

“ I am unable to see how any other opinion can 
sensibly be held, Petrof,” was the reply. 

“ Look at the circumstances connected with this part 
of Alaska,” he continued. “ Here are enormous and 
immensely valuable deposits of copper and coal, the 
copper so far from tide-water, that lacking the means 
for transportation afforded by a well-built railroad, 
even if it cost nothing to place pure metallic copper at 
the mouth of the mines, it could not be transported to 
tide-water except at the expenditure of a greater sum 
of money than that for which the copper could be sold 
in the market at that port. The same is true of the 
coal and other mineral deposits.” 

373 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Now how can this be done?” continued Blavin- 
ski. “ Only by raising an immense capital. It is 
absurd for the newspapers to howl about the dangers 
from monopolies when the capital required is so great. 
If people are willing to put up twenty million dollars 
for the building of a railroad, and the Alaska syndi¬ 
cate or the Guggenheims are willing to pay twenty- 
three million dollars for a copper mine, like the Bo¬ 
nanza, and three million dollars for another copper 
property in the neighborhood, and an additional million 
for securing competent expert advice, both the people 
of the United States and the government should be 
glad to have this done and not raise trouble for such 
a syndicate.” 

“ Three million dollars seems to be a large sum to 
pay for a single mine,” said Happy. “ Don’t you think 
it was a great risk for the Guggenheims ? ” 

“ Not at all,” replied Professor Dimitri. “ With 
the character of the professional advice the Guggen¬ 
heims employ there is no risk whatever. With the 
copper ore blocked out, and the value of the ore ac¬ 
curately known by careful chemical analysis, they can 
tell within a few cents a pound, one way or another, 
just what it will cost to place such ores at the mouths 
of the mines.” 

“ Quite correct, Nicola,” said Blavinski. “ I hap¬ 
pen to know that since the money was paid for the 
property you referred to, its owners have shipped in 
a single year from the property, copper having a value 
of five million dollars.” 


374 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ The figures you have just mentioned, Petrof,” re¬ 
marked Professor Dimitri, “ give us some idea of 
what we might sell either our copper or our coal pros¬ 
pects for, should we think it better to do so than to 
attempt to operate them ourselves.” 

“ That is certainly true,” was the reply; “ and this 
is a matter to which we should give our most careful 
consideration.” 

There was so much to talk about that Happy and 
Bill found that it required three or four readings of 
the article on Cordova, prepared under the direction of 
the Chamber of Commerce, instead of the single read¬ 
ing they had assumed as sufficient for the purpose. 
Besides their readings, Bill laboriously read and re¬ 
read the publication. 

“ I hev been puzzling myself, Hap,” he said when he 
had finished the work, “ just what the book means 
when it speaks of Cordova ez the gateway to interior 
Alaska. But I reckon I kin tell ye now.” 

“ And what do you make it to mean, Bill ? ” in¬ 
quired Happy. 

“ It means that Cordova be the place war a feller 
kin get into and out of the country.” 

“ That’s it, Bill,” replied Happy, wondering to him¬ 
self how Bill could possibly have had any difficulty as 
to the meaning of the word. “ If I wanted to call it 
by another name I could do so.” 

“ Tell Bill what that name would be, Hap ? ” said 
Bill. 


375 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ I would call Cordova ‘ The Open Sesame to 
Alaska/ ” 

“ Thet name be too hard for Bill, Hap,” was the 
reply. “ What do ye mean ? ” 

“ Don’t you remember the story in the c Arabian 
Nights’ about Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves?” 

“ I hev never heard it. Please tell me thet story, 
Hap,” said Bill. 

“ It is about a man named Ali Baba, who chanced 
one day to meet forty thieves passing through a deep 
wood, each man leading a heavily laden ass. Believ¬ 
ing them to be robbers, he climbed a tall tree without 
being seen. It happened that at the foot of this tree 
was a big cave, the door of which could only be opened 
by pronouncing certain magic words. As the captain 
of the thieves approached the rock he stopped. Ali 
Baba, who listened carefully, heard him say, ‘ Open 
Sesame,’ when a door in the rock opened of itself. 
The captain entered, and after being followed by all his 
men the door shut of itself. 

“ After a while the captain and his men came out 
of the cave. As soon as they were out the captain 
cried, ‘ Shut Sesame,’ when the door shut. Of course,” 
said Happy, “ as soon as Ali Baba thought he could 
safely do so, he descended the tree and standing be¬ 
fore the rock cried, ‘ Open Sesame,’ when the door 
opened permitting him to enter the cave.” 

“ And what did he find in the cave, Hap ? ” inquired 
Bill. 

“ Gold, silver, jewels, and other valuable things 

376 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


the robbers had stolen during many, many years. 
But,” he added, “ I need tell you no more. You will 
understand that when I say that Cordova is the 4 Open 
Sesame to Alaska,’ I mean it is the door, so long hid¬ 
den, through which one might get into the very rich 
part of the country if he knows the word that alone 
can open it.” 

“ And ez ye understand it, Hap,” inquired Bill, 
“ what be the ‘ Open Sesame ’ what lets a feller in to 
take his share of the riches? ” 

“ Plenty of money for the construction of railroads, 
the launching of steamboats, and the building of cities,” 
was the reply. 


377 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


The Controller Bay Harbor Myth 

There were so many important matters that required 
Blavinski's personal attention both at the Happy cop¬ 
per prospects and the coal prospects near the Miles 
Glacier that he had to remain in Alaska for a longer 
time than he had at first thought would be necessary. 

“ Nicola,” he said to Professor Dimitri the day that 
gentleman had come with Happy and the others to 
Cordova, “ if you can possibly wait over here for 
another week before leaving for the Gordon mine, I 
wish you would do so. If it were only our copper 
company that was concerned, I would not so much 
need your aid, but the coal prospects are in such a 
condition that I ought to have you, Happy, Bill, and 
the others interested in the prospects right here.” 

“ What is especially troubling you, Blavinski ? ” 

“ It is beginning to look to me as if our best means 
of handling the coal prospects will either be to sell 
outright to the railroad and the Bonanza copper peo¬ 
ple, or to enter into some kind of an agreement with 
them for sharing the earnings.” 

“ Why do you leave out the Bering River coal peo¬ 
ple. It seems to me, at first sight, as if they and not 
the Copper River Railroad people would be the natural 
purchasers.” 


378 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ I know it may seem so,” was the reply, “ blit those 
people are unfortunately in strained relations with 
each other. While the coal people might be glad 
enough to purchase outright our prospects at the 
Miles Glacier, yet they would only do so in order to 
get a formidable rival out of the field. The copper 
people, on the contrary, would welcome another coal 
company, if strong enough to compete with the com¬ 
pany at the Bering River coal-beds. They would, 
therefore, be more apt to offer either good prices or 
liberal terms, according to whether they bought out¬ 
right or entered into a satisfactory agreement with us 
which is mutually profitable.” 

“ What is it that keeps these people from making 
some amicable agreement, do you know?” 

“ As far as I can understand, a controversy exists 
between them as to the relative advantages of Katalla 
and Cordova as sites for the terminal station of the 
Copper River Railroad.” 

“ I thought the railroad people had settled that 
question several years ago in favor of Cordova,” said 
Dimitri. 

“ So they did,” replied Blavinski, “ but only after 
an exceedingly careful and costly examination of the 
two places.” 

“ Then why do they not come together? If Cordova 
has been selected by the railroad people that ought to 
settle the matter. At least it seems so to me.” 

“ I do not pretend to understand the matter thor¬ 
oughly,” was the reply. “ But, unfortunately, it looks 
379 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


as if politics has crept into the question, and it would 
seem some high government officials have not hesitated 
to take the side of Katalla and the Bering River coal 
people. In some of the articles covering the matter, 
that have appeared in the newspapers, statements have 
been made that are not only untenable in point of 
fact, but even ridiculous, and the United States Gov¬ 
ernment has been induced to make such changes in 
the coal-land laws that the development of Alaska has 
received a serious set-back, so that a continuance of 
its former prosperity has been effectually stopped.” 

“ But tell me why it has been thought necessary to 
make any change in the coal-land laws ? ” 

“ From what seems to me to be an entirely unwar¬ 
ranted fear that if the laws are not changed, the capi¬ 
talists who invested so much money in the coal lands 
will thereby acquire a monopoly in such lands, and 
thus ruin the people of Alaska by placing them in their 
power.” 

“ If you think we may soon receive propositions 
from either one or both of the parties to the contro¬ 
versy,” said Dimitri to Blavinski, “ I will remain in 
Alaska the additional week you suggest. Of course,” 
he added, “ since I have notified the people at Gordon 
when to look for us, I must send them a telegram, let¬ 
ting them know they need not expect to meet us for an 
additional week.” 

When Happy heard of the change of plans, he said 
to Blavinski: 


380 


The Land of Ice and Snow 

“ If there is nothing you wish me to attend to, sir, 
Bill and I would like to go with Mr. Justice and a 
friend of his, a newspaper reporter, in a large motor- 
boat to look at Cordova harbor.” 

“ I'll go with you, my lad,” said Blavinski. “ I 
should like to see for myself the harbor concerning 
which so much has appeared in the newspapers of the 
eastern United States.” 

“ And so should I,” said Dimitri. 

“ Mr. Justice has informed me,” said the reporter to 
Blavinski and his companions, as they got into the 
motor-boat, after the men had been introduced to each 
other, “ that you gentlemen have a large money inter¬ 
est in this part of Alaska, and are, therefore, desirous, 
as far as possible, of determining for yourselves 
whether or not Cordova Bay is suitable for a harbor 
for the trade a great railroad like the Copper River & 
Northwestern road is sure to require.” 

“We are all largely interested in Alaska,” replied 
Blavinski, speaking both for himself and his com¬ 
panions. “We are therefore glad of the opportunity 
of seeing for ourselves all we can of Cordova Bay as 
a harbor.” 

“ Not wishing to ask you to believe what I may tell 
you on my personal word only,” said the newspaper 
reporter to Blavinski, “ I have brought with me a num¬ 
ber of newspaper clippings referring to the relative 
merits of Cordova Bay and Controller Bay as harbors. 
I will be glad to read some of them to you and to dis- 

381 


The Land of ice and Snow 


cuss them with you as soon as you have had an oppor¬ 
tunity for examining the harbor.” 

“ This gentleman,” said Mr. Justice, referring to 
the newspaper man when he could get an opportunity 
of saying it privately, “ is one of the leading news¬ 
paper men of Alaska. He is thoroughly reliable, and 
you can at least be sure that he honestly believes all 
he tells you. In all cases, however,” he added, “ he 
informs me that he has brought newspaper clippings, 
so you will have the authority of the papers he quotes 
as to the probability of their truth.” 

“To those who have studied this part of Alaska,” 
remarked the reporter, “ and have assured themselves 
of the facts, there can be no doubt that the harbor at 
Cordova is not only the best in all respects for the 
natural seaport for a railroad constructed up the val¬ 
ley of the Copper River, but is in fact the only natural 
seaport in this neighborhood. 

“ The harbor of Cordova,” he added, “ is as free 
from ice as is the port of Seattle. I need hardly tell 
educated men like you that this is due to the heat 
brought here from the Japan ocean current, which 
keeps it warm when the winds blow on the south, and 
the fact that a high mountain range, extending along 
the southern coast, protects it from the cold winds 
from the interior during winter. 

“ I need not tell you,” he continued, “ since I un¬ 
derstand you have recently crossed the country from 
Fairbanks, that the summer temperature is very un¬ 
like what most of those who have never been in 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Alaska believe exists. Let me read you a clipping 
from the ‘ Telegram ’ of Portland, Ore. It is the 
reply a well-known newspaper reporter made when 
asked if it were not cold in Alaska during winter. 

Of course it is cold, as the thermometer goes. 
On the trails of the interior it may at this moment 
range from forty below in the daytime to sixty below 
at night, but that makes little difference to the pros¬ 
pectors in the hills, and on the thousands of miles of 
trail from Dawson to Nome, and from Valdez and 
Seward to the Koyukuk and the Iditarod, except that 
the sled-runners drag somewhat through the dry snow 
when the liquid is low in the thermometer. 

“ ‘ It is a very common error to picture Alaska as a 
desolate, dreary country in the wintertime. Once over 
the coast range of mountains you are in a land of 
clear skies, beyond the latitude of storms. There is 
not any too much sunshine in winter, to be sure, per¬ 
haps four hours a day at this time, but it is a mistake 
to imagine the landscape dark. Upon a clean white 
blanket of snow the moon and the aurora shed a re¬ 
fulgence that is almost daylight as compared with 
the pitch darkness of the winter nights in the States. 
Many Alaskans prefer winter to summer.’ 

“ But perhaps the best way will be for you to ask me 
questions as to just what you wish to know,” said the 
reporter to Blavinski and his friends as they sat in the 
comfortable cabin of the motor-boat, after they had 
gone over the harbor generally. 

“ Suppose we take up some of the false statements 

383 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


that have been made concerning the harbor of Cor¬ 
dova,” said Blavinski. 

“ For that purpose,” replied the reporter, “ let me 
read you an editorial from an Alaskan paper with a 
very large circulation: 

“ ‘ The best natural route to the interior is that of 
the Copper River Railroad, owned by this syndicate. 
That road has been built from Cordova Bay along the 
coast to the lower reaches of the Copper River, up that 
stream through a very difficult defile, and out into the 
riches of the Bonanza copper mines and the Matanuska 
and Bering River coal-fields. The syndicate controlled 
these two fields, including the now famous Cunning¬ 
ham claims, to such an extent to assure, with its trans¬ 
portation monopoly, absolute domination of future de¬ 
velopment. 

“ ‘ The railroad, after building to Cordova Bay as its 
tide-water terminal, found the harbor there impracti¬ 
cable and decided to use Controller Bay, some forty 
miles down the coast. -The fact that Cordova Bay was 
to be abandoned and Controller Bay used was a matter 
of common knowledge among Alaska authorities. 
Everybody knew it.’ 

“ To show you the falsity of the statement I have 
just read,” said the reporter, “ let me say that the Cop¬ 
per River Railroad does not run along the coast. Its 
line follows a certain river into the interior of Alaska, 
with a branch to Kennecott. It does not reach the 
Matanuska coal-fields by some hundred miles. 

“ Between the Copper River Railroad and the Mata- 

384 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


nuska coal-fields are three impassable mountain ranges, 
in the center of which is Mount McKinley, over twenty 
thousand feet high, and the road has not been built, 
either to the Bering River or to the Matanuska coal¬ 
fields.” 

“ I am unable to understand how such manifestly un¬ 
true statements can be publicly made,” said Blavinski. 

“ Such statements,” said the reporter, “ will event¬ 
ually be refuted. I am glad to say that this is already 
being done. In a recent issue of the 4 Daily Alaska ’ 
of Cordova, there is an editorial concerning the recent 
investigation trip of Secretary Fisher, of the Interior 
Department of the United States Government, to 
southeastern Alaska. 

44 4 Mr. Fisher’s visit to Alaska convinced him that 
there had been a gross misrepresentation as to the value 
of the Bering River fields by the magazines and some 
of the government’s special agents. The Controller 
harbor bubble has burst, and the secretary soon learned, 
as everyone here knew, that there never was a feasi¬ 
ble harbor there, and in making it a subject for a 
national controversy the joke was on the members of 
Congress who, through ignorance, thought they saw a 
mountain where only a mole-hill existed.’ 

44 But,” continued the reporter, 44 Gifford Pinchot 
and his associates decided to come to Alaska and see 
for themselves. They intended to cover the same 
ground as that examined by Secretary Fisher and his 
companions. These gentlemen,” said the reporter, 
44 reached Katalla on September 20, 1911, after lying 
Z 3 g 5 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


out on the mud-flats of Controller Bay all night, dur¬ 
ing which time they suffered much from the inclemency 
of the weather.” 

“ Then you think the Controller Bay harbor bubble 
has at last burst,” remarked Blavinski to the reporter. 

“ I do,” was the reply. 

“ Is it true that the people of Alaska are in arms 
against the domination of material and political Alaska 
by the Guggenheims ? ” inquired Professor Dimitri. 

“ The Guggenheim bugaboo has been overworked, 
with not a little harm to Alaska. Except for a small 
section of the territory, the Alaskan knows nothing of 
the Guggenheims and has seen nothing of their ac¬ 
tivities. There is room in Alaska for a thousand mon¬ 
opolies such as the Guggenheims are reputed to be, 
and the people of Alaska would like to see them come. 
All the misinformed and misdirected agitation against 
the capitalists, who are pouring money into the de¬ 
velopment of the resources of the Copper River Basin, 
has to some extent had the result of scaring other capi¬ 
tal, and the average Alaskan resents such a campaign. 
The Guggenheims have paid handsomely for every¬ 
thing they own, and deserve commendation and en¬ 
couragement. At the same time they are keeping 
watchful control of activities that might lead to op¬ 
pressive monopoly. 

“ Too often the real danger to the healthy develop¬ 
ment of Alaska is none other than the ‘ hardy pros¬ 
pector.’ I have known a group of eight honorable 
citizens to stake and claim a valley one hundred miles 
386 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


long. They do it by virtue of the power of attorney 
and the association claim, and entirely within their 
legal rights. If the abuse of these two privileges were 
remedied, as it well might be if Congress—Alaska’s 
only legislature—devoted a few minutes to its ‘ non¬ 
contiguous possession,’ Alaskans would be generally 
satisfied with the Federal Government, and the develop¬ 
ment of the placer resources would take a fresh im¬ 
petus. At the same time vast areas of prospective 
placer ground are tied up in blanket claims.” 


387 


CHAPTER XXIX 


Conclusion 

While the others were in Cordova assisting Blavinski 
in carrying on negotiations as regards the coal pros¬ 
pect and in pushing the developments of the Happy 
copper prospects, Clinton and Nicholas Dimitri found 
time to visit the McKinley gold district with Professor 
Dimitri to examine their gold-quartz prospects. Work 
was started on them by sinking shafts and tunnelings. 
The values thus demonstrated showed the prospects to 
be far more valuable than they had first thought 

Workings already opened in the camp showed gold 
values varying from $2.50 to $200 to the ton. Among 
other advantages of the district, is its nearness to the 
Copper River Railroad and the abundance of water¬ 
power and timber. 

“ Do ye kere, Nicholas/’ said Clinton one day to 
his partner, “ ef I make over one of the five claims that 
hev been made out in my name to Ralph ? He has been 
so liberal like to me that I’ll be durned ef I wouldn’t 
feel mean ef I didn’t do this. I speak to ye about it, 
sence we agreed not to make over eny of our claims 
onless the other agreed.” 

“I so thoroughly agree to your doing this thing, 
Harry,” replied Dimitri, “ that I had already deter¬ 
mined to make over one of my claims to the lad. What 
388 


i he Land of Ice and Snow 


do you think of this, father?” he said to Professor 
Dimitri, who had been present during the above con¬ 
versation. 

“ It is a very proper action, Nicholas,” was the 
reply. “ Happy has been more than liberal to you 
and your partner.” 

“ Ralph,” said Clinton one day after their return 
from the McKinley Lake gold prospects, “ here be a 
little paper what my partner and I wish ye to accept. 
It be a small gift to ye of two separate claims on our 
McKinley Lake gold prospects.” 

“ I hope you gentlemen did not think I expected such 
a gift,” replied Happy. 

“ I kain’t pretend ter say what Nicholas thought,” 
replied Clinton, “ but ez fer ez I be concerned, I’ll be 
durned ef I would not feel blame mean ef I did not do 
this. What do ye say, Nicholas? Tell the lad.” 

“ I understand just what you mean,” said Nicholas 
to Happy. “ I do not for a moment believe you ex¬ 
pected this little gift, or even wished us to make it. 
Although you are so liberal, yet you never seem to 
think that anything is coming to you as a matter of 
right. However, unless you accept this gift, your 
uncle and myself will feel both hurt and mortified.” 

“ I sincerely thank both of you and gladly accept it,” 
said Happy. 

“ Let me congratulate you, Happy,” said Professor 
Dimitri to the lad. “ From what I have seen of the 
prospects, I believe they will prove very valuable. 
3 8 9 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


Petrof,” he said to Blavinski, “ you must see if you 
can do something to turn these prospects into a mine.” 

“ All in good time,” was the reply. “ The Happy 
Copper Company and the Happy coal prospects are all 
I can properly attend to at one time. When these are 
in better shape I will be glad to finance the McKinley 
Lake gold prospects, provided, of course, I am re¬ 
quested to do so by the owners.” 

The Alaska properties, i. e., the Happy copper and 
coal prospects, were at last in as satisfactory condi¬ 
tion as could be expected. 

“ There are no reasons for your party remaining here 
any longer, Nicola,” said Blavinski to Professor Dimi¬ 
tri. “ Work on the copper property is going on satis¬ 
factorily. Nicholas Dimitri has agreed to take charge 
of the mining in connection with Clinton. I think an 
additional week or so in Cordova and at the Miles 
Glacier claims will leave things in such condition as 
to enable me to return to the Gordon mine.” 

“ Then we will leave on to-morrow’s steamer from 
Cordova to Seattle,” said Professor Dimitri. “ I had 
planned to give our party the pleasure of a return by 
the inside passage, but I think the gain in time we can 
make by the outside passage will make it the prefer¬ 
able route.” 

“ I saw Mr. Justice to-day,” remarked Happy, “ and 
am glad to say we shall have the pleasure of his com¬ 
pany. I like him very much. He tells me he goes di¬ 
rectly to Philadelphia from Seattle, and kindly offers 
390 



*' There was a grand welcome ... at 
Gordon ” Page 391 
























































































































































p 









































































The Land of Ice and Snow 


to take some little things to that city for me to the 
Gordons as well as to Norman, Fred, and Timmv Mc¬ 
Nally.” 

The sea voyage to Seattle was made without occur¬ 
rence of note, except that the weather at times was 
fairly rough and both Scipio and Awake-in-the-Night 
were very sick for a day. 

When landed safely in Seattle, Awake-in-the-Night 
remarked: 

“ Indian heap glad to get off boat. Now he go to 
Gordon mine and put his tepee there.” 

“ What does Awake-in-the-Night mean, Bill?” in¬ 
quired Happy. 

“ I reckon he either intends getting married, or, if 
he be already married, of bringing his squaw thar ef 
he hez one,” replied Bill with a grin. 

“ What made you so seasick, Scipio ? ” inquired 
Happy when Seattle was reached. The ocean was too 
rough for you, I guess.” 

“ Now, Marse Hap,” replied the Negro indignantly, 
“ dat’s jest war you be mistaken. It warn’t no toss¬ 
ing of de waves dat make Scipio sick, it war de terrible 
bad cooking on de ship. I jess know it war dat, fer I 
could taste de food I hed eaten and it made me sick.” 

There was a grand welcome for the party at Gordon 
when the train on which they arrived drew up at that 
station. All were there to greet them—Rob, his father 
39i 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


and grandfather, Professor Engleman, Mr. Christian, 
Emil, his uncle, Pete, and even Sam Ling the cook. 

“ We are all very glad to have you back with us,” 
said the engineer, the two Gordons, Professor Engle¬ 
man, and Mr. Christian. 

“ You have grown better looking than ever, Happy,” 
said Rob, jollying his friend. 

“ That’s because there was so much room in that 
direction,” remarked Happy with a laugh. 

“ I be glad to see yer agin, Bill,” said Pete. “ I 
hear ye’ve been doing great things in Alaska.” 

“ The party I war with hev been doing things a few, 
and I hev done a little myself,” said Bill; “but I be 
glad to git back to Gordon agin.” 

“ Sam Ling velly glad to see Scipio and to talkee to 
him.” 

“ Scipio glad to see Sam,” was the reply. “ Scipio 
has larned how they cook on big steamships, in hotels, 
and sich places. Perhaps he will show Sam some of 
dese things if he wishes it.” 

“ Sam Ling like to learn welly well. He also will 
show Scipio how to cookee.” 

“ You have been very liberal to my uncle and my¬ 
self, Happy,” said Emil. “ Uncle was telling me the 
other day of a letter Mr. Blavinski sent to Professor 
Engleman as to what the shares of the Happy Copper 
Company were worth. He said that two parties he 
knew were willing to purchase such shares at three 
392 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


and a half times their face value. But I'm awful glad 
to see you again, old fellow. I don’t think you have 
changed much. You are the same jolly looking chum 
you always were.” 

“ But you have changed, Emil,” remarked Happy. 
“ You are not only older-looking, but are much more 
tidy than when I left.” 

“ Do you think so? ” said Emil, blushing. 

“ Shall I tell Happy the secret, Emil? ” inquired Rob 
laughing. 

“ I might as well say 4 yes,’ ” replied Emil, blushing 
more than ever. 44 You’ll tell him anyhow.” 

44 What would you say if I told you Emil is engaged 
to be married to a very beautiful young lady from 
California, Happy?” said Rob. 

44 What would I say ? ” replied Happy with a most 
wonderful succession of smiles. 44 If, as I am sure is 
the case, the young lady is all right, I say 4 let me con¬ 
gratulate you, Emil. May your married life be even 
brighter and happier than your fondest imagination 
paints it.’ ” 

44 Thank you, Happy,” replied Emil. 44 1 am sure it 
will. Of this, however, you can certainly be assured, 
my taking a wife will not in the least lessen my affec¬ 
tion for my old chums.” 

44 Has the day for the marriage been arranged, 
Rob ? ” inquired Happy, when Emil had gone to the 
assay office to look after some work. 

44 It’s all arranged, Happy,” was the reply. 44 It 
takes place two weeks from to-day. By the way,” he 
393 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


added, “ do you know you are responsible for this 
early date being selected? ” 

“ How do you make that out? ” inquired Happy in 
surprise. “ This is the first time I ever heard of the 
matter.” 

“ It was that copper share you gave Emil. His uncle 
was unwilling Emil should marry until he had at least 
ten thousand dollars laid away. He could have done 
this if he sold the shares in the Gordon mine his uncle 
gave him, but did not care to do so. When, however, 
Blavinski wrote and offered to give three and a half 
times its face value for his stock, he sold a portion of 
these shares and fixed the day for the marriage as you 
have heard.” 

“ What do you think of the future Mrs. Emil 
Schloss, Rob ? ” inquired Happy. “ What kind of a 
person is she ? ” 

“ I think she’s all right,” was the reply, “ and that 
she will make Emil very happy.” 

“ I am very glad to hear you say that, Rob,” said 
Happy. “ And now tell me about the Gordon mine. 
How is it developing? Does it still give the same 
promise of a great future that was predicted for it? ” 

“ The mine seems to promise even greater things 
than we thought, the farther we carry the develop¬ 
ments. The richness of certain parts is so great that 
Mr. Christian tells me it seems almost incredible. In¬ 
deed,” he added with a smile, “ if you are thinking of 
getting married, Happy, you can safely do so—at least 
the question of expense need not stand in your road.” 
394 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Thank you, Rob,” said Happy. “ I am far too 
young to think of such a thing. But let me ask you, 
are you thinking of entering into such a partnership? ” 

“ It’s the same thing here, Happy,” was the reply. 
“ Like yourself, I am too young for any such venture.” 

“ Come over to the Pahozona House, Happy,” said 
Rob, smiling, on the second day after his arrival at 
Gordon. “ There is to be a meeting of ‘ The Great 
Three,’ you, Emil, and myself. Emil and I wish form¬ 
ally to welcome you back to Gordon, and you and I, 
to congratulate Emil on his approaching marriage.” 

“ I’ll come with pleasure,” was the reply. “ I am 
sure we shall have a glorious time.” 

“ Light-of-the-Sun is indeed pleased to see his half- 
son, Pahozona, again,” said the shaman, who reached 
Gordon on the third day after the return of the party 
from Alaska. “ The Trues have listened to the prayers 
of our shamans, and Pahozona has safely returned to 
his friends. Tell me all about the wonderful things you 
have seen and done.” 

The two had a long conversation, during which 
Light-of-the-Sun was much interested in what Happy 
told him about the totem-poles and the potlatch. Happy 
saw that the shaman was well informed in regard to 
these things, and took great pleasure in telling him 
about them. 

“ And now, Pahozona,” said Light-of-the-Sun, “ my 
people wish me to ask you to make them another visit 
395 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


to the top of the mountain where are the gates of the 
Land of the Happy Hereafter. Will you not come? 
My people will give you a glad welcome.” 

“ I will return with you, Light-of-the-Sun, and so 
will Bill and Awake-in-the-Night. They asked me if 
I was going and said they would like to go with me.” 

“ My people will be glad to welcome any of the 
friends of the great Pahozona.” 

But we must part with the friends and acquaintances 
with whom we have lived in the six volumes of the 
“ Young Mineralogist Series.” A few words may be 
added as to what some of them did afterward. 

Emil was happily married, but did not give up his 
work in the assay laboratory of the Gordon mine. 

Scipio bought a farm in Virginia and took to him¬ 
self a wife, with whom he lived in great happiness. 

Awake-in-the-Night put up a tepee on the outskirts 
of the Gordon property. After living in it with his 
squaw for a short time, he became dissatisfied and re¬ 
placed it by a good-sized one-story house, saying: 

“ Awake-in-the-Night now heap rich. Don’t have 
to live in tepee. Will build a house for himself same as 
white man.” 

Blavinski returning to the Gordon mine, brought 
with him great news of the Happy Copper Company, 
which prospect is beginning to become a great mine. 
As to the coal prospect, we can give no further infor¬ 
mation, since the end of this series of books has 
brought us to the present time. The future will, there- 

396 


1 he Land of Ice and Snow 


fore, have to tell what these claims were worth. This, 
however, we can say, that if they had been willing to 
sell outright they might have obtained enough money 
for their comfortable support for the rest of their 
lives. 

But what is this we see? A cellar laboratory in 
Philadelphia, where Norman and Fred again welcome 
Happy and Rob. 

“ That was a splendid lot of copper and other min¬ 
erals you sent us from Alaska, Happy,” said Norman. 
“We had great times studying them and reading about 
them.” 

“ Just as we did with the minerals Professor Engle- 
man gave us to determine,” said Fred. 

But, just then, footsteps were heard descending the 
cellar stairs. 

“And sure it’s Jimmy Patrick McNally who’s glad 
to see ye both agin in Philadelphia,” said the lad when 
he entered the cellar. “ Many thanks to ye, Happy, for 
the beautiful things ye sent me from Alaska. I was 
glad to get them, but I was especially glad to know that 
ye’d not forgotten me. 

“ And have ye heard the news, Happy? ” continued 
McNally. 

“ No, tell me,” was the reply. 

“ I am going to the Gordon mine to Professor En- 
gleman. I have been studying while you were away, 
and am going there to larn to be a geologist, same as 
the professor.” 


397 


The Land of Ice and Snow 


“ Don’t you see, Rob,” said Happy one day while 
sitting in the library of the Gordon house on Green 
Street, “ that I was right in believing that the loss of 
my circus ticket in West Philadelphia was a great 
piece of good luck. Had I not lost it, I might never 
have met you in Fairmount Park near the Lincoln 
Monument; I might never have met Emil or Pro¬ 
fessor Engleman, and the other gentlemen; I might 
never have learned mineralogy, and had the wonder¬ 
ful good luck that has come to me ever since.” 

“ I suppose you are right, Happy,” replied Rob; 
“ but I think it was you who made the good luck.” 

“ I guess you are partly right, Rob,” replied Happy, 
“ but not entirely so.” 

Of course with such valuable holdings as Happy and 
his friends had in Alaska, it was but natural they paid 
several visits to that country. Happy did this a num¬ 
ber of times, even going over with Blavinski and Pro¬ 
fessor Dimitri to St. Petersburg, where Happy was re¬ 
ceived by the czar. He also availed himself of the offer 
of the Czar of Russia to enter college and later on took 
a course in mining engineering. Though no definite 
promise is made, it is not improbable that what Happy 
and his friends did during these visits will be related 
in another series. If so it will probably be called the 
“ Alaska Series.” 


398 


APPENDIX 


Totem-poles. “ William Duncan, the spiritual 
leader and social adviser of the Alaskan Indians, 
whose self-sacrificing work is well known, says, con¬ 
cerning the totem: ‘ Each tribe or band of these In¬ 
dians is divided into four classes. The totems have to 
do only with the clan and not the tribes. Clan rela¬ 
tionship is a closer bond of union than tribal relation¬ 
ship. Before the doorway of every Alaskan home 
were erected durable monuments, which, to the natives, 
conveyed only the meaning of a door-plate, or per¬ 
haps that of the Scotch plaid. In the home before 
which a traveler recognized his clan-totem, he was 
assured of every hospitality, because of the fast pass¬ 
ing, not merely of the old Alaskan customs, but of the 
Alaskan Indians. Far in the interior, away from 
points of contact with civilization, old travel customs, 
which include the erection of the totem before every 
permanent home, are yet maintained.’ As Mr. Duncan 
points out, totems are in no sense idols. He asserts 
that the Indians have no idols as such. It is true they 
wore charms representing things of the earth, sky, 
and air, and the figures of their charms were repre¬ 
sented on their totems. Many of these charms are 
illustrations of legends, but the totems themselves 
are no more objects of worship than are the symbols 
of Masonry among civilized nations. 

399 


APPENDIX 


“ In an article concerning totems, published in 4 The 
Metlakahtla,’ Mr. Duncan says: 

44 4 A stranger, with or without his family, in visiting 
an Indian village, need never be at a loss for shelter; all 
he has to do, is to make for the house belonging to one 
of his crest, which he can easily distinguish by the 
totem-pole in front of it. There he is sure of a wel¬ 
come and of the best the host can afford. There he is 
accounted a brother, and treated and trusted as such. 

44 4 1 may mention too, that the subdivision of the 
bands into their social clans accounts in measure for the 
number of petty chiefs existing in each tribe, as each 
clan can boast of its head men. The more property a 
clan can accumulate and give away to rival clans, the 
greater number of head men it may have.’ ” (Con¬ 
densed from a circular, 44 All the Year Round Tours,” 
by the Pacific Coast Steamship Company, or quoted 
directly from the writing of Duncan in 44 The Metla- 
kahtla.”) 


400 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


CHEMICAL SYMBOLS MENTIONED 


Ag.argentum or silver 

A 1 . aluminium 

As . arsenic 

Ca . calcium or lime 

Cu . cuprum or copper 

F. fluorine 

Fe . ferrum or iron 

K . kalium or potassium 

Li . lithium 

Mo . molybdenum 

Na . natrium or sodium 

O . oxygen 

PI . plumbum or lead 

S . sulphur 

Si. silicon 

Sn .stannum or tin 

Ti. titanium 

Wo . wolframium or tungsten 

Zn . zinc 


Anorthite (CaAl 2 Si 2 0 8 ). Lime feldspar. A rare 
variety of feldspar. (See Feldspars.) 

Albite (NaAlSi 3 0 8 ). Soda feldspar. The name 
albite is derived from the Latin albus, white, the char¬ 
acteristic color of this variety of feldspar. Albite is a 
little harder than orthoclase. 

401 





















MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


A variety of albite, known as Labradorite, because 
first found in Labrador, exhibits a beautiful play of 
colors when examined in the sunlight in certain direc¬ 
tions. 

Argentiferous Galena. Galena containing a suf¬ 
ficient quantity of silver to warrant its being employed 
as a source of silver. 

Arseno-pyrite (FeS 2 .FeAs 2 ). Arsenical pyrites, 
or iron sulph-arsenide. Arseno-pyrite is hard enough 
to give sparks when struck with steel. 

Azurite ( 2 CuC 0 3 .Cu( 0 H) 2 ). Blue carbonate 
of copper. 

Blue Carbonate of Copper. A name sometimes 
given to azurite. (See Azurite.) 

Bornite (Cu 3 FeS 3 ). Sulphide of copper and iron, 
or three atoms of copper and one atom of iron com¬ 
bined chemically with three atoms of sulphur. 

Bornite is also known by a variety of other names, 
such as erubescite, purple copper ore, peacock copper, 
etc. 

Calcite (CaCo 3 ). Carbonate of lime. Calcite is, 
next to quartz, the commonest of mineral substances. 
It occurs in a variety of both crystallized and uncrys¬ 
tallized forms, and in both colorless and white sub- 
402 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


stances. The crystallized varieties readily break or 
cleave in flat planes in the direction of certain of the 
faces of the crystals. 

Ordinary marble is a variety of calcite and occurs 
in different colors, such as white, red, blue, yellow, 
black, etc. 

Calcite occurs in huge mountainous masses in a 
variety known as limestone. When burned in the fur¬ 
nace it parts with its carbonic acid and is changed into 
quicklime, employed in the manufacture of mortar. 

Cassiterite (Sn 0 2 ). Tinstone, or an ore of tin 
consisting of one atom of tin chemically combined 
with two atoms of oxygen. 

Cassiterite, or tinstone, occurs in fissure-veins or 
lodes, as well as in placer deposits; i. e., in deposits in 
which the particles of tin ore, obtained from the break¬ 
up of the mineral in tin-veins, are spread through sands 
or gravels. Cassiterite is sometimes called oxide of 
tin. 

Cassiterite generally occurs in dark-brown or almost 
black crystals that have a shiny or adamantine luster. 
It has a hardness of from 6.5 to 7, or between the 
hardness of orthoclase and quartz. Specific gravity 
about 7. 

The tin ore that occurs in placer deposits is called 
stream tin. 

Chalcanthite. Blue vitriol, or hydrous copper 
sulphate. 


403 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


Chalcocite (Cu 2 S). Copper glance, or two atoms 
of copper combined chemically with one atom of sul¬ 
phur. 

Copper glance, or chalcocite, is one of the most 
valuable ores of copper. When pure, it consists of 
about eighty per cent of pure copper. 

Copper glance has a beautiful metallic luster at 
fresh fractures, and can be scratched by a knife-blade. 
In this respect it differs from pyrite. 

Chalcopyrite (CuFeS 2 ). Copper pyrites, or sul¬ 
phide of copper and iron. Chalcopyrite consists of one 
atom of copper and one atom of iron combined with 
two atoms of sulphur. It is sometimes known as 
yellow copper ore from its brass-yellow color. So 
closely does it resemble metallic gold that it is often 
mistaken for it, thus gaining the name of fool’s gold. 

Chalcopyrite, or copper pyrites, can be distinguished 
from iron pyrites by its being readily scratched by 
a .knife-blade. It can be distinguished from gold by 
being brittle. Therefore, when a fragment of copper 
pyrites is placed on a hard surface like an anvil, it is 
broken into fragments by the blow from a hammer, 
while gold is readily beaten out into a sheet. 

Copper Glance. A name sometimes given to chal¬ 
cocite. (See Chalcocite.) 

Cuprite (Cu 2 0 ). Red copper ore, or two atoms of 
copper combined chemically with one atom of oxygen. 

404 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


Erubescite. A name sometimes given to bornite. 
(See Bornite.) 

Feldspars. A variety of mineral silicates, the most 
important of which are: 

Orthoclase (KAlSi 3 0 8 ), or potash feldspar. (See 
Orthoclase.) 

Anorthite (CaAl 2 Si 2 0 8 ), or lime feldspar. (See 
Anorthite.) 

Albite (NaAlSi 3 0 8 ), or soda feldspar. (See 
Albite.) 

The feldspars are found in granite-veins and form 
an essential part of such common rocks as granite, 
gneiss, and basalt. They consist chemically of silicates 
of aluminium with potash, soda, lime, and sometimes 
baryta. 

Float Tin. A name sometimes given to stream tin, 
or cassiterite, occurring in placer deposits. 

Fluorite. A name sometimes given to fluorspar. 
(See Fluorspar.) 

Fluorspar (CaF 2 ). Calcium fluoride, or one atom 
of calcium combined chemically with two atoms of 
fluorine. 

A mineral that occurs in the form of cubic crystals 
of a great variety of colors, such as yellow, brown, red, 
purple, and green. Some varieties are colorless. 

405 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


Although beautiful in appearance and capable of 
taking a high polish, fluorspar is very little prized for 
ornamental purposes, since its hardness is too low. 

Fluorspar possesses the power of fluorescence; i. e., 
of shining when exposed to the sunlight. 

Fluorspar is sometimes called fluorite. 

Galena (PbS). Lead sulphide, or one atom of 
lead combined chemically with one atom of sulphur. 

A surface of freshly cut galena closely resembles 
lead in its bluish lead-gray color and its bright metallic 
luster. Its specific gravity is about the same as that of 
metallic iron. It can be readily recognized by its pecu¬ 
liar fracture, breaking as it does into a multitude of 
small rectangular blocks. 

Galena is the principal ore of lead. Galena fre¬ 
quently contains varying quantities of silver, when it is 
known as argentiferous galena. 

Idocrase. A name sometimes given to vesuvianite. 
(See Vesuvianite.) 

Ilmenite. Titanic iron, or metallic titanium and 
iron combined with oxygen. 

The chemical formula of some varieties of ilmenite 
is FeTi 0 4 , or one atom of iron and one atom of tita¬ 
nium combined with four atoms of oxygen. 

Iron Pyrites (FeS 2 ). One atom of iron combined 
with two atoms of sulphur. 

406 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


Iron pyrites is one of the commonest of the metallic 
minerals. It has a high metallic luster and a brass 
or golden yellow color. It is sufficiently hard to 
scratch glass, and to give off sparks when struck with 
a hard substance like steel. 

Iron pyrites is sometimes called pyrite. 

Jack. A name sometimes given to an important 
zinc ore known as zinc sulphide, or sphalerite. (See 
Sphalerite.) 

Lodestone. A name sometimes given to magnetic 
oxide of iron, or magnetite. (See Magnetite.) 

Magnetic Pyrites. A name sometimes given to 
pyrrhotite. (See Pyrrhotite.) 

Magnetite (Fe(Fe 2 ) 0 4 ). Magnetic oxide of iron, 
or three atoms of iron combined with four atoms of 
ox en. 



Magnetite is a heavy black mineral, hard enough to 
scratch glass, and is itself hardly scratched by the 
blade of a penknife. It has an iron-black color. It 
has a specific gravity of 5.18; that is, a given piece of 
magnetite is 5.18 times as heavy as an equal bulk of 
water. 

Magnetite is the same as the lodestone, being 
strongly attracted by a magnet, and drawing or attract¬ 
ing small particles of iron to it when rolled in a quan¬ 
tity of iron filings. In other words, magnetite, or the 


407 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


lodestone, possesses magnetic properties and, like all 
magnets, when supported so as to be free to move, as 
when hung by a thread, comes to rest with certain of 
its ends or poles pointing to the earth’s North and 
South Poles. 

Magnetite is an important ore of iron. 

Molybdenite (MoS 2 ). A mineral consisting of 
one atom of the metallic element molybdenum com¬ 
bined with two atoms of sulphur. 

Molybdenite resembles graphite, or the so-called 
black lead, and like it, is very soft, leaving a mark on 
paper. It has a bluish-black color, a metallic luster, 
and a soft, greasy, or soapy feel. 

Native Copper (Cu). Copper that occurs natu¬ 
rally in the pure or metallic state. 

Orthoclase (KAlSi 3 0 8 ). Potash feldspar. Pot¬ 
ash feldspar, or orthoclase, is the commonest of the 
feldspars. It is the variety of feldspar that forms one 
of the constituents of granite, gneiss, and other similar 
rocks. The name orthoclase is given to this mineral 
because it possesses two cleavages at right angles to 
each other. 

Orthoclase has a hardness of 6, being harder than 
apatite and not as hard as quartz. It can scratch glass. 
Though sometimes transparent and colorless, yet it is 
generally of a reddish or pale yellow color. 

When orthoclase is obtained in large masses, free 
408 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


from quartz, mica, and iron, it is often employed in 
the manufacture of porcelain. 

Oxide of Tin (Sn 0 2 ). A name sometimes given to 
cassiterite. (See Cassiterite.) 

Peacock Copper. A name sometimes given to 
bornite. (See Bornite.) 

Purple Copper Ore. A name sometimes given to 
bornite. (See Bornite.) 

Pyrite. A name sometimes given to iron pyrites. 
(See Iron Pyrites.) 

Pyrrhotite (Fe 7 0 8 ). Magnetic pyrites, or an ore 
of iron consisting of seven atoms of iron chemically 
combined with eight atoms of oxygen. 

Pyrrhotite takes its name from its reddish-bronze 
color. It is called magnetic pyrites because it is at¬ 
tracted to a magnetlike magnetic substance, such as 
iron. 

Quartz (Si 0 2 ). Silicon dioxide, or one atom or 
silicon combined chemically with two atoms of oxygen. 

Quartz is by far the commonest of all mineral sub¬ 
stances. It occurs in a variety of crystalline forms, 
for the greater part clear and colorless, but some¬ 
times of a blue, black, yellow, brown, or other color. 

Quartz constitutes the greater part of the sands of 
the seashore. It occurs as one of the principal ingre- 
409 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


clients in granite, gneiss, and many other common 
rocks. Sandstone consists almost entirely of quartz 
grains cemented together by silica or other mineral 
substance. 

Quartz has a hardness of 7; is harder than orthoclase 
and not so hard as topaz. Since it takes and retains 
a polish it is frequently employed as gems, or for or¬ 
namental purposes. Some varieties of quartz so em¬ 
ployed are rock crystal—the clear, colorless variety; 
amethyst, a purplish or bluish variety; false topaz, a 
yellow variety; rose-quartz, the rose-colored variety; 
and milk quartz, a white variety. 

There are also a variety of imperfectly crystallized 
or hidden crystallized varieties of quartz, such as chal¬ 
cedony, agate, carnelian, onyx, sardonyx, jasper, and 
flint. 

Red Copper Ore. A name sometimes given to 
cuprite. (See Cuprite.) 

Scheelite (CaW 0 4 ). Calcium tungstate, or one 
atom of calcium combined chemically with four atoms 
of tungsten or wolframium. 

Sphalerite (ZnS). Zinc sulphide, or one atom 
of zinc chemically combined with one atom of sulphur. 

Sphalerite is frequently called zinc blende. It is 
frequently found associated with galena. It is the 
principal ore from which zinc is obtained. Its hard¬ 
ness varies from 3.5 to 4. Its specific gravity is 4. 

410 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


It occurs in various colors, the commonest of which 
is dark reddish brown. The crystals have a brilliant 
or adamantine luster. 

Sphalerite, or zinc sulphide, is sometimes called 
Jack. 

Stream Tin. A name sometimes given to tin ore, 
or cassiterite, that occurs in placer deposits; i. e., as 
small particles distributed through sands or gravels. 
(See Cassiterite.) 

Tenorite (CuO). Black oxide of copper, or one 
atom of copper combined chemically with one atom of 
oxygen. 

Tinstone. A name sometimes given to cassiterite. 
(See Cassiterite.) 

Tourmaline. A complex silicate of alumina, with 
iron, boron, lithium, soda, or potash that occurs in a 
great variety of colors, such as pinks, greens, blacks, 
yellows, browns, blues, grays, whites, as well as in a 
colorless condition. 

Tourmaline takes a high polish and, since it is so 
hard, can readily retain its polish. It is therefore 
highly esteemed as a gem. It has a vitreous or glass¬ 
like luster. 

The different colors in tourmalines are due often to 
the presence of minute quantities of different chemical 
elements. For example, the pink tourmaline owes its 
411 


MINERALS MENTIONED IN VOLUME VI 


color to a small quantity of lithium. Black tourmaline 
owes its color to the presence of iron. 

Vesuvianite. A complex silicate of alumina, iron, 
and lime. Vesuvianite is sometimes called idocrase. 
It takes the name of vesuvianite from Mount Vesuvius, 
in whose rocks it occurs in fine specimens. 

Vesuvianite somewhat resembles brown granite and 
tourmaline. 

Wolframite. A tungstate of iron and manganese. 
Wolframite has an iron-black color, a submetallic lus¬ 
ter, and a fine cleavage. 

Zinnewaldite. A lithia-iron mica. 

Zinc Sulphide. A name sometimes given to sphal¬ 
erite. (See Sphalerite.) 


the end 


412 


OCT 24 1912 






I 








































w 





























































00024750775 











